Home

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual

1. D of Aation OBit OKey Action Bit dialog box ODevice O Device dialog box Setting of Device No OAction OSet OAlternate OReset O Momentary m OWord OKey Action Word dialog box ODevice O Device dialog box _ Setting of Device No Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD 16bit 32bit Real O Type OFixed Set the fixed value to be written to word device L_ Olndirect Device O Device dialog box L_Olnitial value OCondition value condition OReset value t_ OExtended OKey Action Extended Key Extended Utility Key Window Test Window Start hardcopy dialog box action Password Clean screen Change Brightness Ladder monitor System monitor Special function monitor Abort hardcopy Clock setting Network monitor OBase OKey Action Base switching Servo amplifier monitor List editor motion monitor dialog box OPrevious OFixed OScreen Image dialog box Choose the Screen QDevice Device dialog box Setting of Device No Data type Bit Word BIN16 for bit Nord BCD16 ONo OScreen Image dialog box Choose the OHold Screen tor word m OEdit OEdit Display Format dialog box Set the conditional expression and switching method ODelete Deletion of operation t OUp Down Move operat
2. 234 App 12 App 12 APPENDICES MELSOFT App 13 App 13 APPENDICES App 14 4 For F940GOT 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 240 260 280 300 MELSOFT 319 0 20 js 40 60 Fs 80 fe 100 e 120 Hs 140 js 160 l 180 Fe 200 s 220 je 239 For F930GOT 0 20 40 60 80 100 120 140 160 180 200 220 239 0 20 6 40 He 60 He 79 For F920GOT 0 20 jis 40 60 6 63 80 100 120 127 There are no touch keys App 14 APPENDICES MELSOFT App 15 App 15 APPENDICES MELSOFT Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function Reference Value During printing it is recommended that a monitor screen with fewer object functions is displayed When a screen with object functions e g value display function showing many variations is displayed on the GOT the GOT gives priority to display of object functions Therefore the printouts take longer The following table shows the print out time refer
3. Maintenance insp ection person 15 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT Security level 0 Line control screeni Line control screen Yi f Production target Production target pu can on aria Security level 1 operation for line Line control screen 150 150 l gt run stop n Stop Run Stop f 1 Mos Password DEA Line control screen Line control screen Yi n rform Ss it 2 Production target Production target operatio oor ling ecuri evel A 120 150 7 power ON OFF Security password input orl Run Stop Power
4. 2 821 ZEL f 96 08 Y9 8v ZE 9L 662 82 894 ZSZ 9EL 0ZZ POL 889 219 9S9 0V9 P29 809 Z6S 94S 09S HHS 8ZS ZLS 96v 08v HIP Br ZEV 9Lv OOP HSE BYE ZSE YEE OZE HOE 88Z 242 9SZ Ove Hee 80Z Z6L OI 09L HHI 8ZL ZL L 96 08 9 8r ZE OI 0 App 10 App 10 APPENDICES MELSOFT App 11 App 11 APPENDICES MELSOFT 2 For A95 GOT 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 319 0 16 6 32 je 48 e 64 s 80 e 96 Fe 112 fe 128 e 144 s 160 fe 176 je 192 e 208 224 239 3 For A956WGOT 0 16 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 256 272 288 304 320 336 352 368 384 400 416 432 448 464 480 0 32 48 64 80 96 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224
5. 2 Setting items The level display function consists of the following setting items e Level dialog box O 8 ODevice ODevice dialog box Setting of Device No B L____ 46bit 32bit a Boundary Set the device value range 0 to 255 O Level Designation of Level 0 to 255 OPattern Designation of Pattern 0 to 255 O Background Designation of Background 0 to 255 oO Direction Right Left Up Down t O Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real L Uppe Lower 7 OF ixed Numerical setting 2 O ___ Device F ODevice dialog box Set the Device No 3 0O Edit O Edit Display Format dialog box ORange O Edit range dialog box me z 5 O Delete Deletion of setting Set the device rangs oO OLevel Designation of Level 0 to 255 Pattern _ Designation of Pattern Background Designation of Background 0 to 255 Setting of Security Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No o t OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No m 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range t Olnitial display Unch
6. OFixed Blink No Low Middle High Color 0 to 255 Case Bit On Off Time setting ONo Image List dialog box Set the Part No OColor Designation of Color 0 to 255 Blink YNo Low Middle High OEdit Display Format _ Bit Device O Device dialog box dialog box Range Ea Set the device value range O Delete Deletion of display setting O Indicate ONo Indirect Color Hold O Attribute OBlink No Low Middle High O Security Setting of Security 0 to 15 Offset Device dialog box Designation of offset value O Preview Olmage List dialog box comment OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device Device dialog box Set the Device No m 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange OEdit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range Olnitial display Unchecked checked OHold display Unchecked checked OBit trigger ee Bit count setting Expression Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling O Mask None AND OR XOR Pattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count Expression O Input Expressio
7. Video window 1 is displayed with the specified channel size and coordinates There is no close button for a video window Use the device reset the channel No to 0 to close the video window 2 Video window display position You can specify a video window display position within the following range A video window appears at the specified coordinates The video window can be placed on the base screen or in overlap window 1 A A dots B dots s 0t0784 Oto584 As the display coordinates Overlap window 1 0 to 784 0 to 464 specify the coordinates at top left of the video window Video window 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT e Set the display coordinates as multiples of 16 dots If you set the coordinates which are not multiples of 16 they are automatically changed to multiples of 16 e If the video window displayed on the base screen overflow the GOT screen it is automatically placed within the GOT screen e f the video window displayed in overlap window 1 overflows the window screen its video picture does not appear e The following indication and windows are displayed in front of video windows Floating alarm function key window comment window overlap windows 1 2 test window The priorities of the overlap windows 1 2 and test window can be changed by making setting 3 How to move video windows There is no move button for a video window To move a vi
8. Numerical Input lt Format gt tab Format Real Decimal point 1 dialog box lt Expression gt tab GOT A900 series only _ Expression 100 Write word W 1002 2 Not needed when you use the function that automatically adjusts the number of decimal digits of the numerical input functions 5 124 5 124 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT c Operation is performed with PLC CPU values handled as values with decimal points When the operation result is changed the value reflecting the change is written to the PLC CPU Only when the GOT A900 series is used 0 18 Operation expression 0 05 D101 W 5 D101 Operation 0 1 0 05 0 03 0 18 450 5 3 442 The __ part is automatically adjusted by the numerical input object function Setting Portion lt Basio gt tab Device D100 Numerical Input Format Real Decimal point 2 i lt Format gt tab dialog box Adjust decimal point range checked lt Expression gt tab Expression 0 05 D101 Write word W 5 D101 2 Setting items The expression function consists of the following setting items e Data operation function setting object dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O OMask None AND OR x 1 XOR x 1 Pattern
9. OFF Device states Device states J CH q D100 Device used to monitor processed products in line 1 4 ols D100 10 D100 50 D101 Device used to monitor processed products in line 2 X10 y g D101 20 D101 60 D102 Device used to monitor processed products in line 3 ON o E D102 70 D103 Device used to monitor processed products in line 4 ae D103 L80 Print example The following print layout is created on report screen Va Texts and table 00 08 02 16 53 24 t ae crawn wi Production List Panes 35 Z Line Name Amount Line Name Amount Every time collection trigger X10 turns Products linei 10pcs Line 3 2008 4 Set as repeat ON device values of D100 to D103 eee Line 2 _ 20pcs Ene 4 appes ines are gathered and printed i Line 50pcs Line 70pcs g p Products Line BOCs Line 4 80pes Line1 90pcs Line 3 105pcs Products ine 2 100pcs Line 4 115pcs uA ae Set print objects values Setting Portion Settings Report Comment Setting dialog box Trigger watch cycle 3 minutes Initial Report style Real cont print at right top Collect trigger type Rise X10 Set to D100 D101 D102 and D103 respectively Device D100 to D103 Print style Unsigned decimal Digits 13 Numerical Print dialog box lt Basic gt tab 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b Gathers and stores data onto the PC card per data collection trigger Then prints the data
10. Delete Condition 2 only OSound Setting of Sound nea A ON OFF Word Range Data length 16Bit 32Bit m Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real Operator lt lt gt gt Constant Constant setting Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No Momentary Set Reset Alternate Word set 16bit Word set 32bit Sound O Sound File List dialog box Choose the Sound File OPoints Setting of Points 1 to 40 Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real t O Device Device dialog box Multiple Device dialog box Olndirect Unchecked Setting of Device No t O Fixed Unchecked checked Setting of Fixed checked Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No FMOV BMOV Sampling Setting of Sampling Choose the Screen Device dialog box o Trigger 1 Same settings as in Condition operation dialog box for Trigger2 Project tab setting Wt SE Nea AEE OSE Cal LS RM tele E inte tt na wa ln ae ae eran retired 4 ERE so yo ete Dc gies AD Offset Unchecked checked Set the Device No T ey ae gig te a ae a a i ee aes o OS OK By py ee F Same settings as in Condition operation dialog box for tab setting Pr ag eee a ape oe Men a pet rab tee hone SM EM ERP otter Setar ee Re
11. y OFF ON RGB screen Monitor screen Setting Portion Settings Video window RGB screen Selection lt Video RGB gt tab RGB screen Selection Device D100 Switching Screen dialog box 2 Setting items The setting items of the RGB window display function are the same as those of the video display function Refer to Section 5 8 13 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings 1 Choose Help Firstly 2 Choose Setup operations using the Common menu gt Setting up screen switching devices The RGB window display can be used with the A985GOT V only 5 110 5 110 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 9 Useful Functions The following functions are useful e Screen call function Reduces project data capacity e Security fUNCtION eects Limits users e Offset FUNCTION eceeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees Shows multiple devices by setting of one device e Expression function Processes PLC CPU operation on GOT e Station number switching function Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number 5 9 1 Screen call function reduces project data capacity GOT A900 series Oo GOT F900 series zon This function shows other called screens over a basic scr
12. g Shape Unchecked checked Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Image List 8 Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 Title Designation of Title 0 to 255 Common Display the alarm common setting dialog box Form Disp rows Designation of Disp rows 1 to 27 Sort Oldest Latest Size Designation of Size V x H Display style Occurences Restorations Unchecked checked Occur frequency Unchecked checked Format Title Set the history item title Wide Set the width of history item field Color Specify the history item color 0 to 255 Contents Date Time Date Time String t yy mm dd mm dd yy dd mm yy mm dd hh mm ss hh mm Text Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up alarm history display gt Setting up alarm history display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security can be set e By using the PC card the history data can be backed up e The ladder monitor function can be started while the device corresponding to the one which turned ON or fell within the designated range is being searched e Alarm history can be p
13. Called screen 6 ES a Called screen 5 Called screen 4 Called screen 3 Called screen 2 Ez E E Called screen 1 fal Basic screen source screen a y Yy Touch key activated Touch key not activated x Represents that called screens 9 to 98 do not have overlapping touch keys e When called screen touch keys are overlapping the touch keys are activated in order of upper to lower ones Hence the key may not be activated if touching time is short e If simultaneous touch disable keys are overlapped they are inactive 2 When objects that may be set only once on a single screen are superimposed When objects that may be set only once on a single screen e g data list and alarm list are superimposed they are all displayed but the function is restricted and the display is not provided correctly 5 116 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 What you should know when using the screen call function when the GOT F900 series is used When superimposed on a base screen a called screen is shown as described below and therefore setting should be made carefully a When screen displays are overlapped 1 Figure data A called screen figure appears at the back Base screen Called screen 2 Touch keys The touch key on the called screen appears at the front If touch keys are ove
14. 1 2 3 4 Displays the library name Click this to display or not display the panelkit name and the parts name Click this to delete the selected panelkit or parts Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected panelkit or parts 5 Select the figure or the object on the screen and click it It is then registered in the library as a panelkit or part 6 Click this and the tree display area of the template appears 7 Panelkit or parts are displayed 8 Panelkit name or parts names are displayed POINTS e Panelkit in the part library folder cannot be deleted and their attributes cannot Se re DY WH be changed e Panelkit cannot be registered in the part library folder 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT b Tree display area The library where the panelkit or parts on the parts display area is registered is displayed i i 3 Template Make Del Attrib 1 Click this to create the library of the panelkit folder Up to 50 libraries can be created 2 Click this to delete the library of the selected panelkit folder 3 Click this to change the registered number and the name of the selected panelkit folder library 4 Parts not changed by user provided by the GT Designer are registered Some parts in the parts library folder show objects and others show figures only Reading and pasting of these parts allow easy setting of lamp figure or switch figure
15. Setting Portion Portion Settings ae Information dialog System Signal 1 D10 The GOT reads the following GOT operation states from the PLC CPU e Automatic screen saver disable signal Forced screen saver enable signal 1 e Key code read completion signal e Numerical input read completion e Barcode input disable signal signal 1 e Key in disable signal e Barcode input read completion signal e Hardcopy monochrome print signal e Hardcopy setting enable signal e GOT error reset signal e Hardcopy reverse video signal e Buzzer output signal e External I O function s output signal e Current Recipe No 2 area e Buzzer one shot output signal 1 System information with which GOT F900 series is compatible x2 System information with which only GOT F900 series is compatible b Writes the GOT operating status to the PLC CPU 1 GOT display screen is changed from base screen 1 to 2 2 As the GOT operating status changed new data is written to the write device Display screen number is stored into the write device o jo o When GOT A900 series is used D21 displayed base screen number Base screen 1 Base screen 2 gt storage area When GOT F900 series is used 1 D20 displayed base screen number storage area Settings lt GOT A900 Series gt System signal 1 D20 On screen Base Screen Number Checked lt
16. From the preceding page Variable definition auto variable declaration Cae Addition Addition gt Addition gt Addition gt include lt stdio h gt void main void unsigned short _wTMP0000__ unsigned short _wITMPO0O001_ unsigned short _wITMP0002_ unsigned short _wD100__ tenes Omitted _wTMP0001__ 0 while _wTMPO000 lt wD100 if _WTMP0000__ 1900 4 _wTMP0001__ wTMP0001 1 eee Omitted _wITMP0010__ wIMP0002__ wTMP0003__ _wWTMP0004__ 1 _wD200__ wTMP0010_ 7 Execution of simulation Slaa alalis lalia Lel a 0 wTHP0001 whi le wTMPO000w lt wD100w i 1 wTMPOOOOw 1300 4 vIMPOO01v wTMPOOO1w 1 wTMPOO00v wTMPOOOOw 1 5 MELSOFT 4 In the C language the variables used must be defined beforehand As only one data format may be selected for one script in the script function the variable types of the C language must all be the same Being conscious of the script data format assign the variables as indicated below Script Data Format Variable Type 16 bit signed BIN 16 bit unsigned BIN unsigned short 32 bit signed BIN long 32 bit BCD 16 bit BCD Selecting 32 bit BCD 16 bit BCD as the script data format disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger 5 Perform simulation on
17. Cleared by erase trigger z 400 400 3004 3004 3004 2004 2004 4 1004 100 J 04 0 100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104 Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Graph Line lt Monitor Device gt tab Device D100 Continuous Number 1 gt f ee Points 5 Scale display V x H Scale points 5 x 5 zCasestab Upper 400 Lowero lt Craph gt tab Bea ae AA lt Case gt tab Upper 400 Lower 0 GOT A900 series Locus checked Clear on trigger rise svale no oxa i i Upper 400 x 104 Lower 0 x 100 lt Option gt tab Device Clear trigger XO PP a A Note the following when setting a line graph which is specified to show a locus e Only one graph may be set to one project e It cannot be set to a window screen e When there is line graph setting the window screen s overlap window 2 or test window cannot be displayed The base screen where line graph setting has been made cannot be displayed as multiple called screens simultaneously by the screen call function e The maximum size of a line graph is equal to the maximum size of an overlap window 400 300 200 100 o 100 101 102 103 104 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The line graph display function consists of the following setting items Line Trend Bar Chart dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series Basic tab Un
18. O Target Printer PC card PCMCIA O Style BMP JPEG Q The minimum number s Unchecked checked file is deleted when capacity is exceeded and make initial state when the maximum is filed O Print mode 256 Color 16 Color Monochrome O Rev Norm Uncheccked checked O Change page Unchecked checked After printing page feed setting O Start trigger _ Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No O Abort trigger Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No O Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Rev Norm Unchecked checked Change page _ Unchecked checked After printing page feed setting 1 to 4 Start trigger Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Abort trigger _ Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Trigger watch cycle Set the Trigger watch cycle 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Ch
19. ceccecceseeseeeeseeeeeeeseceeceeeeaeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaesaeeaesaesaeseaesaesaeseseaesaesaeeeeteaeeats 3 10 3 4 Operation of Template e eiere aa ea aaa initia wii aa a aa eaha atara aeaa ad 3 12 3 5 Operation of Tool elein EE ATT A el ees TA 3 15 3 6 How TO USE HOla a AEE EAN EEEE E iweb E EE E E 3 17 3 6 1 Help menu makeup eee cece eeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeesaeeeaeeaeeeaesaeeaesaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeesas 3 18 3 6 2 Printing the help Scre ninnnniiuinirnniinineniiti iini in aani aiaa is 3 18 4 1 Types and Number of Screens Created cccccccecceceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeceeceeeeaeeaeceeseeeeaesaeseeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaneeseeeaees 4 1 AAV BaSe SCree terns etic atin else eel it tn a re ak tn a a ak A ee alee 4 1 AAD WANGOW SOCON aiarra eE TR e Aa TIA RAER EIRE AE RARA EE TARRE ETE ARA TIRA iR iaie AERE TIRRAN 4 2 4 1 3 About the report SCCM oc ccecccecceecceeceteceneeeteceneeeneeseesseeseeesaesseeseesaessaeseeseeseeesneestenseeseeeeneeeaes 4 10 4 1 4 Vid O WINKOW eeeeeecceeceeeeeeneeeeeeseeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeaeeeeseaeeeaeeeaeeeatenas 4 11 4 15 RGB SCree i a ete ation de eat ee EN 4 21 4 1 6 Video window RGB screen settings ccccecceeeeeeceeceeeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseaeeaeeaeeeeeaeeas 4 23 AA 7 WIdE diSplay SCLOGM ires an T avaaciesnastalanadesiavedaaaes 4 25 A 4 A 4 4 2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes 0 0 0 e
20. 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Device Device Device dialog box Designation of device to be monitor 16bit 32bit Shape Unchecked checked L Image List dialog box Specify the panel meter display frame Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 Needle Specify the panel meter display Needle 0 to 255 __ Meter panel Specify the panel meter display Plate 0 to 255 Type 1 4 Top Bottom Left Right Top Right Top Left Bottom Left Bottom Right 1 2 Top Bottom Left Right 3 4 Full circle Direciton Clockwise Counterclockwise Point 9 90 180 270 m Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Upper Lower Wee Fixed Numerical setting Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Scale display Unchecked checked Scale points Color 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up animation display gt Setting up panelmeter display from Contents of Help 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5 4 Graph Display Functions MELSOFT The graph display functions collect word device values and show them in graph format They are available in the following types e Trend graph display func
21. 2 Screen script function This type of script operates for each screen created on GT Designer The screen script function may be performed only while the corresponding screen appears during online processing of the GOT A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled These scripts may be set on base screens window screens Super impose window overlap window 1 overlap window 2 Screens called by the screen calling function will also be the target of script processing However screens shown by the part display function will not be the target of script processing Up to 256 scripts can be set to one screen including the screen called by the screen calling function POINT e Refer to Section 4 1 for details of each screen e Refer to Section 5 10 1 for details of the screen calling function e Refer to Section 5 4 1 for details of the part display function e The project script monitor devices are always operating Hence a larger number of monitor points will make the monitor screen slower in response e Note that a larger number of screen script monitor device points will make the monitor screen slower in response 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 2 2 Control structure This section describes the control structure of the script functions The following commands control statements operators functions etc are used to program scripts Nesting is allowed in if while and switch statements A retu
22. 5 120 5 120 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Firstly 2 Choose Setup operations using the Common menu gt Setting up Password from Contents of Help e How to set the security password Before using the security function you must set the password of each security level Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the setting method e How to change the security level When you want to change the security level during operation of the GOT use the following procedure 1 Perform either of the following operations on the GOT monitor screen to show the password e Touch the touch key extended for switching to the password screen e Touch the password on the utility screen 2 On the password screen type the password of the security level you want to change and touch lt 4 When stopping the security level change touch in the password display window 3 The security level of the current screen is changed and the screen provides the display which matches the security level e If you forgot the security password security cannot be canceled Write down the password so that it may never be forgotten 5 121 5 121 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 9 3 Offset function monitors m
23. 100 gt 250 400 Y coordinat 100 200 300 J Pane D101 X coordinate D100 A y Setting Portion Settings Part Movement dialog box Move way Position Position D100 b Shows a part at a point position in the specified path Presetting the path and point numbers shows a part in the position of the point number corresponding to the word device D100 value The word device D100 value is changed to move the part Point number 1 Point number 2 Point number 4 Preset path Parts Parts Parts Numbers are point numbers Setting Portion Settings Part Movement dialog box Move way Point Position D100 Route No 1 Parts Move Route dialog box Route No 1 Points 4 c Shows a part at any position on a line defined by the specified starting and end points Shows a part on a line which is defined by the starting point 0 and the end point 100 by changing the word device D100 value relative to the upper and lower limits The word device D100 value is changed to move the part Preset starting and Part is displayed with starting point Displayed at position Displayed at position Displayed at position end points preset as 0 and end point as 100 of 70
24. 5 6 2 ASCII input function writes any key code to word devices GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function writes any key code to the specified word devices 1 Function outline a Writes any key code to word devices starting from the specified one D100 4241H i Age 0043H Ss A 1 2 3 4 5 A B DEL 4443H D E F ESC J 4645H Touch an input area to Text input gt Move the cursor to the display the cursor for input next input area Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device D100 b You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple ASCII input areas Input cursor moving path Text input gt J Text input gt J Text input gt Move the input cursor to D Move the input cursor to B Move the input cursor to C Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings User ID 1 i Basi Device D1 Soe p
25. ccceccecceseeseeeeceeeeeeeaecaeceeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaecaeseeseaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaesaesaseaseaeeaeseeseaeeaees 5 79 5 8 1 Hardcopy function prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file sceeeeeeeeeee 5 79 5 8 2 System information function confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU seses 5 82 5 8 3 Observe status function writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled 5 85 5 8 4 Floating alarm function causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen 5 89 5 8 5 Recipe function reads writes values in the specified device ranGe ceeeeseeseeeeeeteeeneeeneeens 5 91 5 8 6 Sound function plays a sound ON GOT eecececeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaeeeeeeaesaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeseaeeaesaeeeetea 5 95 5 8 7 Test function changes the device value of the PLC CPU ccccccscsssssesstessesseeseeessesseesseeeeees 5 97 5 8 8 Barcode function writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU ececeeteeteteeteteeees 5 98 5 8 9 Operation panel function operates GOT externally cccceceeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaees 5 99 5 8 10 Time action function performs specified operation at preset tiMe ee eee eeeeeeeeeneeneeeteeees 5 101 5 8 11 Sampling function reads PLC CPU data under specified Condition cceceseeeeeeeeeee 5 104 5 8 12 Script function exercises display control under GOT program c c
26. 1 Set the numerical display monitor devices to the occurrence count storage device D10 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS ODevice points O Device IO Size O Delete Device points O Comment No MELSOFT 2 Setting items The floating alarm function consists of the following setting items e Floating Alarm dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Device dialog box Set the Device No OStorage device Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No Browse O Comment List dialog box Register the comment b When using the GOT F900 series Set the Device No Comment List dialog box Register the comment Device Device dialog box m Comment No Browse m Size m Delete 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function Setting up Floating Alarm Function from Contents of Help e Devices to be monitored are common to all screens but whether floating alarms are displayed or not can be set for each base screen e Floating alarms appear at the bottom of the screen 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 5 Recipe function reads writes values in the specified device range GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 serie
27. 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT set Statement example set lt bit device gt Function SETs lt bit device gt Statement example rst lt bit device gt r 3 f Function RSTs lt bit device gt st alt Statement example alt lt bit device gt Function Inverts lt bit device gt Statement example bmov lt word device 1 gt lt word device 2 gt lt integer gt Function Batch transfers the number of devices specified at lt integer gt starting Continuous from lt word device 1 gt to the number of devices specified at lt integer gt device starting from lt word device 2 gt operation Statement example fmov lt word device 1 gt lt word device 2 gt lt integer gt Function Transfers lt word device 1 gt to the number of devices specified at lt integer gt starting from lt word device 2 gt Statement example sin lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the sine of the specified lt word device or constant gt Sine Statement example cos lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the cosine of the specified lt word device or constant gt Cosine Statement example tan lt word device or constant gt tan Function Calculates the tangent of the specified lt word device or constant gt Tangent Asin Statement example asin lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the arcsine of lt word device or constant gt Arcsine Statement
28. App 19 APPENDICES MELSOFT 3 GOT having 8 display colors EA Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255 Black Black Blue Red Purple Green Cyan Yellow White 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255 0 Blue Blue Black Purple Red Cyan Green White Yellow 3 3 0 227 224 31 28 255 252 Red Red Purple Black Blue Yellow White Green Cyan 224 224 227 0 3 252 255 28 31 Purple Purple Red Blue Black White Yellow Cyan Green 227 227 224 3 0 255 252 31 28 Green Green Cyan Yellow White Black Blue Red Purple 28 28 31 252 255 0 3 224 227 Cyan Cyan Green White Yelow Blue Black Purple Red 31 31 28 255 252 3 0 227 224 Yelow f Yellow White Green Cyan Red Purple Black Blue A all ee 255 255 252 31 28 227 224 3 0 App 20 App 20 APPENDICES MELSOFT Appendix8 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 The following tables indicate the functions added to up to version 26C of GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 The le in each table have the following meanings Abbreviation for GT Works Allowed for use on the GOT F900 Abbreviation for GT Works A to Z Version O GT Designer Version A use on the GOT A900 Not allowed for use version name y 1 GOT added i D O O O SwW5 O O O Corresponding Model SW5 AITBIC A985GOT xixe F940GOT F930GOT F930GOT BWD A95 GOT 7 De D Q
29. For PC card save Printer interface unit Memory board and Sound function Unusable Unusable external speaker Operation pane sid panel External I O unit Among the above units either only one memory card interface unit or one printer interface unit may be fitted to the A95 x GOT A956WGOT When using the alarm history display function therefore note that PC card save and history printing cannot be functioned simultaneously Enabled when the compact flash PC card is used with the A956WGOT 8 Logging report cannot be used with the A95 GOT A956WGOT Enabled when the compact flash PC card is used with the A956WGOT x9 When the target PLC CPU has no clock data the time action function is unusable Since GT SoftGOT uses the clock data of the personal computer the time action function can be used if the target PLC CPU has no clock data 10 A95 GOT cannot do 256 color printing 11 Can be used for setting the function switches of the F920GOT with keypad F930GOT with keypad and ET 940 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 3 2 Specifications of the object functions that may be set GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series oO The following indicate the main specifications of the functions In the following tables the maximum setting points and used memory spaces assume that the setting items are all default values When data operation display method and or other settings are made to increase the following memory
30. Lower 0 x 1 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The trend graph display function consists of the following setting items Line Trend Bar Chart dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Basic 8 t OGraph Trend Z OShape Unchecked checked sy L Shape O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape No L O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 OPlate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 o QO Direciton Right Left O Number Designation of Number 1 to 8 t O Points Designation of Points 2 to 100 OFrame Checked unchecked o O Edit O Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 O Style Designation of Style Delete Deletion of setting Width Designation of Width Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No O Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real 16bit 32bit O Device Continuous Random O Case Lo Upper Lower E Fixed Numerical setting O Device Device dialog box Set the Device No g O Graph g O Scale Unchecked checked ke display T O Scale points Designation of Scale points V x H 0 2 to 11 5 OColor ______ Designation of Color 0 to 255 OScale Checked unchecked value display Size Designati
31. MELSOFT Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function Of Basic S O Shape Unchecked checked gt Shape O Image List dialog box a L O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 OPlate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 OTitle Designation of Title 0 to 255 Rule Unchecked checked Designation of Rule 0 to 255 Q Common Display the alarm common setting dialog box O Form t O Disp rows Designation of Disp rows 1 to 27 t O Disp head Designation of Disp head 1 to 3072 t O Sort Oldest Latest O Size Designation of Size V x H O Interval Designation of Interval V x H t O Display style O Occurences O Restorations Unchecked checked O Checks Unchecked checked O Cumulative Unchecked checked OOccur frequency Unchecked checked t O One touch Unchecked checked Q High quality font Unchecked checked O Format oO Title Set the history item title O Wide Set the width of history item field t O Color Specify the history item color 0 to 255 0O Contents Date Time Date Time string m yy mm dd mm dd yy dd mm yy mm dd hh mm ss hh mm O Text Set the text to be displayed at alarm occurrence 3 E Security Designation of Securi
32. The operation result is a value outside p i e Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the data range the usable data range determined by i of the corresponding script and correct the script the data format of the script The number of scripts executed f ents p Change the number of scripts to be executed in one project to 256 or less exceeded the limit Hence there were i i e Change the number of scripts to be executed on one screen to 256 or less scripts that were not executed When 16 bit BCD or 32 bit BCD was Dou elected as cera Seamer ihe Check whether the device you want to monitor is correct i S P f e Review the processing for the device which could not be handled as BCD and monitor device value could not be correct the script and sequence program handled as BCD When 16 bit BCD or 32 bit BCD was selected as the script data format the _ Review the processing for the device which was brought outside the BCD data operation result was brought outside the range BCD data range The numerator was divided by the e Review the factor which caused zero division in the corresponding script and denominator of 0 correct the script 10 11 Write to a device failed e Review the device description of the corresponding script 2 Securing an internal area for device Dnd F E on Reduce the number write device points in the corresponding script The while statement has the
33. stop b15 to b2 b1 bO bO Turned ON to clear the script error data b1 Re executes the script that was at a stop due to error occurrence When re executing it check execute the following e Before starting re execution turn ON the bit 0 to clear the error e Execute the script from its beginning not from where it had stopped e Since the device values remain unchanged as in the stop status check the device values of the script before starting re execution e When the trigger type of the script is the rise fall of a device turn the trigger device from ON to OFF OFF to ON again to re execute the script e Script monitor time GS385 Set the monitor time of one script in seconds If a script does not end the preset time after its start script processing is stopped Error code 15 The initial setting of 0 is processed as 10 seconds Setting Example 0 default 10 seconds 1 1 second 11 11 seconds 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT e Screen script initial operation GS386 Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following conditions is enabled e The screen script function is used e The execution condition trigger type selected is Rise Fall Switching to the screen having scripts takes place For example when the trigger type is Bit OFF to ON and its trigger bit is ON at the setting of 0 the screen is changed and the screen scripts are then executed once Bit Value of
34. 5 Figures and objects drawn by a user can be registered as panelkit 6 A figure registered by a user can be registered as a part Parts registered in this step are used in the parts display function and the parts movement function 7 Displays the library 8 Click this to close the tree display area POINT Only the panelkit folder library is used for creation deletion and change of attribute 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 2 Pasting method of parts 1 Bring up the tree display area and double Make click the name where the panelkit or parts for pasting is registered Parts Library oats 2 Lamp 1 Lampzos itl 2 Click the desired panelkit or part on the parts display area PUES ime LALI 3 Move the cursor to the position of pasting and E Project Edit View Draw click the mouse The part is then pasted E Aea mg fis fioox z 4 Perform either of the following operations lt Continue pasting gt 1 Hold down the Ctrl key and press the C key Ctr C 2 Holding down the Ctrl key and pressing the V key pastes the part Ctrl V Drag and move it to the pasting position You can continue pasting by repeating the operations in step 2 and later lt Change the attribute gt Right click and click the Attribute menu 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3 5 Operation of Tool Palette MELSOFT
35. D000300000 to D000365534 Data register D409400000 to D409465534 D409500000 to D409565534 GOT data register GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 Word device 4 62 4 62 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 12 Hitachi PLC connection Hexadecimal decimal Remote external api a Y10000 to Y49995 First CPU link L L0000 to L3FFF Hexadecimal Decimal On delay timer TD 1 Single shot timer ae 4 Monostable timer aS z Decimal Retentive timer TMR 1 TMRO000 to TMR255 Up down counter sr 1 Bit device GB64to B16383 Sa Tua First CPU link WL WLOO0 to WL3FF Second CPU link WL a a to WL13FF Hexadecimal 9 3 me g Data area WM WMO00toWM3FF to WM3FF aa elapsed value TC C000 to TC511 Word internal output WR WR000 to WR3FF GOT data register GD64 to GD16383 f Decimal GOT special register GS GSO toGS511 x1 The same number cannot be used 2 If the device specified is outside the range the object set to the out of range device may not be displayed In that case check and correct the device 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 13 Matsushita Electric Works PLC connection 1 Available range for setting monitor Input relay X 2 3 X0000 to X511F Output relay Y 3 Y0000 to Y511F Internal relay R R0000 to R886F 3 L0000 to L639F Special relay R 2 R9000 to R910F Timer contact T 2 x4 T0000 to T307
36. Object 2 Choose Setting up message display Setting up comment display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security and offset can be set e Comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area e Multiple line comments can be displayed e Display color and attributes of a comment can be changed when the monitor device bit value turns ON OFF e The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display Refer to Section 4 4 2 for superimposing on the level display function 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 2 2 Alarm history display function shows a history of occurrence times comments and others when a condition is enabled GOT A900 series O GOT F900 series O This function shows as history data the occurrence times comments and other information when the specified bit device turns on or the condition of a word device value is enabled 1 Function outline a Error history display Shows a history list of dates and times messages and others when a device is confirmed to have turned on error occurrence On the GOT F900 series shows only the occurrence dates and times messages and occurrence counts OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED _ CHECKS _ CUMLAT _ COUNT v 98 06 01 10 25 Conveyor 1 error 11 25 ON 98 06 01 12 05 Conveyor 2 error 12 40 J 98 06 01 12 35 Conveyor 3 error 13 20 12 50 00 15 2 ll Shows the history when the monitor de
37. Set the mask value OShift NonelLeft Right ONo of shift Set the shift count OExpression O Input Expression dialog box Expression Operator Monitor word x 2 Hexadecimal Decimal Octal Write word x 2 Expression style 1 You may set only the numerical display function Variable Device x2 You may set only the numerical input function term W gy Numerical Enter numerical value term b When using the GOT F900 series Expression Gain 1 Gain 1 value setting Gain 2 Gain 2 value setting Offset Offset value setting 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Type Expression in Keyword of Help 5 125 5 125 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5 126 4 Expression performed when GOT A900 series is used There are the following methods for expression performed for the GOT A900 series a Mask operation Logical product AND logical addition OR or exclusive logical addition XOR operation is carried out by the mask value which was used for setting the monitor device value 1 Logical product AND The result is 1 only when both bit numbers are 1 If not the result is 0 MELSOFT Monitor device value Preset mask value set in hexadecimal Operation result 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0
38. compatible printer GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 1 Refer to Item 2 2 2 for wiring diagram of RS 232C 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSOFT 2 2 2 Compatible RS 232C cable The cable in the wiring diagram below or the cable type below is required When the cable is self made for the GOT A900 series GOT F900 series either of the following wiring diagrams 1 and 2 may be used However if the F940GOT F930GOT is connected to the A series CPU or the FX series CPU with RS422 to use the PLC CPU and the GOT with the FX 2PIF at the same time use the F2 232CAB 1 connection cable 1 Wiring diagram of AC30R2 9SS IBM PC AT or 100 compatible GOT Shield 2 Wiring diagram of FX 232CAB 1 IBM PC AT or 100 compatible GOT 2 RXD 3 TXD 7 RTS 8 CTS 6 DSR 5 SG 4 DTR x Use the screw in type connector inch for the GOT side AC30R2 9SS IBM PC AT FX 232CAB 1 or GOT 100 compatible AC30R2 9SS 9pin 9pin Mitsubishi Electric i FX 232CAB 1 9pin 9pin If the following cable is used 9 25 pin converter is required AC30R2 9P 9pin 25pin F2 232CAB 1 9pin 25pin Mitsubishi Electric 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSOFT 2 2 3 Compatible PC card Only when the GOT A900 series is used 1 About compatible PC card types Compatible PC cards are shown below Type name Remark Commercially available SRAM type PC card based on JEIDA Ver4 2 based on PCMC
39. red 463 188 191 2 95 on x 160 Dark pre purp 190 189 93 162 162 Dark IFAR Fa 244 11 232 235 20 Black 2 1 7 0 5 D 46 0 234 Dark Dark i yellow i purple 180 168 171 72 75 0 Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Dark Black T ya white yellow cyan green ae red blue 21 182 182 181 8 1 19 14 R 180 22 20 162 160 2 9 9 App 18 App 18 APPENDICES MELSOFT 2 GOT having 16 display colors D Yelow White ark Dark Dark Dark blue red purple green 252 255 2 160 162 2 Dak D Dak D Yellow White a a a aik 252 255 blue red purple green 2 160 162 20 Dak D Dak D Dak D Dark Dark Bue Bue Back j oi P a Pupe Red Cyan Green white Yelow 7 3 3 o Pupe YAN aes y 27 24 31 2 255 252 162 160 22 20 182 180 109 2 Dak Dak Dak Dak Dark D Dark Black a a a ak Pupe PK Bue Yelow whte Green Cyan 0 blue yellow white green cyan 297 black 3 252 255 28 31 red 2 180 182 20 2 109 160 Dark Dak Dak Dak D Dark Dark ae Black i A ak Red Bue ak white Yelow Cyan Green blue 0 white yellow cyan green 224 3 black 255 252 31 28 purple 2 182 130 22 20 109 162 D Dak Dak Bao Dak j Dak Dak cyan Yelow wnte Pa Bue Red Pupe Pa yelow white 0 blue red purple 31 252 255 black 3 224 227 green 180 182 2 160 162 109 20 D Dak Dak j Dak Baok Pak D
40. Bar lt Case gt tab Upper Fixed 400 Lower Fixed 0 Scale display Vertical Scale points 5 Device D100 Graph 0 Vertical D101 Graph 3 Scale value display Vertical D102 Graph 255 Value no 5 Vertical Upper 400 Vertical Lower 0 Vertical lt Optionstab___ Sort Ascending lt Monitor Device gt tab 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The bar graph display function consists of the following setting items Line Trend Bar Chart dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Basic t O Graph Bar OShape Unchecked checked 8 l ape O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape No m OFrame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 OPlate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 O Form t O Direciton Vertical Horizontal O Number Designation of Number 1 to 8 O Offset Designation of offset value 0 to 100 tO Width W Designation of bar width in bar graph 1 to 500 t O Width Space Designation of spacing including bar width 1 to 500 Frame OEdit O Attribute dialog box OGraph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 Pattern Designation of Pattern ODelet Deleti Poeti t O Background Designation of Background gah Po a O Device _ O Device dialog box Set the Device No Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real 16bit 32bit De
41. Click each button to draw figures or to set objects Line attributes or figure painting pattern can be selected from the list box Tool palette for GOT A900 series Tool Palette Ph Le EFA fea a EY B x0OAOoOr A A A ed DXF 23 FE ast BY SK 81 O VIS Bis gas Line 1 0255 7 Pattern None 5 0O 255 Bo x Text 255 P Rea m 1 Cursor button elk hr 1 2 3 4 1 Panelkit 2 Cursor for editing figure and object 2 Figure drawing button Tool palette for GOT F900 series Pk A LAO A ad DXF 23 ast BY Sy ER at oO Vi m Bes Lie 1 y 255 Pattem None l 025 vmo Text 255 3 Cursor for placing template 4 Cursor for editing report range A MOAOjC dA FAFA md DXF 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 8 Scale 9 Text 10 Paint 11 Report figure line 12 Report figure text 13 Insert BMP format file 14 Insert DXF format file 13 14 Se re YS WH 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 3 Object setting button oHa S By 5 BT a 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Swatama AaB 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 1 Numerical display function 12 Trend Line Bar graph display 2 Data list display function function 3 ASCII display function 13 Statistics graph display function 4 Clock display function 14 Scatter chart dis
42. OWord ee Same settings as in touch keys B 1 can be made Refer to Section irae 5 5 for setting details t OWindow a ERI ON ET t lt Station No O Key Action Switching Station No Other NW No dialog box L_Station No ODevice dialog box i Setting of Device No Data Bit Word BIN16 type of Action For bit Word BCD16 rO Host OOther NW No Station No O Hold Of Action Eor wore r OEdit OEdit Display Format dialog box Set the conditional expression and switching method ODelete Deletion of operation OUp Down Move operation sequence up down OEdit OEdit Display Format 7 dialog box Edit Change the setting Sa ichi thod ee f Set the switching metho Delete Delete the setting for the case where m Key code Set the Key code conditional expression is Security Set the Security not applicable Simultaneous press Unchecked checked OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Range Device O Device dialog box 16bit 32bit Set the Device No Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function Setting up Operation Panel from Contents of Help e For restrictions on the operation panel funct
43. Operations to be set for the first time 6 1 Overlap Figure ANd ODjeCt eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees 4 45 Oje tSn paaa ahia te tages 4 45 Overlap WINKOW ce ceeceeceeeteeteeteeeeeeteaeees 4 4 Index 2 P R Painting enen aa aGed ee 4 29 Painting background sssseesseesesesrsrrsersennns 4 29 Painting color 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeeaeeeaeeeas 4 29 Painting Pattern eee ee eeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeees 4 29 Panel meter display function e eee 5 36 Part display function 5 27 Part movement display function 5 30 PC Card adan Sieg ce Sack ot Nek a As wd oe 2 5 PC communication driver ccececeeeeeee 6 4 Personal COMPUtEL eeeeeeeseeeeeeteeeteeeeeees 2 1 POIVQON saarn n aarin ee 4 25 Printer for connection with personal computer 2 1 Radio buttons 0 0 cin ie wien aie 3 10 Recipe function 00 eee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeteetteeteeeeeees 5 91 Rectangle siniiiki identi nla ahiatiaday 4 27 RROSOIIION eetsscvsdes tv tedey EE 2 1 Report aneto aaeoa 5 75 Report NUES onera a EA EEA 4 27 Real time report eeeeeeeeeseseeeeeeeneeeaeeeeeeas 5 75 Report SCION eceecceecceeeceeeceeceteeeeeeeteeeteaetes 4 10 RGB SCIOCN ecceeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaees 4 23 RGB window display function 0 0 01 5 110 ROM BIOS a aerae aaaea denies ected 6 5 RS 232C Cable cccecceseeseeeseeseeteeeeeeeeeitees 2 4 Index 2 S Sampling functio
44. Partial corrections Section 2 2 3 Section 4 1 Section 4 1 2 Section 4 3 1 Section 4 3 2 Section 4 5 2 Section 5 1 4 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 5 Section 5 7 Section 5 8 1 Section 5 8 5 Section 5 8 6 Section 5 8 7 Section 5 8 8 Section 5 8 9 Section 5 8 10 Section 5 9 1 Section 6 5 2 Appendix5 Appendix7 Partial additions Section 3 2 Section 4 1 4 Section 4 5 3 Section 6 5 Section 6 6 Section 6 7 Appendix4 Additions Section 4 1 7 May 2001 SH NA 080117 E Partial corrections Section 3 2 Section 4 1 1 Section 4 1 2 Section 4 1 7 Section 4 2 2 Section 4 3 1 Section 4 5 2 Section 4 5 3 Section 5 5 1 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 3 1 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 1 Section 5 8 1 Section 5 8 2 Section 5 8 5 Section 5 8 12 Section 5 9 4 Section 6 5 2 Section 7 1 2 Appendix1 Appendix2 Appendix3 Appendix7 Jun 2001 SH NA 080117 F Partial corrections Section 4 3 2 Section 5 1 4 Section 5 8 9 Appendix7 Additions Section 5 9 5 Aug 2001 SH NA 080117 G Partial corrections Section 2 1 1 Section 2 1 2 Section 2 2 1 Section 2 2 2 Section 2 2 3 Section 3 2 Section 4 4 2 Section 4 5 2 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 4 6 Section 5 5 Section 5 8 4 Section 5 8 9 Section 5 9 2 Section 6 5 1 Appendix6 Appendix 7 May 2002 SH NA 080117 H Partial corrections
45. Refer to Section 7 2 3 for details of constants sqrt Statement example Device type device number Function Represents a PLC CPU device GOT internal device or temporary work Refer to Section 7 2 3 for details of the devices and temporary works Il Statement example comment Function A comment for a script can be described in comment Device and temporary work 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 2 3 Usable data and representation methods 1 Script data formats You can choose any of the following seven different data formats for the script functions Note that the data format selected is fixed on a script basis e 16 bit signed BIN e 16 bit unsigned BIN e 32 bit signed BIN e 32 bit unsigned BIN e 16 bit BCD e 32 bit BCD e 32 bit real number Select the data format on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation For selective operation details refer to the GT Designer help 2 Usable constants and representation methods The following four different constants are usable with the script functions Constant Representation Method 124 Hexadecimal number OxFF12 0x14AC67F1 Real number 32 124 3 2124e 10 BCD 344 Note that the data format of each script determines the usable constants and data ranges as listed below Data Format Usable Constant Usable Data Range ao 32768 to 32767 16 bit signed BIN Hexadecimal number 0 to 7FFF 0 to 65535 16 bit unsigned BIN Hexadecimal n
46. SLOre A Editing screen is saved and editing continues OCAS e eaae aAa EAN Editing screen No is changed Screen Utilize Delete Reta anaia Screen data is utilized deleted in the editing project Change Size ssrrrrssssetsseeeeteseeeeeseeeeeees Editing screen size is changed m Cascade sssrssrrrsssrrrersrrrrseneresnennnenenns The current screens are displayed in cascade Tile sssssonsoussanossonsssssosossosososssassansosons The current screens are displayed in tile Help Update Help which allows you to browse the updated additional function list Firstly Fist operation help learned in the step of GT Designer H Figure seeteteeteteseettteeettteeeetseeeeeeteeens Operation help for drawing figures Object ssssssnonssssossssososossossosososonsosssos Operation help for setting objects Transfer Print sstttttttsesssresssssteeeeeeeeees Operation help for data transmission and printing About a meenescncncoucncusucccccucucncncescnssesses Version of installed GT Designer is displayed 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 2 GT Converter Project _ Open rreeeesenesconcnerercceseescccerseroncnereens Designates the monitor screen data for GOT800 to be converted Option Conversion Setting serere Set conversion options for converting Digital s package data into GOT900 series data Folder of GT Designer seese Designates the folder having the execution file of t
47. Screen type Base D20 Switching Station No dialog box Overlap window 1 D21 Overlap window 2 D21 Screen Auxilia 4 y lt Auxiliary gt tab Carry out station no change checked setting dialog box 5 129 5 129 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The station number switching function consists of the following setting items e Switching Station No dialog box O Switching Checked Unchecked station No 0O All Checked Unchecked L Device dialog box Set the Device No 0O Screen Checked Unchecked type Base Checked Unchecked E O Device dialog box Set the Device No _ Overlap Checked Unchecked window1 eee O Device dialog box Set the Device No __ Overlap Checked Unchecked window2 eee O Device dialog box Set the Device No Superimpose Checked Unchecked window pot O Device dialog box Set the Device No O Include Touch key action observe Status Screen Script Screen 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Firstly 2 Choose Setup operations using the Common menu Setting up the switching station number device from Contents of Help e The stations accessible by switching station number are equal to the stations that can be accessed for mon
48. Section 5 3 2 Lamp display Function that changes the lamp illumination color according to the monitor device value or specified device status ON OFF device value Section 5 3 3 Panel meter display Function that displays the value of the word device on the meter with the ratio for the upper lower limits When the value of the monitoring devices reaches a certain value the color of the meter panel can be changed Section 5 3 4 Trend graph display 4 34 Function that collects the data stored in the word device at the designated timing and displays it on the trend graph When the graph is displayed to the screen range the screen scrolls for further display Section 5 4 1 4 34 4 SPECIFICATION Function GOT A900 series AQ x GOT GT SoftGOT GOT F900 series Details MELSOFT Refer To Line graph O O x5 Function that collects the data of multiple word devices in a Section 5 4 2 display O batch and displays the line graph Bar graph O o O Function that displays the data stored in multiple word devices Section 5 4 3 display with a bar graph Statistical 5 Function that collects the data of multiple word devices and K graph display 2 2 displays the percentage of each word device data in graph Selon SAA Scatter chart Function that gathers the data stored in the word devices O O x associated with the X and Y axes and displays them as a Secti
49. Video window2 Video window1 e Video windows may be used only when the A9GT 80V4 A9GT 80V4R1 is fitted to the A985GOT V e No objects can be placed in a video window e The video signal format NTSC PAL specified on the GOT side should be the same as the format of the video signal input from a video camera If the video signal formats are different a video picture may not be displayed properly Refer to Section 4 1 6 for the way to choose the video signal format e A video picture is not displayed if a video signal is not input to the specified channel due to cable disconnection camera power off or the like 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 1 How to display the video window a When the data of the device set as the Channel No turns to any of 1 to 4 the corresponding video window appears in the then states Channel No Size Coordinates X axis Y axis of the monitored devices set on GT Designer Example When the picture of channel No 1 is displayed in video window 1 e Channel No D105 e X axis D107 e Size D106 e Y axis D108 D105 0 1 Channel No _ _ _ lt lt lt lt lt lt D106 0 gt 0 Size 640x 480 X axis a Y axis Ss ne lt P N S
50. _OBit trigger Bit Bit count setting Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set bit device and condition enabling 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Shape Unchecked checked Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Image List Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Set the background color 0 to 255 Size Designation of Comment Size V x H Device points Set the Device points Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Storage Unchecked checked Device dialog box Set the Device No Comment No Set the first device number of Comment List dialog box Setting of Indication comment to be displayed Number Plural Single Sort Ascending Descending Option m Detailed display Comment window Base Screen Store memory Unchecked checked t Scroll on Unchecked checked Display date Unchecked checked D isp Set the Comment No 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up message display Setting up alarm list display system alarms user alarms from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security can be set e Priority can be displayed in the order of occ
51. e Security offset and expression can be set e Bar graphs can be displayed above under the designated base value e Up to eight graphs for eight devices can be displayed e Graphs can be sorted in ascending descending order e Scales and scale values can be set e Graph frame can be set 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Bar graphs can be displayed above under the designated base value Up to one graph for one device can be displayed e Scales can be set e Graph frame can be set 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 4 4 Statistical graph display function shows word device values on statistical graph GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function graphs the ratios of the collected word device data to the total 1 Function outline a Collects the data of multiple word devices and shows the ratios of the word device data to the total on a circle graph DO O 40 20 50 D1 60 30 70 D2 W 70 gt 90 gt 40 D3 m 30 60 gt 40 Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Graph e graph Device gB sic gt tab No of Partitions DO Graph 255 Pattern 8 lt Division gt tab D1 Graph 182 Pattern 8 Scale display Scale points 4 lt Graph gt tab p ay p D2 Graph 109 Pattern 8 Scale value display 1 Value no 4 D3 Graph 0 Pattern 8 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 se
52. is not applicable glo 8 0O Security Setting of Security 0 to 15 D O Offset O Device dialog box Specify the device to be offset OMask None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count Expression Input Expression dialog box Setting of Defined case 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Copy from ON Copy ON time text setting to OFF time text setting 3 Setting method Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Shapes Basic figuer Parts Lamp Unchecked checked External Case Bit ON OFF time setting Shape Image List dialog box Set the figure number Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Lamp Designation of Lamp color 0 to 255 Text Text dialog box Set the text display position and spacing from frame Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 t VxH Designation of Size V x H MELSOFT Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up animation display gt Setting up lamp display from Contents of Help POINT 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security and offset can be set e Basic figures provided by GT Designer and the free figures set by
53. l e Click the button Start communication between the GOT and the personal computer by either of the following operations e Select the Communication Start menu e Click the Fil ctor Debug each screen Save the device values designated by the debugging operation By reading this file next time device values set previously can be used for debugging End 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT CHAPTER7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 7 1 Overview This chapter explains the script functions which can be used with the GOT A900 series The script functions are designed to control the GOT display with the GOT s original programs hereafter abbreviated to scripts Controlling the GOT display with the GOT side script reduces the load sharply on the system side e g PLC CPU microcomputer display 7 1 1 Features 1 Ease of system maintenance Using the script functions the system side needs only machine control programs facilitating system maintenance 2 A variety of screen controls exercised by GOT alone Using the script functions enable the following operations which could not be achieved by the GOT alone a Cooperation with various object functions e A single lamp represents multiple bit device states e A specific part is displayed if any of multiple bit devices is on and is erased if they are all off e As soon as a numeric value is input a part denoting Already input is past
54. numerical input areas s A p E C 200 Key window Key window D 1889 Key window D 185 A laa a TR Ns T Sa Input cursor moving path Numerical input gt J Numerical input gt Numerical input gt Move the input cursor to D Move the input cursor to B Move the input cursor to C Numerical Basicstab Device D104 Input D User ID 4 Screen auxiliar lt sOptioni gt tab Move destination ID 2 Common jaat y Cursor Movement Defined key action User ID order 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT d Controls the input cursor position on the PLC CPU side and also develops the device value whose numerical input has been established into other control Only when the GOT A900 series is used Use the system information function to make sure that the numerical input has been established Under the conditions of the numerical input number storage area and numerical input signal data develop the numerical input value into other control System information function devices used in this setting example D6 Numerical input number storage area Stores the user ID of the established numerical input function D2 b4 Numerical input signal Turns ON when the numerical
55. oe foe foe foe os oe Po os fol saja a a fe os eso Cyclic 0 5 5 Transient 2 0 APPENDICES MELSOFT revel Touch key ispl ispl Bi we a i i display E Object name 7 240x120 240x120 48x48 48x48 dots 160x160 a 6 digits dots A E A dots dots 8 lines dots 8 lines i 10 points Poo epee eepe a e e device connection Intelli Intelligent nc 0 3 03 0 4 0 3 0 35 device station device Transient Random device ESA Eea 0 2 pae w fe e e of or a e Programmable Sequential device speed Units Sequential device 0 21 0 30 0 70 0 35 0 35 Programmable aie I e Poefen e ea a Programmable controller by Allen Sequential device Bradley Programmable sequential device 0 3 o5 o7 05 controller by SHARP qu Programmable controller by Toshiba Sequentia govis KOEIE Frogrammabig Sequential device controller by SIEMENS 9 Programmable i controller by Hitachi Sequential device Matsushita Electric Sequential device 0 Works 2 App 6 App 6 APPENDICES MELSOFT Appendix3 List of Key Code 1 List of key code for numerical and ASCII input 0020 ooso gt o 0080 2 pot o a on a o f oss ee e a Cee ee Ce se a e E 0023 C 0043 c 0063 l 0083 s s oa Dp om a o Cea o8 ae ae ae a ee ae a e E E a a ce sa cs E gt o a o ee a a Qnm I 0049 i 0069 x 1 C
56. refer to Section 4 3 1 e Sound files that can be played on the GOT are in the 8 000kHz 16 bits monaural audio format However most of the sound files used generally are created in other audio formats Hence when using generally used sound files on the GOT they must be converted into the GOT format using general purpose sound editing software e g Sound Recorder of Windows 95 For conversion refer to the help of GT Designer e Sound files of within eight seconds can be played on the GOT Data longer than eight seconds will be cut 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 7 Test function changes the device value of the PLC CPU GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function shows a test window during monitor screen display to change a device value This function is available while the ladder monitor function is used 1 Function outline a Touch a touch key to show a test window and change a device value Z NETWK No STATION DEVICE RST 0 SET 1 XI YIM L S lt gt B F v A G AC DEL K ggg ggg Setting Portion Settings Touch K Acti oue ey Peon Exlended Test Window dialog box tab e The device types whose values can be changed with the test function are as follows e Bit device ON OFF e Word device s current value change e Timer counter s s
57. status monitoring and script functions to the object corresponding to the sail ie Vis Fk asa icelebz cl lnk Vaal san a a al station number switching function Only A985GOT V may be used c Other functions added Edit and Setting 7 l Functions Description of Function Added laleslclelrlulslaloclalclalelalolFls klP r u pec Addition of the function which sets display or non display according to whether an action condition is filled or not Seer setting function action of nate eal ey sae Ts Too function function Addition of the function which sets he cursor display position and cursor input region table for screen switching Addition of the function which allows specifying the screen Sub setting of project unit number used as user original key indow Addition of the function that sets portrait in the display format of the basic setting when F930GOT is used Addition of the function which sets the cursor display position and cursor input region table for x x b x x x x o o o o Fas 1 ae x x screen switching Screen by y Addition of the function which screen gt Hy sets whether display is provided auxiliary or not depending on whether setting operation condition is xl x x x xixfxfx fx bx xpx lx px PxlxIxPxlolololo established or not on screen by screen basis instead of project by project basis App 29 App 29 Addition of the function which
58. x Specifies blinking at the interval of 0 5 sec High Click a topic then click Display Specifies blinking at the interval of 0 2 sec Numerical Numerical D S umerical Input dialog box Basic tab ct this option if you want only the numerical value to blink Numerical and Plate 4 Display Select this option if you want the numerical value and the plate image behind it to blink Reverse Select this option to display the numerical value in reverse video 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 1 Data Display Functions The data display functions show the PLC CPU s memory data in real time They are available in the following types e Numerical display function Shows a numerical value e Data list display function Shows numerical values in tabular form e ASCII display function 4 Shows a text e Clock display function 04 Shows time 5 1 1 Numerical display function shows word device data as a numerical value GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series Bow This function shows data stored in a PLC CPU device as a numerical value 1 Function outline a Reads the data stored in a PLC CPU device to the GOT and displays it as a numerical value in real time D100 150 Setting Portion Settings Device D100 b Changes the displayed numerical color background c
59. 0O Delete _ Deletion of recipe operation Delete all Deletion of all recipe operations 0 File name OF ixed OF ree 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS b When using the GOT F900 series A Recipe Attribute Edit dialog box Recipe name Set the recipe operation name Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No Device points 7 Setting of Device points 1 to 4000 Data type Signed 16bit Unsigned 16bit Read Trigger Triggeri Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No ON Off Write Trigger Trigger1 Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No ON Off Device value Setting of Device value Delete Deletion of recipe operation Delete all Deletion of all recipe operations 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function gt Setting up Recipe from Contents of Help POINT 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Up to two devices can be specified as conditions e For restrictions on the recipe function refer to Section 4 3 1 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Up to two devices can be specified as conditions 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 6 Sound function plays a sound on GOT GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series Set WAV format
60. 1 For data link l ap lt re ae Station No 0 Station No 2 227100100 master station ae TY Monitoring the pss host station o Oo o o O 0 LA poom ova D100 40 Station No 3 we Station number change device eee D20 OOFF Hexadecimal Monitoring station No 3 Monitoring station No 1 Monitoring station No 2 D100 100 D100 200 D100 10 Station number change device Station number change device Station number change device D20 0001 Hexadecimal D20 0002 Hexadecimal D20 0003 Hexadecimal All itchi ion No dial Switching Station No dialog box Device D100 Screen Auxiliary lt Auxiliary gt tab Carry out station no change checked setting dialog box b The network station is selected and monitored according to the screen type Base screen fori 4 Monitoring the other station Monitoring the other station Monitoring the host station NW No 1 NW No 1 Station No 3 Station No 3 lt _ _ Overlap window 1 Monitoring the Monitoring the eero host station host station Station No 6 Station number change device hexadecimal Base screen D20 OOFF a 0103 0103 Overlap window screen 1 D21 OOFF OOFF 0206 Setting Portion Settings
61. 2 touch key invalid areas 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT The surrounding single key 16 dots equivalent touch key invalid areas may be eliminated only when the following conditions are satisfied e The close and move keys are set to be hidden e The window size is set to a multiple of 16 dots Valid touch key area Overlap window 1 OE Invalid touch key area Overlap window 2 5 Superimpose window Retrieve one window screen on the base screen for composition It can be used as part of the base screen While the superimpose window is displayed changing the window screen number can change the part of the base screen dynamically Ex 1 Add color to line A where abnormality has occurred Operation for abnormality in line A Store 3 in the screen switching device Figure of window screen number 3 WU A Current production quantity 300 B Current production quantity 256 Abnormalit Set 3 in the screen switching device y of the superimpose window ELOU A Abnormality B Current production quantity 256 Note that the touch key underneath the overlap window does not function properly 4 SPECIFICATION Operation of each button Main screen Window screen Window screen number Screen MELSOFT Ex 2 Switch the display method of manufact
62. 200 100 D2 300 200 Script start Script end In this script the DO value is not reflected on D2 immediately causing a write delay This status persists until this script is processed Note that using the GOT internal devices GD GB as the substitution devices will give the same result Example 2 Substitution processing using temporary works w TMP0001 w D0 substitutes DO into TMP0001 w D1 w TMP0001 substitutes TMP0001 into D1 w D2 w TMP0001 substitutes TMP0001 into D2 DO 100 100 D1 200 100 D2 300 X 100 Script start Script end Using the temporary works designed for script functions prevents a write delay Refer to Section 7 2 3 for details of the temporary works 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT Example 3 Substitution processing using GOT internal devices GD GB w GD1 w DO substitutes DO into GD1 w D1 w GD1 substitutes GD1 into D1 w D2 w GD2 substitutes GD1 into D2 As the processing timing using GOT internal devices GD GB is the same as that using temporary works a write delay can be prevented When using the GOT internal devices to prevent a substitution delay perform GOT internal device substitution delay cancel in the script setting of GT Designer e Refer to the help of GT Designer for details of the script setting using GT Designer e When GOT internal device GD GB substitution delay cancel is performed a link scan is made on eac
63. A controller Generic term of LM610 LM7600 LM8000 CPU unit Inverter Generic term of FREQROL series A500 Series E500 Series F500 Series O O U Cc O GD Gd eneric term of AJ71E71 S3 A1SJ71E 1 B2 S3 A1SJ71E71 B5 S3 AJ71E71N B2 Peripheral A iati G4 Ethernet unit AJ71E71N B5T A1SJ71 E71N B2 and A1SJ71E71N B5T Generic term of AJ71QE7 1 A1SJ71QE7 1 B2 AJ71QE 1 B5 A1SJ71QE 1 B5 AJ71QE71N B2 AJ71QE71N B5T A1SJ71QE71N B2 and A1SJ71QE71N B5T Generic term of C200HS C200H C200Ha series C200HX C200HG C200HE CQM1 IC1000H C2000H CV500 CV1000 CV2000 CVM1 CPU11 CVM1 CPU21 CS1 CJ1 CPU unit Generic term of GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 GL130 CP 9200SH CP 9300MS MP 920 MP 930 MP 940 CP 9200 H and PROGIC 8 CPU unit ISLC500 Series Generic term of SLC500 20 SLC500 30 SLC500 40 SLC5 01 SLC5 02 SLC5 03 SLC5 04 SLC5 05 Generic term of 1761 L10BWA 1761 L10BWB 1761 L16AWA 1761 L16BWA 1761 MicroLogix1000 Series L16BWB 1761 L16BBB 1761 L32AWA 1761 L32BWA 1761 L32BWB 1761 L32BBB 1761 L32AAA 1761 L20AWA 5A 1761 L20BWA 5A 1761 L20BWB 5A MicroLogix1500 Series Abbreviation of 1764 LSP Allen Bradley PLC Generic term of SLC 500 Series MicroLogix1000 Series MicroLogix1200 Series MicroLogix1500 Series Sharp PLC Generic term of JW 21CU JW 22CU JW 31CUH JW 32CUH JW 33CUH JW 50CUH R W 70CUH JW 100CUH CPU unit PROSEC T Series Generic term of T2 PU224 type T2E T2N T3 T3H CPU unit PROSEC V Series Ab
64. A numerical comment display is not updated if only the monitor device value set to that display is changed 4 SPECIFICATION 4 5 Available Devices MELSOFT 4 5 1 Internal devices of GOT 1 GOT bit registers GB GOT data registers GD These are the GOT s internal devices which may be used only within the GOT The GOT bit registers GB are bit devices and the GOT data registers GD are word devices These devices are useful when you want to use devices in the following processings which need not be passed through the PLC CPU e Screen switching device e Script function work area e Bar code read value storage area GOT special registers GS These are special registers designed for the GOT They store the GOT s internal information communication conditions script error information etc By monitoring these devices with various object functions and script functions you can gather various information of the GOT easily The following table lists the GOT special registers and device functions a Read devices 1 second binary counter Script number Error code Error code e Common information 1 GSO b15 to b6 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO bO Alternates between ON and OFF per communication cycle b1 Remains ON from base window screen switching until one cycle of on screen setting processing is completed This also applies to station number changing and security level changing 4 46 4 SPEC
65. A970GOT LBA LBD A951GOT Q A95 GOT TBD mwr e COFCO EWK 1 x x x xix x x x xlejejeje Fo20coT corroe bb be bebe be be eb Be bec Bc PD Le 2 TE unit functions added extended option and other functions Function Functonadded TST OTETFTRTITATCLALOIATFTATOT FTI Poe Function PATBICTETFIHIJIATCIAICIATFIATDIF J KTP RIU pec uneton oons asmen x SEa Utility function Addition of OS copy function x x x Ea El Ea Ea EI male PC card card PC card Supporting of Fsh PC cards Supporting of Fsh PC cards Fsh PC cards x Extension of monitoring device erm EEE lll connected Addition of SB and SW to monitor Hl fd lt fofofo o o o o o o oloo o o o n devices when the ACPU is xIx XxXxX x x x monitoring eent SS SC S SB SN device range and SW to monitor devices when ejejejejeje e o o o ojojojojo the QnACPU is connected Addition of TS and CS to monitor devices when the ACPU FXCPU o fff foo gt a a a a a a a a a is connected wes coe core PE PEE register GS to the GOT s x x xi xixixixixixixix xx internal devices The GOT internal devices GD Lr ee eae R XXIX H x p H p x g X H g x g H g g p g 1023 to 16383 Used device CC Link G4 station number base screen information gateway common control gateway information common iomain and Gi cotcOn E Ae a es a E eee Nee common information have been added to the GOT special registers GS Supports the monitoring of QnACPU ial fall eal
66. Accumulator A AO to A1 Buffer memory special function unit BM BMO to BMn x 1 Converting the above bit devices to words except for timer and counter Bit device word x3 4 GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit 2 Writing to the index register is prohibited during computer link connection 3 Use a multiple of 16 for setting device number 4 If converting the special internal relay M to a bit device word regard 9000 as 0 and use a multiple of 16 for the device number Example M9000 M9016 M9240 4 51 4 51 4 SPECIFICATION 4 52 MELSOFT 2 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Output Y YO to Y1FFF TER E dle bit of the following word Word device bit devices except for index register and buffer memory Counter eureri value ON ie Extended file register ER E Bit device 1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is monitored 2 Block file register that is switched by the QDRSET command is monitored 3 The GOT handles the extended file registers on a 32k point 82768 point basis When specifying the extended file registers ZR in the object setting always make setting so that they do not spread across the 32k point basis boundaries Doing so will display the Specifie
67. BO to B7FFF Link special relay SB SBO to SB7FF comer en eor oo Counter Ea Contact SS Retentive timer Coil SC SCO to SC32767 Step relay S Timer current value TN 2 TNO to TN32767 Counter current value CN 2 1 Block file register that is switched by the RSET command is set monitored x 2 When the GOT F900 series is connected to the system where the A series computer link module is loaded in the QnACPU monitoring and write cannot be performed on the timers counters and file registers Also note that the available range for setting monitoring will be the range of the ACPU AnACPU equivalent Bit device Word device 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 Omron PLC 5 Microcomputer board Bit data M MO to M2047 Special internal relay 1 M8000 to M8063 Bit device Bit device GOT bit device GB GB132 to GB1023 Special data register 1 D8000 to D8015 GOT word device GD GD100 to GD1023 1 Special is a device used for special applications such as interrupt output and communication error information of the GOT Word device 4 67 4 67 4 SPECIFICATION 6 Allen Bradley PLC Bit B Bit device Word device 1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data Timer timing bit TT Timer timing bit TN Counter up counter CU Counter down counter CD Counter completion bit CN Word device bit GOT internal bit register GB Timer se
68. CPU direct connection 19 3min 20 6min 23 7min Bus connection 20 9min 20 9min 23 2min Computer link 19 1min 20 2min 23 1min MELSECNET connection data link system 22 1min 21 9min 22 6min MELSECNET connection network system 21 6min 19 8min 23 0min CPU direct connection 37 2min 22 8min 22 7min Bus connection 36 0min 23 1min 22 5min A956W GOT Computer link 36 9min 23 1min 22 8min MELSECNET connection data link system 35 7min 23 1min 23 1min MELSECNET connection network system 36 7min 23 1min 22 5min 1 Either of the following printers was used to measure printing time e ESC P command ready printer Canon BUC 600J e PCL command ready printer HEWLETT PACKARD Laser Jet6L A95 GOT SBA SBD A95 GOT LBA LBD App 16 App 16 APPENDICES MELSOFT Appendix6 Relationships between Extended Functions OS Installation and User Area Memory Map The GOT s internal memory has 1152k bytes of space for the user area area where screen data can be stored When the expanded or option functions are used in the GOT the corresponding extended functions OSs must be installed in the GOT Since the extended functions OSs are stored in the user area the free space of the user area changes with the number of OSs installed as indicated below Oooo o T o T e k E a ooo o T a E k 640 ooo a T w k eS a 1 The MELSEC QnA ladder
69. Data Check srstttersssseeeseeeseeeeeeaseeeenenes Checks the number of monitoring data L Option srrretttereeeteeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneenees Operation display and communication environments are set Common Title H Sereen srsrsrsssrrrserrereserreneennnennns Sets the titles and details for each base screen window screen and report screen Project ssseererereesccesencerenserensecenes Registers the title and the ID number of the project data Switching Screen e Sets the base window screen switching device m Switching Station No Sets the station No switching device Ethernet srrrrssssseescsseeeseeeseeeseeaeneeeeees Sets the monitor destination for Ethernet connection Gateway Server eu enccccucncsccccucncusenccusscucuss Sets the server function Client serere Sets the client function t Mailss o E EEE Sets the mail send function FTP Server Sets the FTP server function Password srrttsttttteststeteeteseeeeeeenneeens Sets the security function password etc Hardcopy ssssssserereeeeesssseeseereneeseesennne Sets the hard copy function Operation Panel s ssstrrsrtsteeesesseeesseees Sets the operation panel function Barcode CEU Sets the bar code function m Sampling srrssttttsttteteesseeseeesseeeeeeeeeees Sets the sampling function System Information sssssssttsssssteeeeeeeees Sets the device to check the GOT operation status on the PLC CPU Time action Sauene Sets the time action function O
70. Data list display function 29 Numerical input function 5 ASCII display function 30 ASCII input function 7 Toolbar Edit This is where the figure editing items assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 eh Pa teat ak len vl GS Stk Als SA B Names of tool buttons 1 Bring to front 2 Send to back 3 Grouping 4 Canceling grouping 1 Selection target object 2 Selection target figure object 3 Selection target report line 4 Report figure line 5 Horizontal flip 15 Report figure text 6 Vertical flip 6 Report print object numerical 7 90 counterclockwise 7 Report print object comment 8 Edit vertex 8 Setting report header line 9 Align 9 Setting report repeat line 10 Selection target figure 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 8 Toolbar Draw This is where the items line style pattern text style etc laid out in the tool palette appear as lists Moving the cursor W onto any button and clicking it opens the drop down menu of the corresponding item Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the corresponding function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Line 1 z0 255 Pattem None O 255 v mo x tet 0255 Reo m 1 Set ch
71. Device lie Bit 1024 32 Bit 512 Shape Frame Size Blink 80 2 X title characters 4 X display items 16 X devices Shape Frame Plate Title Rule 4 37 4 37 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT Specifications Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices __ functions Max Function setting Used memory space points per bytes screen Display attributes Rise Fall a E E a E a S E S E Bit Trigger Bit device peee e a a E a a e e E e E e a aa E ee FS Sampling Offset designation Station number changing Max number of display characters 60 characters Shape Frame Plate Size x Max number of monitor points Consecutive bit device 8192 points Random bit device 512 points h F PI Memory 152 devices X 24 SI ape Frame Plate saving Size User alarm 16 x4 Display mode Overwrite XOR Positioning Top left Center Color Blink Movement Mode Position Line Point Display mode Locus Movement Positioning Top left Center Color Blink Shape Basic figure Free figure High quality font Frame Lamp Background Pattern Blink Text Style Color Solid V X H Type Part Mark Base Screen Window screen Type Part Mark Meter type 1 4 Circle Top Bottom Left Right Right top Left top Left Bottom 1 2 Circle Top Bottom Left Right 3 4 Circle Circle Part Display Shape Frame Plate Needle Meter panel Text Size Color Hig
72. Display style Time Data format yy mm dd The GOT reads the clock data of the PLC CPU once an hour If the clock data of the PLC CPU is changed therefore the clock indication of the GOT may not be updated for an hour at the longest e When the date is selected the year is displayed as the two lower digits of the year e When the time is selected the time is displayed on a 24 hour basis b When using the GOT F900 series Shows the GOT s built in clock data Either the date or time can be displayed 11 AUG 2000 FRI 13 48 40 1 Clock display object date indication 2 Clock display object time indication Display style Date Shape checked Display style Time lt Form gt tab Data format Typet lt Form gt tab Data format Typet 5 11 5 11 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The clock display function consists of the following setting items e Clock dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series g Display Date 2 style Lime 3 O Shape Unchecked checked O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 O Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 O Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 O Data format yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy Size Height x width size setting O High quality font Checked unchecked O Option O Security Extended t
73. Fax 359 0 2 97 44061 e mail INEA CR d o o Drvinje 63 HR 10000 Zagreb Phone 385 0 1 36 67 140 Fax 385 0 1 36 67 140 e mail AutoCont Control Systems s r o Nemocnicni 12 CZ 702 00 Ostrava 2 Phone 420 59 6152 111 Fax 420 59 6152 562 e mail consys autocont cz CROATIA CZECHIA louis poulsen DENMARK industri amp automation Geminivej 32 DK 2670 Greve Phone 45 0 43 95 9595 Fax 45 0 43 9595 91 e mail pia lpmail com UTU Elektrotehnika AS P rnu mnt 160i EE 11317 Tallinn Phone 372 0 6 51 72 80 Fax 372 0 6 51 7288 e mail utu utu ee ESTONIA Beijer Electronics OY FINLAND Ansatie 6a FIN 01740 Vantaa Phone 358 0 9 886 77 500 Fax 358 0 9 886 77 555 e mail info beijer fi MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Irish Branch Westgate Business Park IRL Dublin 24 Phone 353 0 1 419 88 00 Fax 353 0 1 419 88 90 e mail sales info meir mee com SIA POWEL LATVIA Lienes iela 28 LV 1009 Riga Phone 371 784 22 80 Fax 371 784 22 81 e mail utu utu lv UAB UTU POWEL Savanoriu pr 187 LT 2053 Vilnius Phone 370 0 52323 101 Fax 370 0 52322 980 e mail powel utu It INTEHSIS SRL MOLDOVA REPUBLIC OF Cuza Voda 36 1 81 MD 2061 Chisinau Phone 373 0 2 562 263 Fax 373 0 2 562 263 e mail intehsis mdl net IRELAND LITHUANIA Getronics b v NETHERLANDS Control Systems Dona
74. GOT A900 series t OScreen type Base Window OScreen No Browse O Screen Image dialog box O Edit O Delete b When using the GOT F900 series m Screen No Browse Soren image dialog box Edit Delete 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Operations after making screens gt Setting up Screen call from Contents of Help e The items available for the screen call function change with the GOT used as indicated below When using GOT A900 series When using GOT F900 series Setting target screen Max f call lax number of called 2047 screens K 1 Base screen Max number of layered 6 excluding source screen Nesting not allowed nesting levels 2 x1 Indicates the maximum number of called screens relative to the basic screen source screen k 2 Indicates levels on which screens will be further called Called screen combinations cannot be changed during screen display after transfer to the GOT 5 113 5 113 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 4 What you should know to use the screen call function when using GOT A900 series a Order of displaying called screens When multiple called screens exist on one screen the display order is determined by the order of setting on GT Designer and the order of called screen l
75. Os z Pattern 26 bai Foreground E Foreground m3 x Back d 0 ind ackground EN zl Background aa z 4 SPECIFICATION 4 2 Drawing Figures and Number of Attributes GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series oO 4 2 1 Types of drawing figures Figures Line Figures and character types are as follows 1 When the GOT A900 series is used Example of drawing Line Freedom MELSOFT Attributes for selection Line style line width line color Rectangle Polygon Circle ellipse SKE KRLIS RRRA KY RRI LLL Line style line width line color painting pattern painting color painting background Arc ellipse arc Line style line width line color Sector Line style line width line color painting pattern painting color painting background Painting of enclosed area Painting pattern painting color painting background Figure data in bitmap DXF format ABC asc ABC ABC A B ABG C Style text color solid color size vertical direction alignment high quality font high quality font only for multiple of 2 4 6 and 8 of length to width magnification Number of graduation direction centerline line style line width line color Report figure line E E Report figure text WwW O 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT When Raised i
76. Rows Row1 Columns 2 Device D10 Display rows 14 Rowe Columns 2 Device D20 lt Form gt tab Columns 14 i Row3 Columns 2 Device D30 Sort Ascending Row4 Columns 2 Device D40 Sort Attr column 13 Device Random b Using the data list display function and graph display statistical graph in the example together shows multiple device states effectively No macane Target Output yj acne agg 24 2 Machine 100 42 3 acne 100 22 4 achine 400 22 Row1 Columns 2 Device D10 Label foreground 255 White Row2 Columns 2 Device D20 Label foreground 224 Red Row3 Columns 2 Device D30 Label lt Form gt tab i foreground 3 Blue i Row4 Columns 2 Device D40 Label foreground 252 Yellow Device Random In a statistic graph set the monitor devices and display colors to match the above Sort Attr column 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items The data list display function consists of the following setting items e Data List dialog box O Basic heck heck rs OShape nerecredg goed O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape F OFrame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 co t OPlate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 OTitle Designation of Title 0 to 255 L__ Text___________ Desi
77. Script A Base Script B Script B Script A 16th called screen Script B Function Type Order Setting Screen Order First called screen Script B Superimpose window First called screen Superimpose window Script A 16th called screen Script B Screen script function Script A Overlap window 1 First called screen Script B Script A Overlap window 1 16th called screen Overlap window 2 Script B 16th called screen First called screen Overlap window 2 Refer to Section 5 10 1 for details of the screen calling function 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 4 Execution status The script function performs any of the following processings according to the script status Script Status Waiting for turn Waiting for execution Execution e A script waits its processing turn in accordance with the execution sequence e When its turn has come the script waits for execution e Processing changes depending on whether the execution condition is enabled or disabled Enabled The corresponding script is executed Disabled The corresponding script waits its turn and the next script waits for execution e When the script ends the processing result is written to the PLC CPU and the corresponding script waits its turn Also the next script waits for execution e If an error occurs the corresponding script stops and the
78. Scroll up by one line Scroll down by one line Show cursor Hide cursor Move cursor upward Move cursor downward Display detail information Display ladder Cannot be set when the GOT F900 series is used e Key code for alarm history function FFBO Show cursor FFB1 Hide cursor FFB2 Move cursor upward FFB3 Move cursor downward FFB4 Display date time of selected data FFB5 Display date time of all data FFB6 Delete selected alarm contents on display FFB7 Delete all alarm contents on display FFB8 Display detail information FFB9 Reset designated device FFBB When using GOT A900 series Save alarm contents to PC card When using GOT F900 series Reset designated device FFBC Display ladder Cannot be set when the GOT F900 series is used FFB6 and FFB7 are compatible with the OS version 3 0 and later of the GOT F900 series App 9 App 9 MELSOFT APPENDICES Appendix4 Drawing Sheet 1 For A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A9I60GOT 26S 92S 09S tvs 82S e ZLS 96t 08t 6Zt vob 8b Zet 9LF 89E 7 1 1 i 1 1 l 1 1 1 ol H 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 T 1 1 al T H ll 1 1 ol 1 1 oll 1 1 1 al Ove H al 1 1 al 1 1 el i 1 H el 1 1 1 1 1 I 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 j 1 1 i i 1 1 I 1
79. Section 2 2 3 Section 3 2 Section 4 1 Section 4 1 2 Section 4 1 4 Section 4 1 5 Section 4 2 1 Section 4 2 2 Section 4 3 1 Section 4 3 2 Section 4 5 1 Section 4 5 2 Section 5 1 4 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 5 Section 5 8 13 Section 5 9 1 Section 5 9 2 Section 6 5 1 Section 6 5 2 Appendix4 Appendix8 Additions Appendix7 Japanese Manual Version SH 080112 H This manual confers no industrial property rights or any rights of any other kind nor does it confer any patent licenses Mitsubishi Electric Corporation cannot be held responsible for any problems involving industrial property ights which may occur as a result of using the contents noted in this manual 2000 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION INTRODUCTION Thank you for choosing the Mitsubishi Graphic Operation Terminal Before using the equipment please read this manual carefully to use the equipment to its optimum CONTENTS SAFETY PRECAUTION Sea ssc erranen raana aaaea aaa Wives ania ances Waste ated Taraan adena Na SaNa STan A 1 Precautions for using this Software important e eee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeseaeesaeeeaeeeaeenaeeeeeseaeenaeenas A 2 REVISIONS wii eet er ete iin eet tat ol A ink a a A eh ne oe eA A 3 INTRODUCTION wrat och foe tech oe al oes abit cea Sas cee hota eh teak A Gases tk seth ry heath spetteee thems bente at tae A 4 CONTENT Ser taa Laie avin ais elie ies i as
80. Sets the window screen position for overlap window 2 t Superimpose Window 5s Sets the window screen position for superimpose window Key Window rerstesteeteeeeeeeeeeeenenees Sets the key window position Key Window Custom Input Value Area srrtrsstressteeeeeeeeeee Sets the input value display area in the key window Input Range Area srrrrsssstrssssseeeees Sets the input range display area in the key window Report Common Makes settings for the whole report function Parameter srrrrrsssseeesesseeeeeeteeeseeneeees Sets the parameters of each report screen Print Object L Number sssssssssessneneenennenensnsnnsne Sets the value to be printed Sets the comment to be printed Draws the rules rectangle Enters characters Specifies the header and repeated lines 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT Communi Download to GOT cation Monitor Data Downloads the created monitoring screen data to the GOT or the PC card Special FUNCtion s rrrssssteeeeeeeeeee Downloads the special Function monitoring data Motion Monitor data Motion Servo Servo amplifier data to the GOT or the PC card amplifier Monitor Data k Upload from GOT ssrrrrstestssreseeeeessees Uploads the monitoring data stored in the GOT Install Installs the OS on the GOT or the PC card Installs the ROM_BIOS on the GOT or the PC card Displays or clears the memory
81. Touch Ke Aref Sector 12 LP012 valag il 49u Yen e 14 LPIA Data Input erent g Scale 17 LP 017 ar 15 teats Overlap Screen Text L Panelkit save load erent Sj Wi ins ext indow Position gt d u oe Arue ae Key Window Custom Paint 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 4 Toolbar Main This is where the basic items assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Die Aaa sae A FPN 9 eh T Names of tool buttons 1 New project 11 Switching edit screen 2 Open project 12 Open and display closed screen for 3 Save project switching edit screen 4 New screen 13 Object list screen display 5 Load screen 14 Device list screen display 6 Save screen 15 Comment edit 7 Cut 16 Tool palette display 8 Copy 17 Template display 9 Paste 18 Panelkit display 10 Preview 19 Figure and object editing cursor 20 Template placing cursor 5 Toolbar View This is where the items moving distance pattern etc assigned on the menu bar appear as buttons Moving the cursor onto Y and clicking it opens the drop down menu of the corresponding item Move the cursor to the attribute you want to change and click it to perform the corresponding function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 fie foz is z fi
82. Unchecked checked Device ODevice dialog box OLocus Unchecked checked No clear trigger L Clear on trigger rise Clear on trigger fall OValue not unchecked Checked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No displayed Designation of Value not displayed OTrigger type Rise Fall Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval ON Sampling OFF Sampling Olnitial display Unchecked checked Set the Device No o m OMask None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count _C Expression Olnput Expression dialog box J Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Graph Line Shape Unchecked checked Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Shape No Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate _ Designation of Plate 0 to 255 Form Direciton Right Left Number Designation of Number 1 to 4 Points Designation of Points 2 to 50 Frame Unchecked checked Edit Attribute dialog box Edit Device dialog box Set the Device No m Graph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 Delete Deletion of setting Fale Designation of Style Data
83. Unusable on the F930GOT 4 Not used on the A95 GOT A956WGOT Function that can control the GOT display with the GOT s original programs scripts Section 5 8 12 Chapter 7 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 5 Unusable on the F920GOT 6 When using any of the functions you always need to install the corresponding extended OS in the GOT Extended function OS Report function Extended function OS report Hard copy function Extended function OS ESC printer PCL printer Recipe function Extended function OS recipe Sound function Extended function OS sound Bar code function Extended function OS bar code Operation panel function Extended function OS external key input x7 When using any of the following object functions you need to fit necessary equipment for the corresponding function Function name RSEPEO ARS FEO A956WGOT A95 GOT A960GOT When using SRAM card Memory card interface unit Memory card Alarm history For PC card save Unnecessary When using compact flash interface unit display function PC card SRAM card only hard copy function Option unit unnecessary For history printing i Y E Unnecessary Printer interface unit printout Use the applicable model R ance Unnecessary Unnecessary A95 GOT x BD M3 She eee A950 handy GOT Report printing Printer interface unit Use the applicable model Recipe funct Memory board Memory board A95 x GOT x BD M3 Bee ee A950 handy GOT
84. alignment Left alignment ODigits Specify the number of digits to be printed 1 to 13 one all digits Specify the decimal fraction part to be displayed 0 to 32 Decimal point O OMask t None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value t O Shift _None Left Right t ONo of shift Set the shift count __ Expression _ O Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT e Comment Print dialog box Set the print position print device print format and others of the comment data to be printed on report paper Basic O n ie O Device dialog box Data type Bit Word BIN16 t O Print digits Set the number of digits to be printed 1 to 255 O Comment No bit Set the comment number of ON OFF Expression OMask None AND OR XOR Pattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count OExpression O Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression e Header Repeat Range dialog box Set the header title etc range on the report screen and the range where printing will be repeated per data collection trigger O Header range O Set _ Unchecked c
85. associated with an object use the keyboard the type the key code into the spin box instead of making a selection from the spin box 4 Operation on a table in a dialog box To select a line on a table when specifying a object display range for example click on any part of the line except the number display column Clicking on the number display column on a line does not select the line If you clicked on the number display column on a line that line is displayed in reverse video click on the number display column again to resume the display in normal video 5 Instructions for displaying any line other than a continuous line such as a dotted line in boldface type When any line other than a continuous line is drawn in boldface type the personal computer screen may not display the line type properly However it is displayed properly on the GOT and there are no problems in data 6 Measures against the year 2000 Y2K problem The GOT reads and displays the clock information from the PLC When the GOT is connected to the Mitsubishi PLC Mitsubishi motion controller or is used with the A9GT RS2T continuous operation or restart of the GOT will present no problem since the PLC motion controller A9GT RS2T itself will perform 1999 to 2000 roll over operation and leap compensation properly No measures required When connected to a third party PLC however the GOT reads and displays the clock data from the third party PLC Therefore contact the corres
86. c Select the data to be converted and click the Open button APP 1 Select the driver and folder which store the data to be converted y Windows x 2 Select the file name of the data to be converted I switches the Look in indication to the folder one position above the current one EE Lists the Look in indication in terms of the folder names and data names only Lists further details of the Look in indication App 2 App 2 APPENDICES MELSOFT d The data selected is specified as a conversion source file and appears in the main window 3 Converting to the monitor screen data for GOT900 a Perform either of the following operations e Click the icon on the tool bar e Select the Start conversion menu b In the main window specify the folder which will store new data Enter the folder directly into Save folder or perform the following operation to specify it 2 Select the folder ASGOT DAT JASGOTP la gotp HQCONST AS HQFONT DAT H8N DAT LAMPLIB AS READ_JPN TXT TOUCHLIB AS UNICODE FNT zl WGOT EXE WREPORT EXE 7 z c 1 Select the drive c Clicking the OK button converts the selected data to GOT900 series data On completion of the conversion operation the conversion completion message appears The new data is stored into the specified folder POINTS When the data
87. canceled If canceled the GOT may stop operating Once installation of the OS is started it can be canceled but re installation is required If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication cable is disconnected to cancel installation the GOT may stop operating If the GOT does not run due to any of the above indicated operations reinstall the system program in the following procedure 1 Switch off the GOT unit 2 Remove the communication board communication unit option unit loaded to the GOT If the GOT has the built in communication interface disconnect the communication cable 3 Hold down the following two places of the GOT display section at the same time and switch on the GOT 4 The Reinstall the ROM_BIOS OS message appears on the GOT display section 5 Follow the instructions on the GOT display section to complete the installation operation 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 5 3 Installation of ROM_ BIOS The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for installation of the ROM_BIOS For further details refer to the help window of the GT Designer y Select the Communication Install ROM_BIOS menu y The ROM_BIOS installation dialog box is displayed j Vv Select the source path name and the destination GOT PC card Y Click the Install button i The ROM_BIOS is installed as follow
88. causes comments associated with multiple bit devices to flow from right to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments corresponding to the bit devices which are ON Comments keep flowing until the ON bit devices turn OFF 1 Function outline a When a bit device X1 turns ON a comment indicating error occurrence associated with the bit device X1 flows X1 Error ae TE mo 10 y Error ih tr Error Left Right Setting Portion Settings Floating Alarm dialog box Device X1 Screen Auxiliary Setting dialog box Carry out display of alarm flow checked b When comments are associated with multiple bit devices the comments flow from right to left on a base screen in occurrence order of comments corresponding to the bit devices that currently are ON Simultaneously how many monitoring bit devices are ON is also checked How many devices are ON is monitored only when the GOT A900 series is used Indicates how many monitor devices are ON using numerical display object Only when the GOT A900 series is used 1 Line 3 error Error Number of errors o 0 0 Fe 3 error Error Line Error Line 1 error Left Right Device points 8 Continuous device X1 Storage device D10
89. change the tab click s where the setting item is displayed Command button OK Jor Cancel is available for the command button Click the appropriate button for execution List box Click W to display the list for selection and click the desired item Check box To execute the item click _ to put v mark Radio button Click for the desired item Text box Input characters from the keyboard Spin box There are two cases one is direct input of the value and the other is changing the value by clicking A W To input the value directly click the spin box and input the value from the keyboard To change the value by clicking A click A and the value increases Click V and the value decreases 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 3 4 Operation of Template In the template function Mitsubishi Electric Corp owns the copyright for design of all parts including 256 color BMP parts provided with the GT Designer Use of these parts is strictly prohibited for the purpose other than the GOT In the template function figures or objects can be easily registered or pasted on the screen as parts panelkit parts A template has parts display area and tree display area 1 Parts tree display area a Parts display area This displays parts panelkit parts in the library registered in each folder parts library panelkit parts 1 3 5 ALP OOZ 8LP_008 SLP_009
90. creates a user original key window to use it instead of the standard key window Addition of the function which displays the window size at al xixixi x Key window position setting Addition of the function which allows you to select whether to display or hide the input enabled x x x x x x x range shown for out of range input Addition of the function that allows the key window to be x x x x used on the F930GOT APPENDICES MELSOFT Seal ayes Funtane eee ee tAleiclelelufulalclalclalrlalolels klelrlu bec Addition of the function which can display different objects x x x classified by pages Object list Addition of the function which allows the device setting to be changed by direct input from inside the list GPPW device Addition of the function which comment can read and refer to the GPPW reference device comment data as another function format data 4 cursor Addition of the function which displa automatically changes the cursor a1 sel nel Sel eel Sell 5 play indication shape when a figure function is drawn Addition of the special function Enhancement keys having more complex of parts library functions to the parts library of touch keys Enhancement Addition of new figures to the AE AE of parts library parts library of touch keys lamps Addition of the function which allows setting to be made by x x x x xix xxx x x x different types of MELSEC A and MEL
91. description 13 of a device other than a temporary e Replace the write device in the while statement with a temporary work work An expression was too complicated to fees ik f E F 14 e Simplify or divide the operation expression in the corresponding script process 15 A script did not end within the script e Check whether the corresponding script has gone into an endless loop monitor time e Increase the value of script monitor time GS385 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT MEMO APP APPENDICES MELSOFT APPENDICES Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Data When using the monitor screen data for GOT800 as that for GOT900 the data must be converted using the GT Converter This section outlines the operation to be performed to convert the monitor screen data for GOT800 For details of the GT Converter refer to the help function of the GT Converter e By converting the monitor screen data for GOT800 with the GT Converter it can be used as the monitor screen data for GOT900 without any restrictions Also the data capacity of the data converted into the monitor screen data for GOT900 is about 30 less than that of the monitor screen data for GOT800 e When using the GOT data of earlier than the GOT800 as the monitor screen data for GOT900 perform the following operation after converting it into the GOT data for GOT800 series using the drawing software for GOT800 series 1 contained in GT Works Version5 GT Des
92. device and condition enabling OMask None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count OExpression Olnput Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Graph Bar Shape Unchecked checked l Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Shape No Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 L Direciton Vertical Horizontal Frame Unchecked checked L Scale Position Left Down Right Up Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 L Device Device dialog box Set the Device No m Delete Deletion of setting Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN 1 6bit 32bit Base Upper Lower _ Fixed Numerical setting Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Others Scale display Unchecked checked m Scale points Designation of Scale points Vx H Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up graph display gt Setting up bar graph display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series
93. device bit Designated bit of the following word devices GOT internal bit register GB GB64 to GB16383 Bit B B3 0 to B3 255 T4 0 1 to T4 255 1 T4 0 PRE to T4 255 PRE Met Set valuo TP T10 0 1 to T255 255 1 T10 0 PRE to T255 255 PRE T4 0 2 to T4 255 2 Timer current value TA ei i A T10 0 ACC to T255 255 ACC C5 0 1 to C5 255 1 C5 0 PRE to C5 255 PRE Decimal Counter set value CP C10 0 1 to C255 255 1 C10 0 PRE to C255 255 PRE C5 0 2 to C5 255 2 Counter current value CA ssa 7 eee C10 0 ACC to C255 255 ACC N7 0 to N7 255 Integer N N10 0 to N255 255 i GOT internal data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data 2 If the device specified is outside the range the object set to the out of range device may not be displayed In that case check and correct the device Bit device 1 Word device 4 57 4 57 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT b When using Micrologix 1000 series Monitoring range Device No notation Bit B B3 0 0 to B3 31 15 2 as F T4 0 14 to T4 39 14 Timer timing bit TT T4 0 TT to T4 39 TT 7 T4 0 13 to T4 39 13 Timer completion bit TN T4 0 DN to T4 39 DN C5 0 15 to C5 31 15 Counter up counter CU C5 0 CU to C5 31 CU C5 0 14 to C5 31 14 Decimal Counter down counter C C5 0 CD to C5 31 CD Counter bit CN Ran 7 o SA N7 0 to N7 104 ae Designated bit of the following GOT in
94. dialog box Set the text display position and spacing from frame t O Style Regular Bold Solid Raised O Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 Solid Designation of Solid of characters OVxH Designation of Size V x H O Copy from ON Copy ON time text setting to OFF time text setting O High quality font Checked unchecked Case Word L Q Edit 4 O Edit Display Format OQShape _____ _F ree figure Basic figure dialog box A Panelkit dialog box Olmage List dialog box Set the figure from parts library panelkit Set the figure number O Bit ODevice dialog box Set the Device No O Range OEdit Range dialog box Set the device value range t O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 L OLamp Designation of Lamp color 0 to 255 t Background Designation of Backgroud 0 to 255 O Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern t O Blink No Low Middle High O Text O Text dialog box Set the text display position and spacing from frame I Style Regular Bold Solid Raised O Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 I Solid Designation of Solid of characters O Vx H Designation of Size V x H LO High quality Checked unchecked O Delete Deletion of display setting font OEdit Edit Display Format dialog box Display setting made when conditional expression
95. error definition appear Correct the script 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 4 Program Examples This section explains script program examples 7 4 1 Touch keys with interlock function 1 Operation When the Ready and Run Stop keys turn ON the Running lamp is lit The system operation is controlled synchronously with the Running lamp Screen Image Part Operation Definition Running Running lamp Indicates the operating status of the system Ready key Acts as an interlock for the Run Stop key Run Stop key Used to change the operating status run stop of the system 2 Monitor screen settings Object Type Seting tem Setting M0001 Ready key Touch key function bit E Operation setting Bit ALT Monitor device Run Stop key Touch key function bit Operation setting Bit ALT M0003 Running lamp Lamp indication function bit Monitor device System operation controlling device 3 Program example Data format 16 bit signed BIN Trigger type Any time if b M0001 amp b M0002 1 if the ready and run stop keys both turn ON set b M0003 the running lamp is lit and the system starts operating else if not rst b M0003 the running lamp is extinguished and the system is stopped 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 4 2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions 1 Operation The op
96. fags x x BA a a i i a B 2 B 2 B B i a a aago SuPPOr s the monitoring of QCPU Supports monitoring of QCPU on monitor A956WGOT Px x x fx fd fx fd x AES AEI Supports multi PLC system and Q00J Q00 Q01CPU as the monitor x x x x x x xIxIxIx x xIxIxK x x xI x EAP argets of the QCPU App 21 App 21 RARA lt lt lelelelele gt Bet lt lt lt ele elelele eleje elejelelejelelele APPENDICES MELSOFT GOT Uni neon Added w Toro Function ESEA AASA Ae Ladder Addition of the factor monitor search touch search function to Sox lt Se lt I ee x Sx Sx I x lt I x I oe eI x I Se x I Se os I x ex Q ladder monitor Pe a ae ee x x x x x x x x x x x x x Po een Special Supports multi PLC system and module Q00J Q00 Q01CPU as the x x x xxix tx gt px x pxptx x x x xpx x x monitor monitor targets of the QCPU Supports the monitoring of QD75 Addition of the function which displays edits in the list mode the List editor sequence program read from the 1111x Te ax number of Base screen ea increased from 1024 to g g g g X X xX XxXxX XxXxX So multi PLC system and IQ00J Q00 Q01CPU as the monitor x x x x x x x xITxI x x xITxIx x x xI x System argets of the QCPU monitor Supports the monitoring Motion Controller CPU expect ff ff fed fff ef Ped Q172CPU Q173CPU aion monitor parameter setting of the x x XxXxX xXIXIXIXI X
97. function and various object functions numerical display lamp indication and others of the GOT The GOT special registers GS have the following types of script function related items Stores the information which indicates error occurrence GS14 00 Turns ON at error occurrence GS14 07 Turns ON at BCD error occurrence GS14 08 Turns ON at zero division error occurrence GS14 12 Turns ON at communication error occurrence including access to out of range device Stores the pointer value 16 to 46 which indicates the address where the script error data GS16 to 47 is stored Default 1 Every time error data is stored the pointer value changes as indicated below 4 gt 16 gt 1g gt 20 gt gt 46 16 Script common information read only Script error pointer The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data GS16 to 47 as indicated below Example 1 When GS15 is 16 error data is stored into GS16 17 Example 2 When GS15 is 46 error data is stored into GS46 47 Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due order starting from the higher addresses of the storage area GS16 to 47 Script error data When an error occurs a script number and error code are stored on a 2 word basis as a history Note that if 15 or more errors occur the upper addresses are overwritten in order Stores the pointer value 49 to 79 which indicates the address where a script ex
98. i iS 1 1 1 l i 1 1 1 i 1 1 1 1 i i i i ji 1 i ji iF i iF 1 i l 1 1 1 1 i i 1 1 T l f i f ji iF l I f l i iF 1 l i i i ji i i i 2 Choose display item from Topics Found whether you want none one or both of them to blink and also the blinking i l i i 1 i 1 1 i i i l l 1 1 1 i 1 i l iF i i 1 li I T i i 1 i 1 1 1 f i 1 i 1 Ak I I i i 1 ji i iF i 1 ii 1 1 1 i 1 i ji 1 l i ji l 1 i 1 i i 1 i i 1 i 1 i 1 l 1 i l 1 1 1 speed if you want any of them to blink v a 3 If there are multiple Numeral items in No blinking Topics Found those multiple candidates Low Specifies blinking at the interval of 1 sec appear Middle Specifies blinking at the interval of 0 5 sec High Specifies blinking at the interval of 0 2 sec Numerical Select this option if you want only the numerical value to blink Numerical and Plate Here choose Numeral in Numerical Display dialog box Topics Found A 4 Display Select this option if you want the numerical value and the plate image Click a topic then click Display behind it to blink Reverse Select this option to display the numerical value in reverse video cme 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 3 6 1 Help menu makeup The help menu is made up as described below 1 GT Designer help Upaan inaita Li
99. input is established D1 b4 Numerical input completion signal Turns ON to turn OFF the numerical input signal D101 0 100 20 m mm D6 Ot gt g Key window D2 b4 OFF gt ON B Key window il I When M1 turns ON the operation Numerical input gt J When numerical input is established D6 and D2 b4 make condition of numerical input Ais enabled Write to D101 changes Under conditions of their data develop the D101 to display the cursor and key window value into other control Use the key window to enter and establish D6 Stores the user ID 1 of the established numerical input the value D2 b4 Tums ON the numerical input signal of the system information 4 o lo o D1 b4OFF gt ON 4 D2 b4 ON gt OFF HAEA When M1 turns OFF the cursor and key window disappear After making sure that D2 b4 After developing the D101 Until the operation condition M1 to M4 of numerical input is turned OFF turn OFF D1 b4 value into other control turn enabled ON the cursor an
100. is not input to the GOT due to cable disconnection or the like the screen displayed is the same as in the power saving status of the personal computer display 4 1 6 Video window RGB screen settings The video window RGB screen operates in accordance with the monitored devices set on GT Designer The following table indicates the contents of the devices set on GT Designer 1 Contents of devices set on GT Designer mm Device used to control the operation of a video or RGB screen Common 1 Refer to 2 for device contents 0 Black to 255 White Clip Specify the height of the clipped picture Channel No Specify the channel number to be displayed in video window 1 0 to 4 Specify the size of the video window 0 100 display 1 50 display 2 25 display overlap Window 1 overlap window 1 x 1 When an RGB screen is displayed the devices other than Video RGB Common cannot be set 2 Set video windows 2 to 4 to set multiple video windows Settings are the same as those of video window 1 x3 When the display size is changed by PLC CPU the set device value will be altered When the display size is changed by touching the video window the set device value will not be altered When the size on the display is changed by the video window touch the device will not be altered 4 23 4 23 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 2 Contents of Video RGB Common device The device specified as Video RGB Common stor
101. ites Ml ak Nae Ne Sete te sat wo ince T Project 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS b When using the GOT F900 series Add Trigger Action dialog box Edit m Delete Observe cycle Base screen Add Trigger 1 ON OFF Trigger 2 Device Device d ialog box m Action Storing device Points Setting of Points 1 to 40 Device Device dialog box Multiple Device dialog box Indirect Unchecked checked FMOV BMOV m Ordinary Sampling Setting of Sampling 1 to 60 No Browse Screen Image dialog box p Trigger Action dialog box Same settings as in Device MELSOFT Setting of Device No Momentary Set Reset Alternate Word set 16bit Word set 32bit Setting of Device No Fixed Set the fixed value to be written to word device Device dialog box Set the Device No Choose the Base screen Condition operation dialog box Edit Delete __ Observe cycle r Ordinary Sampling Setting of Sampling 1 to 60 i Project tab setting 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other
102. lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Multiplies lt term gt by lt factor gt Multiplication operator Statement example lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Divides lt term gt by lt factor gt Division operator Point If lt factor gt is 0 script operation stops Statement example lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Finds a remainder derived from division of lt term gt by lt factor gt Remainder operator Point If lt factor gt is 0 script operation stops Statement example lt Term gt amp lt factor gt Function Finds the logical product AND of lt term gt and lt factor gt Bit product operator Statement example lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Finds the logical add OR of lt term gt and lt factor gt Bit addition operator Statement example lt bit gt Function Negates inverts lt bit gt Complement operator Statement example lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Finds the exclusive logical add XOR of lt term gt and lt factor gt Bit difference operator Function Shifts lt term gt to the left by lt factor gt Left shift operator Statement example lt Term gt gt gt lt factor gt Function Shifts lt term gt to the right by lt factor gt Right shift operator Substituti Statement example _ lt Device gt lt term gt pee Function Stores lt term gt into lt device gt Substitution operator Relational Bit device
103. making the security level of a destination screen higher than that of the current screen you can restrict the display of the destination screen Security level of destination screen 6 Touch Key dialog box Security level 5 Security level 5 Security level 5 Security level 5 Security level 6 E I M Desti ati Line No 1 estinati n CE A 1254 A1254 Engi screen security caa E QO B 348 Bl 348 tS levelg6 aay sagpE bbo Bd oda Touch the touch key Since the security level of the destination screen is The security level is changed The base screen is base switching to higher than that of the current screen the password to a level higher than that of changed switch the base screen screen for changing the security level is displayed the destination screen After pressing the Cancel key press the return to the previous screen Setting Portion Settings key to Destination screen securit a ae Screen auxiliary setting dialog box Security 6 5 119 5 119 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The security function consists of the following setting items e Security dialog box Set whether the security level is valid or invalid and the password for converting the security leve
104. monitor function MELSEC Q ladder monitor function MELSEC A list editor function Gateway function and Servo amplifier monitor function are handled as two extended functions OSs respectively 2 The above user area spaces assume that there are no additional memory boards Therefore increase the memory as required Since the A95 GOT BD M3 has the built in memory of 3200k bytes the free space is the above value plus 2048k bytes App 17 App 17 APPENDICES MELSOFT Appendix7 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR The following table indicates the colors and color numbers available when colors are XORed in the drawing mode using the parts display function or like 1 GOT having 256 display colors When XORing any colors other than the following check them in the preview of GT Designer Black Blue Purple Green Cyan Yellow White ao i w r n 0 3 224 227 28 31 252 255 ae p 2 162 Dark oa pe a ny Purple pin Cyan a ie ge ja ce pa 227 31 162 pe ee Purple Red Cyan pes White wee 227 224 31 255 Red Purple pu p ni White mo a 224 227 255 Purple Purple Blue oy White pon oe 227 D 3 255 31 225 F s Cyan Yellow pia Black Blue Purple 31 252 0 3 i 227 om j p Blue Purple 255 3 0 227 he ae White Green om ia tees a ps 255 28 j pi TE White White pa Cyan p ame Blue 255 31 B gap a Dark Dark black black 109 109 HE RBH Dark on
105. number in 0 fames 21 o code A 1 ferometer Prt Pr 1 Pr000 C to Pr993 0 Word device 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT CHAPTERS OBJECT FUNCTIONS 1 About object item settings Each object item has settings to be made to achieve function outline examples The settings given are specifically only the items where the default values of that object must be changed Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Graph Sample lt Device Attribute gt X axis Device D100 Basic gt tab i Display mode Locus Y axis Device D200 2 About setting item list The items marked in the setting item list of each object item are registered to the keyword function of the help By entering a keyword to make a search you can directly display the explanation of the corresponding portion Device Device dialog box Set the DeviceNo Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real Data length 16bit 32bit Unchecked checked Data type Basics tab Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Designation of Background 0 to 255 1 Enter keyword Designation of Color 0 to 255 AZ Help Topics Drawing software help 7 i Explanation of Numeral item in setting item list appears Contents Index Fid Type the first few letters of the wordYou re looking for 1 Numeral amp Drawing softw
106. of the Digital package is converted some functions are not converted Re set the unconverted functions using the GT Designer Also use the GT Designer for registration to the overlap screen parts and comments App 3 App 3 APPENDICES MELSOFT 4 Starting the GT Designer Start the GT Designer from the GT Converter a Select the Project Option Folder of GT Designer menu b The Setting folder of GT Designer dialog box appears Since the execution file wgot32 exe of the GT Designer exists in the following folder select it and click the Open button Drive name Installation destination folder GT desig wgot32 exe Switches the Look in indication to the folder one position above the current one EE Lists the Look in indication in terms of the folder names and data names only Lists further details of the Look in indication c Perform either of the following operations Click the on the tool bar e Select the Project Execute GT Designer menu d The Execute GT Designer confirmation dialog box appears Click the Yes or No button Yes button Ends the GT Converter and starts the GT Designer No button Ends the GT Converter The GT Designer does not start App 4 App 4 APPENDICES MELSOFT Appendix2 Display Speed of Object Reference Value The display speeds reference values of each object are as listed below The actual display sp
107. of the GOT appears This can be displayed in the form of time date Section 5 1 4 Comment display Function that displays comments in relation to the bit device ON OFF and the designated range of the word device Comment can be displayed in multiple lines for the display area Section 5 2 1 Alarm history display Function that displays the time and the comment of ON status and being in the designated range in relation to the comment of the ON status of the designated bit device and the designated range of the word device Section 5 2 2 Alarm list display sys tem alarm Function that displays a warning for error on PLC CPU data link network and GOT Section 5 2 3 Alarm list display user alarm Function that displays comment of the ON bit device in the order of priority in relation to the comments of multiple bit devices Section 5 2 3 Part display Function that displays the specified part screen or the part screen associated with the ON OFF of the bit device or the value of the word device The function to display a part on the base screen is available for the GOT A900 only It can also displays the figure in BMP DXF file format as a part Section 5 3 1 Part movement display Function that displays the movement locus of the part figure associated with the bit device ON OFF word device value or specified device status ON OFF device value in the specified movement method
108. printer or saves it onto a PC card 1 Function outline a Prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a printer according to ON OFF of a bit device Start trigger occurs Hardcopy dialog box Start trigger X10 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT e When the specified bit device is turned ON to trigger a hardcopy start hold the specified bit device ON for longer than the preset monitor time e When the touch key function is used to turn ON the hardcopy starting trigger set the operation type to Bit SET or Bit ALT If you set it to Bit momentary the hardcopy function is not performed b Saves the current monitor screen of the GOT onto a PC card in BMP JPEG format Instead of a bit device a touch key extended may also be used to determine the save timing Both the PC card saving and touch key extended functions may be used only when the GOT A900 series is used Saved as BMP JPEG file PC card Touch the touch key extended 1 Hardcopy dialog box Target PC card PCMCIA 1 Set the operation setting of the touch key to the extended hardcopy function 2 Setting items The hardcopy function consists of the following setting items e Hardcopy dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series
109. sound files to play sounds as error warning messages and touch sounds provided when touch keys are touched 1 Function outline a When playing a sound file with the observe status function Condition When the bit device X1 turns ON a sound file is played Specified bit device X1 turns ON X1 ae LEIS OFF v ON a rn oof ee Operation stops When X1 turns ON GOT recognizes that condition was enabled and plays specified sound file Setting Portion Settings Sound File List dialog box Click the button to register the WAV format file as a sound file Trigger Action Tri 1 ON lt Trigger gt tab 999r Device X1 lt Action gt tab Action Sound To play a WAV format sound file when a touch key is touched turn on the Change touch key sound check box in the Project Auxiliary Setting dialog box to make setting 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The sound function consists of the following setting items e Sound File List dialog box OEdit O Sound File dialog box ONo File name Browse Set the WAV format sound file ODelete 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function Creating Sound Files from Contents of Help e For restrictions on the sound function
110. switching switching device is initialized or not at BS SPAS ZE RAE EA A E A S E hes power on of GOT App 26 App 26 APPENDICES MELSOFT Swi SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 O2iect Function Description of Function Added ATBICIEIEIHIVIAICIAICIAIFEIAIDIFIVIKIPIRIU bec The maximum number of overlaps screens has been changed from five to no ef eloo restriction Addition of the function which further calls the screen which uses the screen calling function FE R SA ZES EES a ZS hierarchical called screens Overlap Addition of window screens as screen the screens to be called and the screens which can use the aee Reed kaa cael eaaa Veal eaa fics screen calling function Addition of the screen which BG allows overlap screen numbers x x xtx xirx gt pxK xix xpxlx x x x x x ae Meee eae kees Addition of the screen which displays overlap screens KLKIX KTK K X X pppppppgppnng hierarchically overlapped and the function which Addition of the function which sets the starting number a a k Si espe ec Addition of the function which can display window screens as parts x x eee Sie eS 75 SI S eS Addition of Rise Fall ON wor i eee eee triggers to the display conditions Addition of the function which can fix displayed parts parts can be xTx x x xTx x can display the base screen as a part Addition of the function which Pan dspley Seteme prevew number O 910 0 0 o o o o olo oeleleleleleleleleje Addition of
111. the following types e Numerical input function Writes any value to a device e ASCII input function cee Writes any key code to word devices 5 6 1 Numerical input function writes any value to device GOT A900 series Hem GOT F900 series CO This function writes any value to the specified word device 1 Function outline a Writes any value to a word device D100 mi D100 100 1000 s y Key window Key window Touch an input area to Numerical input gt J Move the cursor to the display the input key next input area window Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device D100 b You can change the display color and attributes when entering a given value to the monitor device Only when the GOT A900 series is used Temperature target value Temperature target value Temperature target value Temperature target value 58 a 58 Zo 125 Key window g Monitor device D0 Setting Portion aa Setting Portion Settings Basiestab Device DO eases Case1 Defined case W lt 0 Numeral 255 S Z Shape checked Case2 Defined case 100 lt W Numeral 0 Plate 255 c You can set the input cursor display order as you like when there are multiple
112. the function which feats tne obpatsze a xh b e e taalaa a Addition of the function which can change display attributes Eccoraind D the specified device PII P S SET RY XM TTX status ON OFF device value Addition of the function which can Part A change display attributes Pera according to the specified device XIXI XIX XXX X X x x x x xX x xP x x O O O O status ON OFF device value Addition of the function which ommon Leere he staring number X xx h alaala function Addition of the function which changes the display starting line x x x x x x x x x x x x x xI x Jx x x for multi line comment Addition of the function which Bar graph sets the display position of a xixixixi xix x xx scale Addition of the function which gathers data stored in word Scatter graph devices associated with the X xixixixi xixixixixixixiOIoOlololololololololo and Y axes and displays them as a scatter graph Addition of the function which performs operation such as device write at the specified time of the day of the week Addition of the function which x Time action collects data in the specified cycle or under the bit condition and displays them in a graph or the like Sampling function App 27 App 27 x XxX X x XxX Xx XXX function Word device 16 bits 1024 points Word device 32 bits 512 points Increase of the maximum monitor points that can be observed Bit device Al
113. the user can be used as lamps A character string can be displayed on the top center bottom right or left of the lamp 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Basic figures provided by GT Designer can be used as lamps A character string can be displayed in the center of the lamp 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 3 4 Panelmeter display function shows a meter according to a word device value GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function shows a meter at the ratio of a word device value to the upper and lower limits 1 Function outline a Shows a meter at the ratio of a word device D100 value to the upper limit 300 and lower limit 0 o Ses ieee Al LL Settings Device D100 Text Meter 1 Type Top1 2 Upper Fixed 300 Lower Fixed 0 Scale value display V_x_H 1 Upper 300 Lower 0 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 series 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset and expression can be set A character string can be displayed on the top center bottom right or left of the panel meter e Scale and scale values can be set above the arc of the panel meter 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Scale can be set above the arc of the panel meter b Changes the needle color when the monitor device value reaches a given value Only when the GOT A900 s
114. this manual the above products are abbreviated to the following SW5D5C GTWORKS CE 10 cceeceeeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeseeseeesneeseees GT Works Version5 SW5D5C GOTR PACKE SW5D5C GOTR PACKEV This manual describes only the basic operation methods specifications and functions goon Oasis oa GT Designer Version5 Refer to the help of the corresponding software package for information on setting details and operation methods e g figure drawing for monitor screen creation object function setting operation data transfer to the GOT Refer to Chapter 5 for how to use help 1 OVERVIEW MEMO MELSOFT 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSOFT CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen 2 1 1 System configuration Vl 0 Ye GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 IBM PC AT or 100 compatible 2 1 2 Operation environment Description Pentium 133MHz or higher Pentium II 266MHz or higher recommended Personal computer on which Microsoft Windows 95 operating system Microsoft Windows 98 operating system Microsoft WindowsNT Workstation 4 0 operating system operates Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System or Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System CD ROM drive is mandatory 32 Mbyte 64 Mbyte or more is recommended At the time of complete installation Hard disk space When installed 80M bytes or more When operat
115. type PC card recognized by Windows 95 or Windows 98 config sys must be added to the description For details enter SRAM and keyword in Help of Windows 95 or Windows 98 and refer to the contents b Using the self diagnostics memory card check of the utility menu This method is valid for the SRAM type PC card only This method is fewer in the number of object files that may be saved than the method using the personal computer For details of the utility menu refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Compatible Extended Option Functions 3 About the number of files that may be saved There are the following upper limits to the number of object files that may be saved according to the memory capacity of the PC card Number of Files Memory Capacity of PC otal of recipe alarm history and 512 bytes tie 512 bytes file 7 Max Lages Max 4075 files 512 bytes file Max 2041 files A nL 2048 bytes file 3 fil 16M A9GTMEM 10MF 4096 bytes fie Max 9740 files 32M A9GTMEM 20MF Max 512 files 2048 bytes file 1 Indicates the maximum number of files that can be stored when the file size is as indicated in the parentheses For example when data of 3072 bytes is written to the above 4M PC card the data occupies two files and are stored there since the data exceeds the parenthesized value 2048 As a result the remaining number of files where da
116. variable Note that a correct value may not be read in either of the following cases e A value is read is read in the script whose data format is different from that of the script used to write the value to the temporary work Example Script A data format 16 bit unsigned w TMP0000 0x1234 Script B data format 32 bit unsigned w GD0000 w TMP0000 A value is read is read in the script whose representation word device bit device is different from that of the script used to write the value to the temporary work Example Script C data format 16 bit unsigned w TMP0000 0x3 if b TMP0000 b0 ON When writing and reading a value to and from one temporary work use the same data format and representation 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 How to represent bit devices system define Bit devices can be represented as indicated below a When performing relational operation of bit device A device value which is normally represented 1 or 0 may also be represented ON or OFF if b X100 1 w DO 100 llif X100 is ON DO is 100 if b X100 ON w D0 100 lif X100 is ON DO is 100 b When performing substitution processing of bit device A bit device which is normally represented with a set or rst statement or by substituting 1 or 0 may also be represented by substituting ON or OFF set b X100 X100 turns ON b X100 1 X100 turns ON b
117. which displays the brightness adjustment screen of the GOT _ Addition of the function which changes the comment of the reference destination according to the result of adding the specified device up to 2 points and fixed values in the function which uses on the character string display the character string created with the comment function setting Addition of the function which XORs reverses and paints the x x K x x x x inside of a no figure touch key Addition of the touch key extended function which shows the list editing screen of the so el Pecado a Baa ACPU Lx x x x x x x Addition of the function which specifies offset for the operation PEREPERE target device Addition of the function which allows touch keys to be set as o o o o 0 o ofofofofofofofofe free figures Addition of the function which can set quality characters for ON OFF and midway point in Mel P LI PTS ea AS IP APSA OSs es double pressing The basic conversion figures Bdfd ode PPP from GOT800 are added as the p p p xixixi x xixix xix xixix x x x basic figures of group 2 Addition of the function that can cerca TE switching destination according x x x x xIx x x x xIx x x x x x x x x to the screen type base overlap window 1 2 superimpose Addition of the function that keeps outputting the buzzer while the touch key is pressed at x x x x x xI x x xIxI x x x x xIx xIxIx x the output timing of the t
118. x x x x x Connection with Motion controller CPU Cee E EL ble Computer link connection Transmission speed change 19200bps 38400bps supported for connection of QC24N ol Ev EN SSE vv SED ET ESE App 22 App 22 APPENDICES MELSOFT SE SSP TTS STEP CC Link connection Q compatible intelligent device station xlxIlxlxlxixlxlx lx supported Supports CC Link master local connection via x x x x x x x x x x x x G4 S3 Supports connection with the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU With the EEEE exception of connection with the intelligent device station Omron PLC connection cairns ah E aa ele ee e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e e CQM1 C1000H C2000H CV1000 supported eeue ne spored 1X1 xx xx x x x x 0 o 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 CPU01 11 21 supported Connection with CS1 suppored eoero Supports connection with C200H a PPT TPT XTX XX ee ee Fo EC EEE E EE Ed PASE Yaskawa Electric PLC connection supgoted n o COSO oaoa teflt supported Connection with CP 9200SH supported with CP 9200SH Ee snnettion ities AORSH Kipo xP x Px x Tx Tx x Ermm T S TTo supported Connection with CP 9200 H or PROGIC 8 A ses a ere supported e ieie siess sssis ssie asiels 9300MC compatible Barcode connection Barcode connection Allen Her Bredley PLC connection eee PLC connection e s sisisisisisisisisisisiei
119. x 480 dots SE Not displayed correctly Refer to Section 4 1 6 for the way to select the video window resolution 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 6 Clip mode In the clip mode the specified part clip area of the picture taken with a video camera is displayed on the GOT in full size The display area of the video window can be decreased without the displayed picture being reduced In the clip mode you can use only video window 1 and cannot use video windows 2 to 4 Video picture Specified video picture part appears as is a Clip area selection As aclip area specify the coordinates at top left of the part you want to display from the video picture and set the height 64 to 720 dots and width 64 to 480 dots Set coordinates at top left of part to be displayed in clip mode p Set width Set height Video picture e In the clip mode video windows 2 to 4 are closed and cannot be opened e In the clip mode the displayed video window will not operate if touched e When video windows 2 to 4 are open changing the full mode to the clip mode forces them to be closed e When the clip mode is returned to the full mode video windows 2 to 4 are displayed in accordance with the specified channel numbers coordinates and sizes valid at that point 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 7 Freeze frame picture The video picture displayed in the full or clip
120. z Check 16bit Numeral item hers Frame OK Cancel lt lt Basics Plate a Numeral 1 Enter keyword Help Topics Drawing software help Contents Index Find Explanation of Numeral item in setting item 1_Type the first few letters of the word youtgd oking for list appears Numeral amp Drawing software help 5 2 Click the index entry you want and then click Display File Edit Bookmark Options Help Contents Index lt meral Numeric Value Input Read Complete Sianal Svstem Siana Numerical Display dialog box Numeric Value Inout SianalfSstem Sianal 2 Areal Basic Fom Case Option Trigger Expression Numerical display Numerical display Precaution Numeral Numerical Display dialoa box Select from the list box the color you wish to use for displaying numerical Numerical Input values Numerical input Precaution Plate Numerical Inout dialoa box Numerical Print dialog box Numerical term if you selected the Shape option select from the list box the color for the plate image behind the numerical display NumericalPrint obiect oe Obiect Obiect function falarm historv disnlav Alarm history display Obiect function fanimation digolav x Display Cancel Frame Numeral Blink Regarding the numerical display and the plate image behind it specify iF ti i i iF l j t 1 l f 1 1
121. 0 c Changes the entire on screen comment display according to ON OFF of the bit device X0 Example Changing between Japanese and English DLS fax Product ion Actual I l Linet 50 Line2 150 Setting Portion Settings Device X0 Set the same device to all objects Direct Enter comment data in Japanese euaso Bi gt teb OFF time setting Direct Enter comment data in English 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The comment display function consists of the following setting items e Comment Display dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series Device T O Device dialog box Basic tab Data type Bit Word BIN16 Word BCD16 O Shape Unchecked checked lL mage List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 O Size Specify height x width size Blink Text Text and Plate Alignment Left Right Center ON Off ONo Direct Unchecked checked Comment List dialog box Setting of display comment Copy from ON OFF only O Attribute ON Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 Attribute OFF Change attribute t Unchecked checked O Style Regular Bold Solid Raised OText Designation of Color O Solid Designation of Solid of chara
122. 00 to SW511 16 bits ial regi W 4 its Special register SW SW000 to SW510 32 bits 32 bits Data register RW RW0000 to RW4095 x2 x4 RW0000 to RW4094 32 bits Data register D D0000 to D4095 x2 x4 D0000 to D4094 32 bits Word device 32 bits 32 bits 16 bits 32 bits 32 bits 16 bits 32 bits Data register R 3 R00000 to R4095F R00000 to R65535 Specified bit of the following word devices Except data register R SW000 to SW511 SD000 to SD255 integer SF000 to SF255 real number RW0000 to RW4095 RD0000 to RD2047 integer RF0000 to RF2047 real number D0000 to D4095 DD0000 to DD2047 integer DF0000 to DF2047 real number Converting the above bit devices into words GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 fe tS GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 SS ee 1 Specify the word device bit after the GOT has read it once Note that if you make a change in the sequence program before that the specifying destination will be changed x 2 RWO0000 and D0000 differ in representation but indicate the data registers in the same region 3 Use the following method to convert the device address into the one represented by the GOT for bit data Toshiba address representation 16 word address quotient bit address remainder Toshiba side address representation GOT side address representation 8191 SSUF 8191 16 511 15 Decimal Hexadecimal cas R65535 P4099 F 65535 16 4
123. 001 one Production date LISTED 80M1 IND CONT taD MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION MADE IN JAPAN BD992C091H01 cannot be used with the GOT whose function version is not given here The products of function version A have been applied since Oct 2000 Rating Plate x4 The flash PC card A9GTMEM 10MF 20MF 40MF can be used only when the following conditions are satisfied Usable GOTs Hardware version ROM BIOS version A985GOT TBA A985GOT TBD A975GOT TBA B A975GOT TBD B Version A or later A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A975GOT TBA A975GOT TBD A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD A960GOT EBA A960GOT EBD Version F or later Version E or later x5 Cannot be used with the memory card interface unit 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSOFT 2 About PC card formatting Use the PC card after formatting It may be formatted in either of the following ways a Using the personal computer SRAM type flash PC card Format the PC card on the personal computer that satisfies the following conditions 1 The PCMCIA card slot is provided 2 Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows Me or Windows 2000 has been installed Note that Windows NT 4 0 cannot format the PC card POINT e The PC card used with the GOT should be formatted in either of the following systems e SRAM type PC card FAT16 e Flash PC card FAT16 FAT32 e To make the SRAM
124. 0254 Explains the specifications system configuration setting methods and others of the gateway 13JU29 functions that can be performed on the GOT A900 series Available as option GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual SH 080156 Describes the system configuration screen makeup and usage of GT SoftGOT 13JU12 Available as option F920GOT BBD5 K E with keypad Installation Manual Explains the specifications part names and installation and power supply wiring methods of the JY997D02201 F920GOT K E Packed with the F920GOT with keypad F930GOT Installation Manual Explains the specifications part names and installation and power supply wiring methods of the JY992D95701 F930GOT Packed with the F930GOT F930GOT BBD K E with keypad Installation Manual Explains the specifications part names and installation and power supply wiring methods of the JY997D02501 F930GOT K E Packed with the F930GOT with keypad F940GOT Installation Manual Explains the specifications part names and installation and power supply wiring methods of the JY992D94201 F940GOT Packed with the F940GOT F940WGOT Installation Manual Explains the specifications part names and installation and power supply wiring methods of the JY992D93901 F940WGOT Packed with the F940WGOT F940 Handy GOT Hardware Manual Explains the specifications system configuration part names and installation method of the handy GOT Packed with the F940 handy GOT F940GOT Handy
125. 048 R10001 to R12048 R20001 to R22048 SR1 to SR2048 4 SR10001 to SR12048 4 SR20001 to SR22048 4 K1 to K4096 3 GOT data register GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 Change the input register 30001 to 30512 to Z1 to Z512 Example of setting in default 2 Change the input register 40001 to 49999 to W1 to W9999 Example of setting in default 3 Change the constant register 31001 to 35096 to K1 to K4096 Example of setting in default 3 SR and SW are data format ready registers imaginary registers that display the internal data of the PLC using R and W The following are differences between SR SW and R W display values according to the internal data values of the PLC PLC internal data for 16 bits SR SW 9999 9999 9999 Bit device Link register Word device 9999 9999 42767 b When using CP 9200SH MP 920 MP 930 MP 940 Device name Available range for monitoring MBO to MB4095F MB40960 to MB8191F 1 1 MB245760 to MB28671F1 1 MB286720 to MB32767F1 1 Input relay IB0000 to IBFFFF GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383 Bit device 3 3 Holding register MWO to MW32767 E GOT special register GS 1 Usable by only MP 940 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT c When using CP 9300MS CP 9300MC incompatible Available range for monitoring MBO to MB3071F Input relay IBO000 to IBSFF Word device Bit device d When using CP 9300MS CP 9300MC compatibl
126. 095 15 Decimal Hexadecimal 7 a D65535 D4095 b15 See eae 16 4095 1 Word device bit Decimal Decimal 65999 10 4095 19 4 Use the following method to convert the device address into the one represented by the GOT for word data Data format Toshiba side address representation GOT side address representation 16 bit data DW10 D20 Integer DD10 32 bit dat meo mo Calculate device No in increments of 32 bits bit data D20 Real number DF10 on Calculate device No in increments of 32 bits 4 61 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 11 SIEMENS PLC connection a SIMATIC S7 300 series Available range for monitoring Input relay 10000 to 11277 Output relay Q0000 to Q1277 M0000 to M2557 GOT bit register GB64 to GB16383 Input relay IW000 to IW126 Output relay QW000 to QW126 Bit memory MW000 to MW254 Timer present value Counter present value C00 to C63 D000100000 to D000108190 D000200000 to D000208190 D000300000 to D000308190 Q 2 gt kej a Word device Data register D012600000 to D012608190 D012700000 to D012708190 GOT data register GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 b SIMATIC S7 400 series Available range for monitoring Input relay 10000 to 15117 Output relay Q0000 to Q5117 M00000 to M20477 mooom Cd QW000 to QW510 Bit device Counter present value C000 to C511 D000100000 to D000165534 D000200000 to D000265534
127. 1 Counter contact C 2 4 GOT bit register GB GB64 to GB16383 Input relay WX 2 WR000 to WR886 WL000 to WL639 Special relay WR WR900 to WR910 Ti imer counter elapsed EV0000 to EV3071 value EV x4 Timer counter set value SV 4 Data register DT Link register LD 5 File register FL 5 GOT data register GD GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 Word device 1 Device ranges for use of the FP10SH When the FPO FP1 FP2 FP3 FP5 FP10 S or FP M is used the device ranges vary with the CPU x 2 Write to device cannot be performed 3 Only the devices assigned to the I O contacts using the peripheral software are usable 4 The number of timer and counter devices varies with the first number of the counters set with the system register No 5 value 5 There are no corresponding devices on the FP0 FP1 FP M 14 Microcomputer connection Available range for monitoring GOT bit register GB GB64 to GB16383 1 Data register D DO to D2047 Specified bit of word device Data register D DO to D2047 GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 1 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 Write and read operations for GB and GD devices cannot be performed from the host Q Q gt Ss a Word device 4 64 4 64 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 5 3 Device ranges available for the GOT F900 series The devices available for each object function of the GOT F900 series depen
128. 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 4 111 1 1 0 0 0 0 M 0 0 0 0 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 Logical addition OR The result is 0 only when both bit numbers are 0 If not the result is 1 Monitor device value Preset mask value set in hexadecimal Operation result 0 1 1 0 0 O 0 O 1114 4 1101154 0 1 0 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 1 o 0 0 0 x oaa aaoo aa aao Exclusive logical addition XOR The result is 0 when the bit numbers are the same If not the result is 1 Monitor device value Preset mask value set in hexadecimal Operation result b Shift operation The monitor device value is shifted in the specified direction to right or left by the preset bit count 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 1 1 14 1 O O O O 111114 v 0 1 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 1 0 1 4 0 1 0 Shifted 4 bits to the right Monitor device value 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 0 0 0 0 v Operation result 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 0 0 1 1 1 0 1 0 Shifted 4 bits to the left Monitor device value 0 0 0 0 110 110 11111 4 o 44 4 v Operation result 11011 0l411111l011 1 1 0 0 0 0 5 126 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT c Operation by formula This function carries out the arithmetic operation of the monitor device value using the specified expression and displays the object accor
129. 2000 points For batch display the above number of points is the total of the number of batch displayed points the number of collection times e Max cumulative count point device data format 9999 16 bit BCD value 65535 other than above Shape Frame Graph frame Plate Display mode Graph display form type size color Boundary Level Pattern Backgroud Graph Pattern e Display trigger Key Bit Word e Action Key code Bit Word Extended Base Window Station No Buzzer Format type Format digits Decimal 111013 Hexadecimal 1 to 8 Octal 1to6 Binary 11 to 32 1 to 32 Shape Frame Switch Pattern Backgroud Style Color Solid V X H Text High quality font Shape Frame Plate Numeral Blink Reverse CS e a a 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT Specifications Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices __ functions Max S i Function i memor unctio seting Used memory Space Display attributes i ION Others points per bytes screen f Range Bit device ix oO DI D A a 2 i 5 i Q 2 O o Ww o 2 a Q Zz O 2 5 Q Ordinary Sampling gc fe 5 w E D n o p D n ra O Station number changing 64 36 X set number of conditions 16 X 512 number of indirect Screen device and bit ALT device 512 points in all conditions Project 16 Xx total of write in device points in all common conditio
130. 25 D102 150 300 D103 300 gt 350 400 300 m 200 100 e al 0 Y axis devices 0 100 200 300 D200 D201 D202 100 300 200 340 250 50 Display switching device Point figures are changed 300 100 D300 1 gt 2 according to display switching device value Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Graph Basic gt tab Mode Case1 Defined case 2 V Type I Color 224 D203 Display trigger Device D300 Points 4 lt Case Word gt tab X axis Device D100 Y axis Device D200 2 Scale display Scale point 5 5 Scale value display Size 5 X 5 Upper 400 Xx 400 Lower 0 XxX 0 lt Case gt tab 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items MELSOFT The scattered chart display function consists of the following setting items e Scatter Chart dialog box Sample Batch Unchecked checked Basic tab Image List dialog box arai Choose the Shape Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Graph Frame Unchecked checked Designation of Background 0 to 255 Replace Locus Set the Device No Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real O Display switching Fixed Device O Device Device O Device dialog box Data type Bit Word BIN16 Word BC
131. 2SU A9G T BUS2SU A9GT BUS2SU A7GT BUSS and A7GT Communica Data link unit Generic term of A7GT J71AP23 A7GT J71AR23 and A7GT J71AT23B tion unit Network unit Generic term of A7GT J71LP23 and A7GT J71BR13 CC Link communication unit Generic term of A8GT J61BT13 and A8GT J61BT15 Abbreviation of AIGT 80PSC AIGT 70PSC AIGT 60PSC and A9GT 50PSC type Option AQGT SOLT type backlights Memory board board Abbreviation of A9GT FNB A9GT FNB1M A9GT FNB2M A9GT FNB4M A9GT FNB8M Memory board AQGT QFNB AQGT QFNB4M A9GT QFNB8M type option function memory board External External O unt unit Abbreviation of A9GT 70KBF and A8GT 50KBF type external I O interface unit eee interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT 50PRF type printer interface unit Abbreviation of A1SD59J MIF memory card interface unit Option unit Abbreviation of A9GT 80V4 type Video input interface unit RGB input interface unit RGB input interface unit interface unit Abbreviation of A9GT 80R1 type RGB input interface unit Poe oes input Abbreviation of A9GT 80V4R1 type Video RGB mixed input interface unit GT Works Version5 Works Version 5 Abbreviation of SW5D5C GTWORKS E software package eneric term of SW5D5C GOTR PACKE software package and SW5D5C GOTR PACKEV Software GT Designer Version 5 software backade GT Designers GT Designers Abbreviation of image creation software GT Designer for GOT900 GT Simulator Abbreviation of GT Simulator scree
132. 602 e mail office meltrade hu CH 8309 Niirensdorf Phone 41 0 1 838 48 11 Fax 41 0 1 838 48 12 e mail info econotec ch GTS Dar laceze Cad No 43 KAT 2 TR 80270 Okmeydani Istanbul Phone 90 0 212 320 1640 Fax 90 0 212 320 1649 e mail gts turk net CSC Automation Ltd UKRAINE 15 M Raskova St Fl 10 Office 1010 UA 02002 Kiev Phone 380 0 44 238 83 16 Fax 380 0 44 238 83 17 e mail csc a csc a kiev ua TURKEY AFRICAN REPRESENTATIVE CBI Ltd Private Bag 2016 ZA 1600 Isando Phone 27 0 11 928 2000 Fax 27 0 11 392 2354 e mail cbi cbi co za SOUTH AFRICA MIDDLE EAST REPRESENTATIVE TEXEL Electronics LTD Box 6272 IL 42160 Netanya Phone 972 0 9 863 08 91 Fax 972 0 9 885 24 30 e mail texel_ me netvision net il ISRAEL EURASIAN REPRESENTATIVE AVTOMATIKA SEVER Krapivnij Per 5 Of 402 RU 194044 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 1183 238 Fax 7 812 3039 648 e mail pav avtsev spb ru CONSYS Promyshlennaya St 42 RU 198099 St Petersburg Phone 7 812 325 36 53 Fax 7 812 325 36 53 e mail consys consys spb ru ELEKTROSTYLE UI Garschina 11 RU 140070 Moscowskaja Oblast Phone 7 095 261 3808 Fax 7 095 261 3808 e mail ICOS RUSSIA Industrial Computer Systems Zao Ryazanskij Prospekt 8a Office 100 RU 109428 Moscow Phone 7 095 232 0207 Fax 7 095 232 0327 e mai
133. 68 56 85 e mail factory automation fra mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC UK EUROPE B V Travellers Lane GB Hatfield Herts AL10 8 XB Phone 44 0 1707 27 61 00 Fax 44 0 1707 27 86 95 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Via Paracelso 12 l 20041 Agrate Brianza MI Phone 39 039 6053 1 Fax 39 039 6053 312 e mail factory automation it mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC SPAIN EUROPE B V Carretera de Rub 76 80 E 08190 Sant Cugat del Vall s Phone 34 9 3 565 3131 Fax 34 9 3 589 2948 e mail industrial sp mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION Office Tower Z 14 F 8 12 1 chome Harumi Chuo Ku Tokyo 104 6212 Phone 81 3 6221 6060 Fax 81 3 6221 6075 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC USA AUTOMATION 500 Corporate Woods Parkway Vernon Hills IL 60061 Phone 1 847 478 21 00 Fax 1 847 478 22 83 EUROPE ITALY JAPAN GEVA Wiener Stra e 89 A 2500 Baden Phone 43 0 2252 85 55 20 Fax 43 0 2252 488 60 e mail office geva at AUSTRIA TEHNIKON Oktjabrskaya 16 5 Ap 704 BY 220030 Minsk Phone 375 0 17 22 75 704 Fax 375 0 17 22 76 669 e mail tehnikon belsonet net BELGIUM BELARUS Getronics b v Control Systems Pontbeeklaan 43 B 1731 Asse Zellik Phone 32 0 2 467 17 51 Fax 32 0 2 467 17 45 e mail infoautomation getronics com TELECON CO BULGARIA 4 A Ljapchev Blvd BG 1756 Sofia Phone 359 0 2 97 44 05 8
134. 7 Display on GOT Displayed in reduced 8 colors when the GOT used is compatible with 8 color display All colors other than black are displayed in the same color orange white when the GOT used has a monochrome display Painting 3 22 Be BM FPREMnEnanank pattern Pd Es dee nE 256 colors Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is compatible with 256 color display noA Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is Painting color painting background compatible with 16 color display Display on GOT Displayed in reduced 8 colors when the GOT used is compatible with 8 color display All colors other than black are displayed in the same color orange white when the GOT used has a monochrome display e Colors that can be displayed on each GOT When the GOT used can display 16 or less colors the following colors can be Displayed GOT Display Colors Displayable Colors The GOT display can be confirmed on the preview screen of GT Designer For the preview screen refer to the help function of GT Designer 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 2 When the GOT F900 series is used Attribute Example of drawing X Full line Broken line Dotted line 5 Line style Alternate long and short dash line Alternate long and two short dash line Line width 256 colors F940WGOT TWD E Color liquid crystal Displayed in reduced 256 colors F940GOT S
135. 900 series is used Specifications Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices _ functions Max Function settin Used memory space i 9 ysp Display attributes O Others points per bytes f i screen Display format number of display digits Shape Frame Plate Decimal i 1t032 Numeral XIX X XIXxX X x x x Hexadecimal 1 to 32 Octal 11 to 32 Binary 11 to 32 Real 11092 Shape Frame Plate Color Ordinary Sampling Range Rise Fall During ON OFF Bit Trigger ON OFF Sampling Bit device Word device Offset designation Station number xTxIT x x 1x x x OILx lt I x x x number of display digits 1 to 40 Data format x xX Tx lt x Txt x x px x 1x x1x1 x x yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy Type1 Type2 Max number of characters set Word 36 Shape Frame Size wel ae AAA sh Weil s to 1 comment Bit 44 f 512 characters independently of character size Shape Frame Plate Color Alarm history Shape Frame Plate Max number of monitor points displayi Title 12 S ies ss XIXI Bit devices 256 points Max number of monitor points Shape Frame Plate p Size XIXIXIXIX XxX Xx X X Xx Xx x Consecutive bit devices 255 points Display mode Replay Positioning Top left Center Color Frame Lamp Text Color V xX H X x Tx px x XX x1x x x x Meter type 1 4 Circle Shape Frame Plate Top Bottom Left Right Right Needle Meter panel x xIx x x xXI xXIx x1x x x
136. Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC MELSOFT Human Machine Interface Reference Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 SW5D5C GTWORKS E SW5D5C GOTR PACKE V sta MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC INDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION e SAFETY PRECAUTIONS e Always read these instructions before using this equipment Before using this product please read this manual and the relevant manuals introduced in this manual carefully and pay full attention to safety to handle the product correctly The instructions given in this manual are concerned with this product For the safety instructions of the programmable controller system please read the CPU module user s manual In this manual the safety instructions are ranked as DANGER and CAUTION 7 N 1 N l Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions l l gt DANGER resulting in death or severe injury l l A CAUTION Indicates that incorrect handling may cause hazardous conditions K resulting in medium or slight personal injury or physical damage 4 Note that the CAUTION level may lead to a serious consequence according to the circumstances Always follow the instructions of both levels because they are important to personal safety Please save this manual to make it accessible when required and always forward it to the end user Test Operation Instructions lt gt DANGER e Before performing test operation bit device on off word device s present val
137. BICIEIEIHIVIAICIAICIAIFIAIDIFIVIKIPIR U bed Addition of fill pattern and fill Circle background color setting function Addition of fill pattern and fill Rectangle background color setting function Addition of the function which xlxIxlxIlxixilxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxbxlx x displays 6 X 8 dot characters Addition of character decoration x x xlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlxlx lxlx raised setting function b Object functions added Barra meore rroo ai EEE EEE EE EER aoe Function which performs write to the PLC CPU when the specified ofofo o o ofofo e condition holds Addition of the word device value range as the observation gt p gt X X XIX X X X x x x condition Addition of the function which specifies offset for the device set y x ylxlxdxlxixilx lxlxlx for the condition for screen Observe based observation only status The maximum number of set conditions operations x p gt X X X XX xP xP x x x increased from 40 to 512 Addition of BCD to the data format of the written value for xlxIxlxlxixlxlxixlxlx x data SET operation when the condition holds Addition of the function which copies the status observation XP Xx x xP xP xxx xP xP xp xx xfO OTO O O O O1o settings Addition of the function which Line graph sets undisplayed values grap Addition of the function which xlxlxlxlxlxlxlx lx x x displays a track Addition of justification setting xe Se x x s 38 1 g ASCII input Huaetion i
138. Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window screens to be switched e By setting this function to window screens window screens can be switched Base screen No 1 Base screen No 1 Window screen No 1 Window screen No 2 Lhe 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT d Turning the specified bit device ON OFF switches between two different base screens Base screen switching device When X0 is ON 10 gt 15 When X0 is OFF Base screen No 10 When OFF When ON Base screen No 20 Base screen No 15 i 4 When XO is ON 15 OFF 20 10 20 Base screen No 15 appears Base screen No 20 appears Setting Portion f Base lt Action gt tab Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window screens to be switched e By setting this function to window screens window screens can be switched Settings Basic Action Next screen Device X0 ON No 15 OFF No 20 e Switches the base screens according to the present value of the specified word device Base screen switching device wo 1 New value depends on comparison expression ee SS Base screen No 10 lt or000 or00 100 oroo When normal
139. D16 Display Attribute Point Line OFixed Attribute Type B A 0 A 0 xX Size Small Medium Large Color 0 to 255 Points Numerical setting Device Continuous Random 16 Bit 32 Bit Device X axis O Device dialog box Set the Device No Device Y axis Device dialog box Set the Device No O Case t OX Upper Fixed Numerical setting Device O Device dialog box OX Lower Fixed Numerical setting Device O Device dialog box t OQY Upper Fixed Numerical setting Device O Device dialog box OY Lower 7 Fixed Numerical setting Device Device dialog box Case Bit OON O Type H A4 0 A 0O x O Size Small Medium Large Color 0 to 255 QOFF O Type H A4A 0 A O XxX L O Size Small Medium Large Color 0 to 255 Case Word OEdit O Edit Display Format dialog box Setting for each case Delete OEdit O Edit Display Format dialog box Ordinary Set the Device No Set the Device No Set the Device No Set the Device No Set the display range type size and color Set the display range type size and color 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT OScale display Checked m OScale points unchecked OColor O Scale
140. Decimal notation Q Q gt kej a Decimal notation Word device Omron PLC Available range for monitoring 0000 to 614315 EMO0000 to EM9999 GD64 to GD16383 GSO to GS511 Device name V O relay Internal auxiliary relay Data link relay LR Auxiliary memory relay Holding relay HR Internal holding relay W Timer contact TIM 1 Counter contact CNT 1 Data memory DM 2 Timer current value TIM 2 Counter current value CNT 2 GOT bit register GB O relay Data link relay LR Auxiliary memory relay AR Holding relay HR Internal holding relay W Data memory DM Timer current value TIM Counter current value CNT Extended data memory EM current bank 3 Extended data memory EM banks 0 to 12 3 4 GOT data register GD AR Bit device GOT special register GS 1 When CV1000 CS1 and CJ1 is used write cannot be performed x 2 When executing the touch key function with a word device bit specified as the monitor device do not perform write to that word device in a sequence program 3 On extended data memory write read cannot be performed across banks x4 When the CJ1 is used EM 0 to 2 are usable 4 54 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 7 Yasukawa PLC a When using GL60S GL60H GL70H GL120 or GL130 Available range for monitoring 001 to 063424 Input relay 11 to 163424 D1 to D2048 Link coil D10001 to D12048 D20001 to D22048 R1 to R2
141. ELSOFT e Part Move Route dialog box Set the path which is used to display a part at point positions in the specified path QRoute No Set the Route No OpPoints Set the Points OArrange in a line 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up animation display gt Setting up part movement display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset and expression can be set e Displayed parts can be changed according to the device value e Display part display color and attributes can be changed when the monitor device value word device reaches a given value 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 3 3 Lamp display function changes the lit up color of a lamp with a device value GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function changes the lit up color of a lamp with a device value 1 Function outline a Lights extinguishes a lamp according to ON OFF of a bit device X0 A Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device xo OFF The lamp figure display color attributes and character string can be changed according to ON OFF of the bit device b Changes the lit up color of a lamp according to the value of a word device D100 Only when the GOT A900 serie
142. FT 1 Title bar The screen title is displayed Move the cursor to the title bar You can drag the screen to the desired position The GT Designer has the application window title bar and the screen title bar The title is displayed The screen enlarges or shrinks 32 GT Designer The screen size can be changed or a The screen can be minimized screen can be closed Click here to close the screen 2 Menu bar Menu names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed Select a menu and a dropdown menu appears Then various functions can be selected from this menu Project Edit View Draw Communication Common Screen Help 3 Dropdown menu Function names that can be used on the GT Designer are displayed If p is displayed at the right end of the dropdown menu subsequent dropdown menu of the function is displayed If is displayed on the function name move the cursor to the function and click it The set dialog box appears Dropdown menu is displayed Communication Common Ty 4k Sh Draw Panelk it Part Select this and the Comment dialog box appears Data Display gt Line Freeform i n Message Displa gt Rectangle library C Panelkit ep ta ai E p ay ames aean Read Animation Display gt Polygon 5 LP 005 6 LP006 m Graph b oe ee Circle 1 ten ia
143. GOT F900 Series gt On screen Base Screen Number D20 System Information dialog box 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS O Write device MELSOFT The following information can be written to the PLC CPU every time the GOT operating status changes e GOT error code e PC card battery error detection signal e On base screen number 1 e GOT ready signal e On window screen number e Key code input signal e Numerical value input number e Numerical value input signal 1 e Current cursor position 1 e Previous cursor position e Hardcopy output signal e Key code input signal e Recipe processing signal e Previous numerical value input e GOT error detection signal e Current numerical value input e Printer error detection signal e Cursor position numeric value input e Barcode input signal gt 1 e Hardcopy sub signal e Human sensor detection signal e Report output signal e Currently printed report number e Grip switch hold down status e Superimposed screen number 1 2 A950 handy GOT F940 handy GOT e Superimposed screen number 2 2 only e Input completion object ID 2 e Key window output signal x1 System information with which GOT F900 series is compatible 2 System information with which only GOT F900 series is compatible 2 Setting items The system information function consists of the following setting items e System Information dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Read device s
144. IA2 1 Commercially available flash PC card based on Compact FlashTM 1 x1 Compact FlashTM is a trademark of Sun Disk A9GTMEM 10MF Memory 16 Mbyte hardware version D or later flash PC card formatted A9GTMEM 20MF Memory 32 Mbyte hardware version D or later flash PC card formatted 5 A9GTMEM 40MF Memory 48 Mbyte hardware version D or later flash PC card formatted x2 When using the compact flash PC card in the GOT you need to fit a conversion adaptor compact flash lt Type Il conversion adaptor to the compact flash PC card Fit the conversion adaptor of the corresponding maker to the compact flash PC card On the A956WGOT the PC card can be used without a conversion adaptor x3 The commercially available flash PC card may be used only when the following conditions are satisfied Usable GOTs A975GOT TBA B A975GOT TBD B A975GOT TBA A975GOT TBD A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD Version A or later A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A960GOT EBA A960GOT EBD A956WGOT compact flash PC card only Confirm the function version of the GOT on the rating plate at the back of the GOT Since the A956WGOT does not have a function version the compact flash PC card can be used independently of the function version ate Function version Za MITSUBISHI TERMINAL The flash PC card available on the market MODEL A970GOT TBA AJ IN 100 240VAC 50 60Hz __ POWER MAX 115VA DATE
145. IFICATION MELSOFT b2 Turns ON from when the base window screen is changed until one cycle of the on screen status watching object processing is completed This also applies to the case where the station number is changed or the security level is changed b3 Remains ON while the power on initial screen appears b4 Normally ON b5 Normally OFF b6 to b15 Reserved e Base screen information GS1 b15 to b3 b2 b1 bO bO Alternates between ON and OFF per communication cycle of the base screen b1 Remains ON from base screen switching until one cycle of on base screen setting processing is completed This also applies to station number changing and security level changing b2 Turns ON from when the base screen is changed until one cycle of the on screen status watching object processing is completed This also applies to the case where the station number is changed or the security level is changed b3 to b15 Reserved e CC Link G4 station number GS6 Stores the station number of the AJ65BT G4 S3 only once when the GOT connected to the CC Link network via the AJ65BT G4 S3 is powered on e 1 second binary counter GS7 Incremented every second immediately after power on The user can write a specific value from which the counter will start incrementing The value is stored in binary e Monitor scan time GS8 Stores in binary the time ms until one cycle of processing set on the display screen is completed Th
146. IXI XIXI XIXI XIXxXIXxXIXxX Xx motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Addition of the function that Servo performs various monitor functions amplifier parameter setting changes test xalal Ie lal z I I ee eI I II Se e NS ee ee I x monitor operation eie for the connected Addition of the function that can monitor each controller with one lt lt 1 o lt 1 I eI I I ee Ih He IT ex Se I ee amp me GOT personal computer Addition of the function that can Gateway laccess the PC card of the GOT S lt d lt S lt ed a I Se IPSs I lt a S lt e I oe oe lt se oe To I oe Ie UP os I x os functions rom the personal computer Addition of the function that sends mail from the GOT to the personal icomputer cellular phone at alarm occurrence 1 Unusable with the A95 GOT 2 Use the Ethernet communication module A9GT J71E71 T whose hardware version is E or later 3 Connection forms added LATBICTETFIHITJTATCTAICTATFLAIOIF IJ KITPTRIU pec Bus connection to CPU tet eee tte ese Connection with QCPU supported x Ix x x Connection with Motion controller CPU een PP EPP EERE ED EEE EEB Direct connection to CPU Connection with QnACPU supported gogogo Connection with QCPU supported Transparent function supported ela STTS x x x x x x x Connection with FXCPU FX 2N 10GM 20GM BERIEEE x series supported Supports connection with the FX 1NC totic x x xl
147. MELSOFT b Changes the word device value By changing the operation type any of the following three operations can be performed p Fixed Fixed value 20 O sl 0 Lt D100 9 rain 100 gt 20 J a Touching writes the specified value Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Word Device D101 Action Fixed 20 Device its Touching writes the present value of the specified word device Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Word Device D102 Action Device D100 Fixed device Fixed D100 100 30 130 a j D103 e 100 gt 130 ty Touching writes the present value of the specified word device the fixed value Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Word Device D103 Action Fixed 100 Device D100 c Switches to the specified base screen sl H 0 0 O Base screen switching device z o Base screen No 1 1 10 D Base screen No 10 Specified value 10 Base screen of the specified value appears Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Base Basic Next screen Fixed 10
148. O000 to XW511 External output Y YWO000 to YW511 C000 to C511 Data register D x2 D0000 to D8191 Conversion of the above bit devices to words except link Bit device word register relay timer contact and counter contact Word device GOT data register GD GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 The extended file register is not supported 2 When the mode switch on the CPU module is set to P RUN D0000 to D4095 are write disabled 3 The Z relay corresponds to 1 bit in 1000 words from W registers 0 to 999 4 The contacts and current values of the timers counters are written after they have been read once During that period therefore do not change them in the sequence program 5 The bit of the word device is designated after it has been read once During that period therefore do not change it in the sequence program 4 SPECIFICATION 4 61 b PROSEC V Series MELSOFT The representations of the device addresses set differ between Toshiba PLC s peripheral software and GOT as indicated below Make setting after converting the Toshiba side addresses into the GOT side addresses Device nang Available range for setting monitoring Available range for setting monitoring GOT side address Toshiba side address Special register S 3 S0000 to S511F S0000 to 88191 Bit device Word device bitx 1 3 GOT bit register GB GB64 to GB16383 SWO0
149. ORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 2 Precautions for installing the system program e Before installing the system program to the GOT under use be sure to make a backup of the screen data stored in the GOT Backup data is not required if the screen data is stored in FD or HD If the system program is installed the screen data stored in the memory of the GOT will be deleted Back up operation can be carried out by using the upload function e Check that the communication cable connectors are firmly attached to the connection ports on the GOT and the personal computer e Set up communication of the personal computer RS 232C port communication speed Select the Project Option menu and set up communication e Do not input other data to the PC card to which the ROM_BIOS is to be installed When the ROM _BIOS is installed from the PC card to the GOT other data will be deleted e Before installing the system program be sure to remove the communication unit communication board option unit from the GOT If the GOT has the built in communication interface disconnect the communication cable 3 Precautions while the system program is installed e Do not turn OFF the GOT or the personal computer Do not disconnect the communication cable If the GOT or the personal computer is turned OFF or if the communication cable is disconnected during installation the GOT may stop operating e Once installation of the ROM_BIOS is started it cannot be
150. Object Function Setting up Status Observation Function from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series Up to two bit word devices can be specified as conditions e Only one type of write operation can be specified for the set condition e Up to 512 points of condition write operation can be specified for each project and each screen up to 512 points per screen e Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object display on the GOT screen Monitoring operation takes longer as the total number of condition device points increase or the monitoring intervals shorten Be careful for setting 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Up to two bit word devices can be specified as conditions e Only one type of write operation can be specified for the set condition e Up to 40 points of condition write operation can be specified for each project and each screen up to 40 points per screen e Monitoring operation of the condition device may cause a delay in object display on the GOT screen Monitoring operation takes longer as the condition bit device points increase the number of device points will be up to 80 if project based or screen based settings overlap or the monitoring intervals shorten Be careful for setting 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 4 Floating alarm function causes comments to flow from right to left on a base screen GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series oO This function
151. Portion Settings Station No Basic Next station Device X0 lt Action gt tab Mode All Action ON Station No 15 OFF Station No 5 3 Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number when the present value of the specified word device corresponds to the set comparison expression When 1 lt D100 lt 100 101 lt D100 lt 300 Monitoring the l normal host station Monitoring the Monitoring the Monitoring the other station other station host station Station No 5 Station No 10 When 1 lt D100 lt 100 Station No 5 Station No 5 appears Station No 10 appears No switching When 101 lt D100 lt 300 Station No 10 When normal No switching Setting Portion Settings Station No Basic Next station Device D100 Mode All lt Action gt tab Action Range 1 lt lt 100 Switching type Other Station No 5 101 lt lt 300 Switching type Other Station No 10 Normally Switching type Host 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 4 Switches between different station numbers according to the screen type four types of base screen overlap windows 1 2 and superimpose window Base screen 1 Touch key 1 Other st
152. Run Stop screen appears le Sioa Passwort 7 C SPTE A Line control screen Line control screen You can perform Ss ity 3 Production target Production target operation for ecurity level nisi 30m production target p arias 5 z 24 changing ower u 0 ower un Palla 3 pe 202000 COC E ooo0onrAlY 1 Password L OO A a SSS AY Line control screen Wr aa You can perform lt Production target P_i i maintenance Security level 15 es 7 a A 150 c inspection using gt gt Each operator enters security power run stop ea ol ev bm ow on Heath monitor password ral SSSQ arna unction Password 4 E na Setting Portion Settings Device D100 Production target Numerical Input dialog box 7 lt Option gt tab Security Display 1 Security Input 3 lt Action gt tab Bit Device X1 Action Alternate Touch Key dialog box F lt Option gt tab Security Display 2 Security Input 2 lt Action gt tab Bit Device X2 Action Set Touch Key dialog box 7 F l lt Optionstab Security Display 1 Security Input 1 lt Action gt tab Bit Device X2 Action Reset lt Option gt tab Security Display Security Input lt Action gt tab Extended Extended action Ladder monitor Touch Key dialog box lt Option gt tab Security Display 15 Security Input 15 Touch Key dialog box lt Action gt tab Extended Extended action Password b Restricts the screen switching of base screens By
153. SEC QnA Q Grid display Mesh is added as a choice x x x x x x x x ala Px x xf x fall feta fale Device setting direct input on the setting dialog Mesh is added as a choice the Device dialog box Addition of the connection target CPU QCPU divides the Changing the conventional PLC type PL f Ctypeof sMELSEC A QnA into two project x x xX X box of each object without using Screen Addition of the function which background sets a background color on a color setting screen basis Panelkit Addition of the function which save read allows a panelkit to be function saved read as a file Monochrome Addition of the function which printer output allows adjustment for output to a compatibility monochrome printer x x xX x x xX pt Si Ye Ales als Addition of the function which uploads the alarm history alarm Upload totalization sampling function xix xix xi x xxix xix x data from the GOT and saves them in a text file Addition of the function which batch converts only the devices Device batch of the selected object conversion Addition of the function which changes the commonly set devices App 30 App 30 APPENDICES MELSOFT Edit and Setting F l Functions Description of Function Added faleiclelelHiylalclalcialrlalolelslklelrlubec Addition of the function which allows selection of whether the move and close keys are Window displ
154. SOFT MEMO App 33 App 33 INDEX A Additional function list eeeeeeeeeeeeees App 15 Alarm history display function eeee 5 18 Alarm list display function 5 24 Animation display function Lamp display function 5 33 Panelmeter display function cee 5 36 Part display function eee eeeeeeeeeneeeeees 5 27 Part movement display function 5 30 Arc ellipse AC ce eeeeceeceteeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 4 27 Arithmetical operation by expression 5 127 ASCII display function eceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 ASCII input function 5 72 ANDOS oa riar a RES 4 29 B Baso SetoeN karra iea EEE RA 4 1 Barcode FUNCTION cee eeeeeseeeeeeeteeeeeeeeatees 5 98 Bar graph display function 0 0 5 45 BMP tle tcf fiss wheat ties idle tthe hee 4 27 C CD ROM rive ccecesceeeeeceeeeteeteseeseeseeeaeens 2 1 CHECK 010 O EEE 3 10 Circle ellipse 0 2 eeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeaees 4 27 Clock display function s s s 5 11 Command Dutton ceceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 3 10 Comment display function s eseseeeeeeeee 5 14 CRivixe wis mining Nias tae ial 2 1 D Data arithmetical operation eee 5 123 Data capacity FOUTE ania aa Aa A A AA 4 33 Object function ee eeeeeeeeteeeetteteeteteteees 4 37 PCCard ideio aE e atte 4 42 Data display function ASCII display function seseeeeeeeseeeeeeen 5 8 Clock display function 5 11 Data
155. Series F94 GOT BD RH E Hardware Manual Explains the specifications system configuration part names and installation method of the Handy JY992D99901 GOT Packed with the Handy GOT RH Type GOT F900 Hardware Manual Common Connection Explains the specifications system configuration and connection diagram of each connection form available for the GOT F900 series Hardware manual common to the ET series and handy GOT Sent separately GOT F900 Operating Manual Explains the drawing specifications utility function HPP mode special function unit monitoring function specifications and dedicated monitor screen operation methods available for the GOT JY992D94701 F900 series Operating manual common to the ET series and handy GOT Sent separately Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual Abbreviations generic terms and special terms used in this manual are described as follows Abbreviations generic terms inti A985GOT V Generic term of A985GOT TBA V and A985GOT TBD V A985GOT Generic term of A985GOT TBA A985GOT TBD and A985GOT TBA EU A975GOT Generic term of A9 5GOT TBA B A975GOT TBD B A975GOT TBA A975GOT TBD and A975GOT TBA EU Generic term of A970GOT TBA B A970GOT TBD B A970GOT TBA A970GOT TBD A970GOT A970GOT SBA A970GOT SBD A970GOT LBA A970GOT LBD A970GOT TBA EU and A970GOT SBA EU A97 GOT Generic term of A975GOT and A970GOT A960GOT Generic term of A960GOT EBA A960GOT EBD and A960GOT EBA EU AQ56GOT Generi
156. Setting Example Trigger Type Initial Operation al Bit Bit OFF to ON to ON Performed Bit ON to OFF a BitOFFtoON ON Other than 0 Not performed BitONtoOFF OFF e Gateway common information GS400 Clears the error information on the gateway functions stored in the gateway information GS200 to 229 For details of the error definition stored refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Compatible Gateway functions e GT SoftGOT common information GS500 b15 to b1 bO bO Turning this bit ON displays the dialog box used to exit from GT SoftGOT Turns OFF when exit is canceled in the dialog box 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 5 2 Device ranges available for the GOT A900 series The devices available for each object function of the GOT A900 series depend on the connection target CPU and connection form Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form bases 1 QCPU A Mode ACPU LO to L8191 FO to F2047 Link relay B Special internal relay M M9000 to M9255 Coil CC CCO to CC1023 Link special relay SB Designated bit of the following word Word device bit devices except for index register and buffer memory GOT bit register GB DO to D8191 Timer current value TN RO to R8191 Z ZO to Z6 Z0 Z V VO to V6 VO V Bit device Counter Extended file register ER Word device Index register 2
157. Setting Portion Base screen 1 call setting dialog box Screen type Base screen No 5 i Screen type Base screen No 6 Base screen 5 call setting dialog box Screen type Window screen No 1 Base screen 6 call setting dialog box Screen type Window screen No 3 2 Setting items The screen call function consists of the following setting items e Overlap Screen dialog box Set the overlap screen a When the GOT A900 series is used OScreen type Base screen Window screen ONo Screen number designation Screen Image dialog box OScreen Image Display of screen image list b When using the GOT F900 series No Screen number designation Screen Image t Screen Image dialog box Display of screen image list e Replace Overlap Screen dialog box Batch change the overlap screen numbers a When using the GOT A900 series CO Object ee OWindow OAIl Selected Start End OOverlap screen ei OBase OWindow __ O Screen Image OFrom Oto Browse dialog box b When using the GOT F900 series Object All Selected Start End Screen Image Browse dialog box m Overlap screen From to 5 112 5 112 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT e Overlap Screen List dialog box Display the overlap screen numbers hierarchally a When using the
158. T SoftGOT A985GOT Maximum width 798 x length 463 dots When using A97 960GOT Maximum width 638 x length 383 dots When using AS56W GOT Maximum width 478 x length 217 dots When using A95 GOT Maximum width 318 x length 223 dots When using F940WGOT F940GOT and F930GOT Functions as a key window Setting range for the width Minimum 94 dots Maximum 800 dots Setting range for the length Minimum 81 dots Maximum 480 dots The initial value of the window screen size is set as follows e When using model other than A95 GOT Width 318 x Length 176 dots e When using A95 GOT A956W GOT Width 190 x Length 126 dots 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 2 Display method of window screen A window screen with the value stored in the window switching device is displayed at the designated display position Set the display position by directly specifying it Alternatively it may be specified by the value of the specified device Overlap window only The window screen is closed when you touch the close button overlap window only or the window switching device turns to 0 Ex Overlap window 1 Screen switching device 3 Overlap window 1 display position Window screen 3 Overlap window is displayed at the left top of the window position 3 Movement of window screen Overlap window only Touch the movement bar on the window screen to go into the movement mode Touch the movement bar again at the desired position fo
159. WD E Color liquid crystal Displayed in reduced 8 colors F940GOT LWD E Monochrome liquid crystal Display on GOT All colors other than black are displayed in the same color white F930GOT BWD E F920GOT BB5 K E Blue liquid crystal All colors other than black are displayed in the same color white and black is displayed in blue Painting HE see ee fee FRR pattern Display color 256 colors F940WGOT TWD E Color liquid crystal Displayed in reduced 256 colors F940GOT SWD E Color liquid crystal Displayed in reduced 8 colors F940GOT LWD E Monochrome liquid crystal Display on GOT All colors other than black are displayed in the same color white F930GOT BWD E F920GOT BB5 K E Blue liquid crystal All colors other than black are displayed in the same color white and black is displayed in blue Painting color 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 2 3 Figures in bitmap file format 1 When the GOT A900 series is used Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT A900 series are 3 types 256 colors 16 colors and black and white There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they are displayed in reduced colors Ex e 256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 16 color black and white GOT A900 series e 16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the black and white GOT A900 series 2 When the GOT F900 series is us
160. X0 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 4 3 Password input screen with time limit function 1 Operation The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared Part Operation Definition Screen with Manager key base screen 3 Screen change Returns in 10 seconds Enter the manager password Manager button Used to shift to the password input screen base screen 4 Password input Password entered with 1 to 0 keys appears 1 to o keys Used to enter a value Clear key Used to clear the value entered Confirm key Used to confirm the value entered Password match Manager screen Line 1 Hine 2 Brine 39 Manager screen base screen 5 appears 2 Monitor screen settings 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Program example D 16 bit signed BIN format Trigger type Any time if b GS1 01 ON only when the password input screen has appeared w TMP0001 w GS7 substitutes GS7 into TMP0001 if w D10 3238 Mwhen the correct password is entered w DO 5 switches to the manager screen base screen 5 w D10 0 Iclears the password if w GS7 w TMP0001 gt 10 if more than 10 seconds have elapsed after the password input screen had appeared w DO 3 returns to the screen with manager button base scree
161. X100 ON X100 turns ON 6 How to replace devices and constants user define A device or constant used in a script can be replaced by any character string Make user define setting in the script symbol setting of GT Designer For details of the setting method refer to the GT Designer help Example When replacing X100 with LS1 ERROR on GT Designer if LS1 ERROR 1 w D0 100 _ if X100 LS1 ERROR is ON DO is 100 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 2 4 Script execution This section explains how to execute the script functions 1 Execution conditions The script function execute a script whose execution condition is enabled and writes the result to the PLC CPU There are the following execution conditions e Any time e Bit OFF to ON ON to OFF e During bit ON OFF e Periodic during bit ON OFF e Periodic 1s increments Set the execution condition on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation For details of setting refer to the GT Designer Help 2 Execution unit The script function executes scripts one by one If the execution conditions of multiple scripts are enabled they are not processed concurrently 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Execution sequence The script functions are executed in the following order Max Screen Calling Function Execution Order Set on GT ee Execution Layer Order Designer Sequence Count Script A Project script function Script B
162. a is es ee ee eee dete eed A 4 About Manuals sae 33th oi teil Gerla neil ae ile ia tia hiies hae phi ti teehee A 8 Abbreviations and generic terms in this manual cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeas A 9 CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW 1 1to1 2 CHAPTER2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION 2 1t02 6 2 1 System Configuration of Monitoring Screen cesceceecceceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaecaeeeeeeesaeseeeeaesaeseseessaesaeseeseteaees 2 1 241 41 System configuration a aa a a ee le Ai ae ln 2 1 2 1 2 Operation envirOnMent ss cc2eiseceeesstetesesaereeeegharasdeiaes ent arrapa rataa Narat aAa aKa rE Ta a Saadia anaa Tiaa 2 1 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation cceccecceseeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeieteseeseeeaees 2 2 2 2 1 System configuration ececceeeeeeceececeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaecaecaeceeeaecaecaeseeeeaesaeseeseaseaesaeseseaeeaesaeseeseesaeseeseaeeaee 2 2 2 2 2 Compatible RS 232C cable ssnin ainni aa aa anii ia aa aaaeaii aiaa 2 4 2 2 3 Compatible PC card Only when the GOT A900 series is used eceeceeteeeeeteeeeeteeteeeeeeteeaees 2 5 CHAPTERS SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3 1 to 3 18 3 1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools cecceceesesseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaeeaeceeseeeeaesaeseseeesaesaeseeseaeeaneeseteaees 3 1 3 2 Menu Configurations senan anaana apaan a gastada taht tata ata Sra aaa anada ie aa Saara Aaa Tiaia aee 3 6 3 3 Basic Operation of Dialog BOX
163. a stored in word devices on a bar graph 1 Function outline a Batch collects the data stored in multiple word devices and shows them on a bar graph D100 _ 200 gt 400 200 D101 _ 400 300 400 D102 _200 300 400 5 ee 1081 200 gt 100 200 400 400 200 200 S H 200 200 400 400 D100 D101 D102 D103 D100 D101 D102 D103 400 200 0 200 400 D100 D200 D300 D400 eee r Drawn as figures texts Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings lt Basicstab Graph Bar lt Monitor Device gt tab Device D100 Continuous Scale display Vertical Scale points 5 lt Graph gt tab Vertical GOT A900 series c ab U 400 L 400 Olhers tab Scale value display Vertical 1 2 lt gt Peet ee ONRI Value no 5 Vertical GOT F900 seri series Upper 400 Vertical Lower 400 Vertical 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 series b Sorts the bar graph ascending order descending order according to the word device values Only when the GOT A900 series is displayed D1000 300 gt 200 gt 400 D101 200 gt 300 100 D1020 1400 gt 100 200 5 eA D1031_ 1100 gt 400 300 Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Base Fixed 0 lt Basic gt tab Graph
164. ab b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Display Date style L Time Shape Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 m Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 Data format _ yy mm dd dd mm yy mm dd yy m Type Type2 Size Height x width size setting 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up data display gt Setting up clock display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security can be set e The clock display function reads the clock data of the following PLC CPU depending on the connection form Clock data read destination Bus connection CPU direct connection DAG A i PLC CPU at connection destination computer link connection e When a communication board having a built in clock function is installed to the GOT except A95 GOT A956WGOT the clock display is available when the microcomputer connection is chosen When the computer link connection including third party PLC connection is chosen the clock function of that communication board cannot be used For specifications and performance details of the communication board having built i
165. abled e Floating alarm function Causes comments associated with ON bit devices to flow from right to left on a base screen e Recipe function cece Writes the specified data to devices or writes and saves device values in the specified device range to a PC card e Sound function s s s Plays the touch sound of a touch key or a sound sound file in WAV form in the observe status function Testfunctio erener Shows a test window during monitor screen display to allow a device value to be changed e Barcode function ceeeeee Writes the data read with a barcode reader to the PLC CPU e Operation panel function Enables operation from an external operation panel connected to the GOT e Time action function Performs device write or similar operations at the specified times of day on the specified days of week e Sampling function 06 Gathers data at specified intervals or on bit condition and shows them as a graph e Script function seses Controls a GOT display under the GOT side program script e Video display function Displays the picture taken with a video camera in the GOT video window e RGB window display function Displays the personal computer screen on the GOT 5 8 1 Hardcopy function prints a monitor screen or converts it into image file GOT A900 series Eom GOT F900 series om This function prints the current monitor screen of the GOT on a
166. ak creen whte Yeow Bue P3 Pupe Rea ak white yellow blue 0 purple red 28 255 252 3 black 227 224 cyan 182 130 2 162 160 109 22 D D Dak Dak pak park Black Lak White Green Cyan Red Purple ak Blue ak green cyan red purple 0 blue 255 28 31 224 227 black 3 yellow 20 2 160 162 2 109 180 pak Dak Da Darg Dak Black Yelow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue Dak Dark cyan green purple red blue 0 252 31 28 227 224 3 black white 2 20 160 2 109 182 Dak Dak Dark Dak Dak Dak Dak Dak Dak Dark a a ak Pupe Red Cyan Green White Yellow A S a f Blue blue blue black 297 224 31 28 255 252 blue red purple green cyan yellow white 3 2 2 109 2 160 162 20 22 180 182 Dark Dark Dark a Purple 6 x Bue Yelow White Green Cyan ae Black 227 a 3 252 255 28 31 Pup 0 160 109 162 Dark Dak Dark ae Red Blue x White Yelow Cyan Green ia oi 204 2 252 1 2 162 109 a gt 3 160 2 Dark Dark Dak Dark ae Cyan Yellow White z Bue Red Pupe ot a 1 22 2 224 227 20 gt 5 409 22 ae Green White Yellow Blue e Purple Red a 227 224 ie 28 255 252 3 fee x Dark Dark ne White Green Cyan Red Purple oe Bw ae 2 2 1 224 227 180 2 8 2 109 182 oe Yellow Cyan Green Purple Red Blue ae ae we 2 31 28 227 224 3 a a Dak Dak Dak Dak Dark Dak Dak gue black blue red purple green cyal white 3 109 2 160 162 20 20 180 182 App 19
167. an be displayed on the base screen j Superimpose window Base screen screen Screen display not displayed for touch key c If only one object that can be displayed in one screen overlaps If only one object such as data list or alarm list that can be displayed in one screen overlaps the objects can be displayed for the number of screens However the functions are limited and the display may not be correct 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 1 3 About the report screen GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series POINT The A950 handy GOT GOT F900 series has no report screens The report screen is used to set the format and layout of data printed by a printer with the report function of the GOT Hence only the functions usable with the report function may be set on this screen For details of the report function refer to Section 6 7 1 Screen size setting range aed Item Setting Range ke gt gt 1 t0 127 Format Top 1 to 255 ape iai 0 to 30 Report screen lines argins Left space 0 to 254 Number of screens k columns _ gt I 2 Setting for each printer The screen size print format settings of the report screen must be changed according to the printable area of the printer You can use the following expressions to find the settings For more information on the print format settings refer to
168. an be set e Rectangle graph or circle graph is available 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Statistical graphs of up to eight divisions for eight devices can be displayed e Graphs can be sorted in ascending descending order e Scales can be set e Rectangle graph or circle graph is available 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 4 5 Scattered chart display function Shows word device values on scattered chart GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function gathers data stored in word devices associated with the X and Y axes and shows them on a scattered chart 1 Function outline a Collects and shows the data of one point device By updating the display with the previous display remaining shows the variation of the point device value as a locus X axis device D100 200 300 gt 50 400 300 200 100 0 e 100 200 300 0 D200 _50 200 300 Y axis device Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings ee oe nes wees X axis Device D100 lt gt p p Y axis Device D200 Scale display Scale point 5 Xx 5 Scale value display Size 5 x 5 Upper 400 lt 400 Lower 0 x 0 lt Case gt tab b Batch collects and shows the data of multiple point devices By changing the display switching device value shows different data as different point figures X axis devices D100 100 50 D101 250 gt 1
169. and writes 0 to D100 at 5 00 PM on Friday GOT A900 series only Monday Tuesday to Thursday Friday 8 0 17 00 o o o o o oo oo D100 0000 9999 erat D100 99990000 ane of this week weekend Setting Portion Settings Mode Through Start 8h Omin Mon End 17h Omin Fri Word Device D100 Start write value 9999 End write value 0 Action gt tab i z Sound Start 1 End 2 5 101 5 101 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items The time action function consists of the following setting items e Time action dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series OEdit crus aioe attribute lalog Dox Daily OThrough h min Starting time setting _ Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Starting day of week setting h min End time setting Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Ending day of week setting L OBit Unchecked checked Device ODevice dialog box Setting of Device No OWord Unchecked checked Device ODevice dialog box Setting of Device No Data Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real Data type 16bit 32bit M OStart write Set the value to be written at start value OEnd write Set the value to be writ
170. ange of line style 6 Set change of painting background 2 Set change of line width color 3 Set change of line color 7 Set change of character color 4 Set change of painting pattern 8 Set change of character decoration 5 Set change of painting color 9 Set change of character shade color 9 Status bar This is where the current operation status and cursor coordinates are displayed Please select figures or objects Current operation status is displayed are displayed 10 Template This is provided to register and read the panelkit and parts easily Refer to Section 3 4 for details 11 Tool palette This is where the buttons for setting figures objects and so on are displayed Refer to Section 3 5 for details 12 Help This is where how to operate GT Designer how to create edit the GOT screen data and other information are shown Refer to Section 3 6 for details 3 5 3 5 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3 2 Menu Configuration Project Edit Delete Object t Group Edit Vertex Object sanunsnonsnssnssosssosossonssosnsnnnn Figure and Object Report line LEETETETETI L Select All csstsssseeeeeeeeseeeeesseeeeneseeeenees MELSOFT This section describes the command list allocated on the menu bar and explains the details 1 GT Designer Consecutive Copy eenecenucuceucucucuacauacas of Selection Group sssonsusnoanososososssson
171. annot be set only when the numerical input function is used on the GOT F900 series 2 Cannot be set when the GOT F900 series is used App 7 App 7 APPENDICES MELSOFT 2 List of key code for objects a Key code for numerical input Key code Application 0008 Delete the bottom digit and shift to the right by one digit 000D Write to the destination device Execute Move cursor 001B Delete cursor 002D SR 002E ee 0030 to 0046 Input value 0080 Move cursor to the right 0081 Move cursor to the left 0082 Move cursor upward Move cursor downward Delete value being input x Cannot be set when the GOT F900 series is used b Key code for ASCII input Key code Application 0008 Erases the rightmost character and shifts the whole one character to the right 000D Write to the destination device Execute Move cursor 001B Delete cursor ASCII code Input characters 0080 Move cursor to the right 0081 Move cursor to the left 0082 Move cursor upward Move cursor downward Delete value being input Cannot be set when the GOT F900 series is used c Key code for data list display function Application 00F2 Scroll up by one line 00F3 Scroll down by one line Cannot be set when the GOT F900 series is used App 8 App 8 APPENDICES MELSOFT d Key code for alarm list display function Key code Application OOF2
172. are help Bees 2 Fie Edit Bookmark Options Help Click the index entry you want and then click Display Contents Index Back Print biei Value Error Detection Sianal Svstem Sianal 2 Are Numerical Display dialog box Numeric Value Input Read Complete SianalfSystem Siana Numeric Value Inout SianalfSvstem Sianal 2 Area Basic Form Case Option Trigger Expression Numerical display Numerical display Precaution Numeral Numerical Display dialoa box Select from the list box the color you wish to use for displaying numerical Numerical Inout values Numerical input Precaution a Numerical Inout dialoa box Plate Numerical Print dialoa box If you selected the Shape option select from the list box the color for the Numerical term Numonea am i plate image behind the numerical display Obiect Plate Obiect function alarm history disolav Alarm history display Obiect function animation disolav a m cae Frame Numeral 2 Search sis link A Regarding the numerical display and the plate image behind it specify 3 As a result of search multiple candidates whether you want none one or both after to blink and also the blinking for the Numeral item appear speed if you want any of them to blink i No Here choose Numeral in No blinking Numerical Display dialog box Low ai Specifies blinking at the interval of 1 sec T Middle Topics Found L2
173. arm history 3072 points y APPENDICES MELSOFT Obiect Functor Desorption ot Funcion Aes Te TS TET u Iia Aeta E ar e LP A Ba Addition of the function which allows data to be saved on PC x x x px xix gt x xix xpxixpx px x card as CSV format file Alarm history function Alarm list Recipe function Script function Time action function Video display RGB screen display App 28 Addition of the function which sends the date and time comment and others as x x x xix xixixixixixixixixix x x electronic mail when the specified device turns on off Increase in number of device points that can be set Continuous 8192 points Random 512 points Addition of most to least recent ofololololololo olo olo olo olo o eje ele o and least to most recent as the orders of displaying the alarm list Addition of the setting which does not create a recipe file automatically does not set xixixi x xixixixi xxix xx recipe device values if the PC card has no recipe file Addition of the function which allows file register name to be x p z x xxix xixixixixix x x specified with recipe device Addition of the function which ak allows recipe operation to be KXXX IV XIXILI K AX XXK X copied Addition of the function which allows the user to set the recipe x x lt x x x x x xIx x xIx x xI xI x xI xfO JOIO O file name Addition of the function which can control the GOT display with x x x
174. ation N W No 2 Mode Screen Base 2 Touch key 2 Other station N W No 10 Mode Screen Overlap window 1 7 Monitoring the host station Monitoring the other station Monitoring the other station Station No 2 Station No 2 1 Li gt gt e7 A 1 1 z Overiap window 1 Monitoring the Lo Monitoring the ee lo host station L host station 2 h Station No 10 Setting Portion Settings Station No Basic Next station Other NW No 2 Touch key 1 I Mode Screen Base lt Action gt tab f T Station No Basic Next station Other NW No 10 Touch key 2 i Mode Screen Overlap window1 j Creates keys for numerical and ASCII inputs Setting Portion Settings e pog Key code 0062H e Key code 0032H Key code 0064H Key code 000DH lt Action gt tab Key code 0063H Key code 0033H e Refer to Appendix 3 for details of key codes e Numerical and ASCII input keys are supplied in the template of GT Designer 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items The touch key function consists of the following setting items e Touch key dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Basic 8 t ODisplay OKey OBit O Word o trigger k Device ODevice dialog bo
175. atus function writes to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series Oo This function writes data to the PLC CPU or performs GOT operation when the specified condition is enabled e g when the specified bit device turns ON OFF or the specified word device value falls within the specified range only when the GOT A900 series is used Two modes are available in this function to perform write operation when the specified condition is enabled independently of the display monitor screen per project and to perform write operation for each display screen when the specified condition is enabled per screen 1 Function outline a When the specified bit device X1 turns ON condition writes 100 to D10 write x1 D10 0 pee he eee ae aT el When condition is enabled 100 is written to word device D10 of PLC CPU Settings lt Trigger gt tab Trigger 1 ON Device X1 Action Word set 16bit lt Action gt tab Device D10 Fixed 100 e The observe status function can perform the following write operation e Turn ON a bit device only while the condition is enabled Momentary e Turn ON a bit device Bit SET e Turn OFF a bit device Bit RST e Reverse the current status of a bit device Bit ALT e Write a value to a word device Word SET e Play a sound file
176. ay function allows up to 24 points to be set on one screen e Make setting to avoid a superimpose window to be overlaid on the scattered chart which is not stored into memory If it is overlaid the overlaid scattered chart part is erased 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 4 6 Level display function shows a word device value as a level GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function shows a word device value as a level at the ratio to the upper lower limit 1 Function outline a Shows a word device value as a level in any closed figure at the ratio to the upper lower limit 100 200 300 Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings i F Upper 300 lt Basic gt tab Device D100 lt Form gt tab Lower 0 b Used with the numerical display function refer to Section 5 1 1 or comment display function refer to Section 5 2 1 1 ghep Monitor device DO Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device Do 1 On an object of the numerical or comment display function set the drawing mode transparent XOR which is used to superimpose the object on the level display e Level display can be overlapped with a value or comment of the numerical or comment display function e Refer to Section 4 4 2 for overlapping with an object 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
177. ayed or hidden in overlap screen windows 1 2 changing Addition of the function which can control the overlap window screen display position using the specified device value CSV file Addition of the function which based reads a CSV file as a comment comment and writes a comment as a CSV read write file Addition of the function which leaves the previously saved data as backup at the time of project overwrite Addition of the function which can change the toolbar display Operating position environment Addition of Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating System and Microsoft Windows 2000 professional Operating System to the operating environment of GT Designer Addition of the functions which improve operability for figure drawing editing shortcut keys right click menu mouse operation Addition of the function which defines the user settings as predetermined values in figure attribute setting Addition of the function which browses through a list display to choose a screen comment part or the like Addition of the function which shows the related setting item comment print format communication auxiliary setting setting screen from the corresponding object setting screen Addition of the function which selects deselects all data copied from the item list of another project on the Import From Project screen Addition of new toolbars Main View Figure Object Edit Draw and icons Addition of the commu
178. bjects For further details refer to the help window of the GT Designer Start e Select the object to draw from the Draw menu e Click the button of the object to draw on the tool palette The object drawing dialog box is displayed y basic setting display setting etc Designate the basic tab items If extension tab is not designated If extension tab is designated Click the Extended gt gt button Designate the extended tab items option expression etc le After setting click the OK button j y Designate the display position of the object j 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 4 Operations for Creating a Report Screen GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series The following flowchart gives an outline of operation procedure for creating a report screen For full information refer to the help function of the GT Designer Start Choose the Screen New Screen menu and create a new report screen Choose the Report Common menu and set the page renewal watch interval abort trigger device report print format margins etc Choose the Report Parameter menu and set the report screen parameters report style selection page number time of day print selection collection trigger designation Using report figures line text set the print layout y Using print objects numerical comment set the data to be print
179. breviation of Model3000 S3 CPU unit oshiba PLC Generic term of PROSEC T Series and PROSEC V Series Generic term of H 302 CPU2 03H H 702 CPU2 07H H 1002 CPU2 10H H 2002 CPU2 H 4010 CPU3 40H J 300 CPU 03Ha H 700 CPU 07Ha H 2000 CPU 20Ha Generic term of H 200 CPU 02H CPE 02H H 250 CPU21 02H H 252 CPU22 02H H 252B CPU22 02HB H 252C CPU22 02HC CPE22 02HC Generic term of EH CPU104 EH CPU208 EH CPU308 EH CPU316 Generic term of large type H series H 200 to 252 Series H Series board type EH 150 Series Generic term of FPO C16CT FPO C32CT FP1 C24C FP1 C40C FP2 FP2SH FP2 CCU FP3 FP5 FP10 S FR10SH FP M C20TC and FP M C32TC Memory abbreviation of memory flash memory in the GOT Abbreviation of GOT system software Object Setting data for dynamic image Personal Computer Personal computer where the corresponding software package is installed A 10 In this manual the following products are called by new names A 10 1 OVERVIEW MELSOFT CHAPTER1 OVERVIEW This manual describes the system configuration screen makeup basic dialog box operation methods specifications help using methods functions and others of the following products used with the GOT900 series e SW5D5C GTWORKS E software package e SW5D5C GOTR PACKE software package e SW5D5C GOTR PACKEV software package x Exclusive updating products which can be utilized by those who use the previous products In
180. bserve Status srrrtrsressersssssssseeeeeeeees Sets the status monitoring function m Alarm History sssssssreeeeeessssseerereeeneeeenn Sets the alarm history function in common with projects m Floating Alarm sesssssrsssssssssseeeeeeeeeeeeee Sets the alarm flow Alarm MACO Sets the recipe function in common with projects m Print Format serresereerereerereeeeeesereeneeee Sets the print format used on the alarm history display function L Sound ssssssressressensesussnsensuenenennenenen Sets the voice file WAV format m GOT PC Type ssereeeersereereersereessene Sets the GOT type for the created screen data and the PC type for connection Script Project script setting Make project based script setting Screen script setting Make screen based script setting m Key Window Screen No sssssseeseeeee Sets the screen used as a key window Auxiliary Setting SCIEEN trrrerrrereneneneennnneneneunnnnnene Performs auxiliary setting for each screen Project ee Performs auxiliary setting for each project Update Script datasssssssssseeeeeee Updates the script data read to GT Designer to the latest script data Screen New Screen crrrsssesssseeseeeeeeseeeseeeeeeee New screen is created L LOGC srsssersssessnsusnuseneneneeneneenensnennsne Designated screen is opened Clear aee aean erene EEDE ASER ERES Designated screen is closed m Clear and Load srrrrsttrrsesssesessereeenseens Editing screen is closed and another screen is opened
181. c term of A56GOT TBD A956GOT SBD A956GOT LED A956GOT TBD M3 A956GOT SBD M3 and A956GOT LBD M3 A956WGOT Generic term of A956WGOT TBD A953GOT Generic term of A953GOT TBD A953GOT SBD A953GO A958GOT SBD M3 and A953GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A951TGOT TBD A951GOT SBD A951GOT LBD A951GOT TBD M3 A951GOT SBD M3 and A951GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A951GOT QTBD A951GOT QSBD A951GOT QLBD A951GOT QTBD M3 A951GOT QSBD M3 and A951GOT QLBD M3 Generic term of A950GOT TBD A950GOT SBD A950GOT LBD A950GOT TBD M3 A950GOT SBD M3 and A950GOT LBD M3 Generic term of A950GOT SBD M3 H A950GOT SBD M3 H A953GOT SBD M3 H and Generic term of A956GOT A953GOT A951GOT A951GOT Q A950GOT and A950 handy A95 GOT GOT F940GOT Generic term of F940GOT SWD E F940GOT LWD E ET 940BH L and ET 940PH L F930GOT Generic term of F930GOT BWD E F930GOT BBD K E F920GOT Abbreviation of F220GOT BBD5 K E F940 handy GOT Generic term of F940GOT SBD H F940GOT LBD H F943GOT SBD H F943GOT LBD H y F940GOT SBD RH F940GOT LBD RH F943GOT SBD RH and F943GOT LBD RH F940WGOT Abbreviation of F940WGOT TWD GOT A900 series eee item of A985GOT V A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT A95 GOT and GOT F900 series Generic term of F940GOT F930GOT F920GOT F940 handyGOT and F940WGOT Gommunica Generic term of A9GT QBUSS A9GT QBUS25 A9GT BUSS and A9GT BUS2S tion board Serial communication board Generic term of A9GT RS4 A9GT RS2 and A9GT RS2T Senere term of A9G T QBUS
182. cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeseeteeeeeees 5 106 58 13 Video display TUNCHION vec an dink ea a laeea deen neal en vial aves 5 109 58 14 RGB SCreen TUNCON o cece src rE A AE EAEE ETEA EENE E 5 110 eNA MCHOMS cr fli ot Aas TAE TAEAE TETE E TEE EEE EE E TT 5 111 5 9 1 Screen call function reduces project data Capacity cecceccecesseeeeceeceeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeaees 5 111 5 9 2 Security function limits users eee eeeceeeseeeeceeeceeaecaecaeeeeeeaecaeceeseeeeaesaesaeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeaneaeeateas 5 118 5 9 3 Offset function monitors multiple devices by setting of one device sesesesseseeresrereeseen 5 122 5 9 4 Expression function performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT cccceeeseseees 5 124 5 9 5 Station number switching function Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number 0 5 129 6 1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time ceccccceceeseseeceeceeeeseeaeceeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeaesaesaeseaeeaesaesaeseataeseeseaeeateas 6 1 6 2 Operations for Drawing FiQures cccceccesesseeeeceeceseeaeeeceeeeaecaeceeeeaeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaeeateas 6 2 6 3 Operations for Object Setting i i a a a aAa a a aE A A Aa Aa 6 2 6 4 Operations for Creating a Report SCreen ceccecceseeeceeceeeeseeseceeceeeeaecaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeesaesaeseeseaeeaneeseaeeaeeas 6 3 6 5 Installation Operations of System Program cecceceeceececeeseeeeceece
183. ch provides the GOT with the following extended functions e Ladder monitoring e Recipe function e Operation panel function function e System monitoring e Sound function e Report function function e Special unit monitoring Printer function e Barcode function function e Network monitoring e Video display function RGB screen display function function e Motion monitoring e Gateway function e Servo amplifier monitor function function 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT b Combination of installable extended function Operating Systems Up to nine of the following extended function OSs can be selected as a combination of extended function OSs that can be installed into the GOT The number of installable extended function OSs varies with the GOT built in memory space If an extension memory board is not fitted the extended function OSs equivalent to a total of up to six required memories in the table can be stored Refer to Appendix 6 for details of the GOT built in memory and installed extended function OSs Extended Function OS Name Number Equant to nequireg Remarks Memories at Installation System monitor 5 _ MELSEC A ladder monitor Only one may be selected Ladder monitor MELSEC Q ladder monitor function 1 MELSEC FX ladder monitor Motion Monitor Cid 2 oOo i Special unit Recipe Sound ooo o a o o i Network monitor oo o a o o o List editor function MELSEC A 1 TC Ga
184. checked checked Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Shape No Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Designation of Plate 0 to 255 t Q Direciton Right Left mO Number Designation of Number 1 to 8 OPoints Designation of Points 2 to 500 OFrame Checked unchecked o OEdit O Attribute dialog box Edit Device dialog box Set the Device No Continuous Random 2 Device point Unchecked checked Graph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 Style Designation of Style ODelete Deletion of setting Width Designation of Width Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real e _ 1 6bit 32bit O Upper Lower ee OFixed Numerical setting h ODevice _ O Device dialog box Set the Device No Ho IL O Scale display Unchecked checked 3 OScale points Designation of Scale points V xH 0 2 to 11 2 Color _Designation of Color 0 to 255 uw __ Scale value Checked unchecked display Size Designation of Size V xH O Value no Designation of number of numerical values Vx H to be displayed 0 2 to 11 Upper Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value displayed lower limit value V x H Color ____ _ Designation of Color 0 to 255 OSecurity Designation of Security 0 to 15 OOffset
185. cked Device Device dialog box Set the Device No OUser ID Unchecked checked Set the User ID Move Unchecked checked destination ID Set the Move destination ID Screen Setting OScreen Auxiliary Setting Set the Defined key action OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Range Bit trigge m Device Device dialog box Set the Device No I 16 bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range OBit trigger OBit Bit count setting Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Device Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Data length 16bit 32bit Shape Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 L Numeral Designation of Color 0 to 255 Form Format Signed decimal UnSigned decimal Real Octal Binary Hexadecimal Right alignment Left alignment Center _ Disp all digits Unchecked checked m Size Height x width size setting m Digits Digit count setting Decimal point Digit count setting Trigger Trigger Type Or
186. converting method details 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 1 2 Operating instructions You should know the following instructions to use the script functions 1 Usable range of the script functions Since these functions are designed to control the GOT display do not use them to exercise machine control which demands severe timings For data changes to be made from the GOT to the PLC configure up an interlock circuit in a Sequence program to ensure that the whole system will operate safely 2 Stopping the script processing In any of the following cases the corresponding script processing is stopped resulting in an error A numerator is divided by a denominator of 0 e A monitor device value cannot be handled as BCD when 16 bit BCD or 32 bit BCD was selected as a script data format Example D0 D1 Present value of D1 is 0x991A e An operation result is outside the BCD range when 16 bit BCD or 32 bit BCD was selected as a script data format Example 16 bit Other than 0 to 9999 32 bit Other than 0 to 99999999 e As the write destination device of the while statement a temporary work TMP was not used but the PLC CPU device or GOT internal device GD was used e Refer to Section 7 2 3 for details of the usable data ranges e Refer to Section 7 2 2 for details of the while statement e Refer to Section 7 5 for the actions to be taken when script processing has stopped 3 Differences in processing
187. creen display hide selection bit when you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen The following is the script function setting example to turn off the RGB screen display hide selection bit Setting Item Settings Set the Switching screen _ Video RGB Common Device D100 Selection of RGB screen display or hide bit D100 b15 Set the System information Write Device Set 15 points starting from D33 Set the Script Function Type Project Script Trigger Type Ordinary Data Format Signed BIN 16 32bit Script description if b D100 b15 ON When the RGB screen display hide selection bit is on and amp amp w D35 1 1 RGB screen is in Base screen number storage area of System information b TMP0000 b0 ON The RGB screen displaying flag is turned on else if b TMP0000 b0 ON When the RGB screen is changed to the monitor screen b D100 b15 OFF the RGB screen display hide selection bit is turned off b TMP0000 b0 OFF the RGB screen displaying flag is turned off e When VGA 640x480 dots is used the margins are displayed black since the resolution differs from that of the A985GOT V 800x600 dots e When offline e g when monitor screen data is downloaded from GT Designer the GOT shows a screen If the RGB screen display controlling bit is on when the GOT is switched from offline to online the monitor screen is displayed once and the RGB screen is then displayed e Eac
188. cters OBlink No Low Middle High O Reverse Unchecked checked O High quality font Direct only Unchecked checked Case Word O Edit O Eai Display Format O Range Edit range dialog box dialog box ue r Set the conditional expression L_ Indication ONo O Indirect Hold sim OAttribute Plate Designation of Plate O Change Unchecked checked attribute Style Regular Bold Solid Raised O Text Designation of Color O Solid Designation of Solid of characters O Blink None Low Delete Deletion of setting Middle High Reverse Unchecked checked 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS O Trigger t OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No 1 6bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range 1 O nitial display Unchecked checked t OHold display Unchecked checked OBit ee Bit Bit count setting O Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling OMask None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value Shift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count Expression O Input Expression dial
189. ctivity Execution condition selectable on script basis Any of various conditions any time periodic bit OFF to ON ON to OFF during bit ON OFF periodic during bit ON OFF may be chosen as a trigger to execute each script enabling script execution scheduling Fully useful debugging functions Since a script is like the C language the general C language compiler or debugger e g Microsoft Visual C can be used for simulation by making slight corrections This is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses many control statements The system monitor function is useful for hardware debugging using the GOT You can use the test and device monitor functions to check conditional branching in a script By monitoring the GOT special registers GS you can easily check error information and a script in execution Grammar check on created scripts Before executing created scripts on the GOT you can make a grammar check on GT Designer increasing programming efficiency Digital s script language convertible 7 You can convert the script language D script global D script created on Digital package GP PRO PBIII for Windows 95 Ver 3 0 and operate it on the GOT e Make execution condition setting and grammar check on GT Designer at the time of monitor screen creation Refer to GT Designer help for details e Digital s script language is converted on GT Converter Refer to the GT Converter help for convertible data and
190. d Functions OS Installation and User Area Memory Map acti set ee abate le ti i hak Shs App 17 Appendix7 Synthesized Colors Available for XOR 1 cesceseceeeeeeeeeseeaeceeeeceeaesaeseeseeeeaesaesaeseeeeaesaesaeseaeeas App 18 Appendix8 List of Functions Added by Version Update of GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 c ceccesceseecceeeeseeseceeeeeeeaeeaecaeceaeeaecaecaesaesaesaeseeseaesaesaeseeseaeeaeeaeseaeeas App 21 INDEX Index 1 to Index 3 About Manuals The following manuals related to this product are available Obtain the manuals as required the according to this table e Related manual Manual number Model code GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 Operating Manual Start up Manual Describes how to install GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 into a personal computer and IB 0800143 how to browse the online manuals 13JU06 Found in the packing of the GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 GOT900 Series Operating Manual Introductory Manual SH 080116 For those who use the GOT for the first time describes the way to create a monitor screen on GT 13JU07 Designer transfer monitor data to the GOT and display it on the screen Available as option GT Simulator Version5 Operating Manual SH 080120 Explains the system configuration screen makeup and using methods of GT Simulator 13JU09 Available as option A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT User s Manual Explains the specifications general
191. d device is outside the range error message There are no restrictions on the range of read write performed by specifying the file register name in the recipe function Word device Setting example When devices are specified consecutively e g line graph when 10 points are specified Correct Head device ZR32768 Wrong Head device ZR32767 ZRO ZRO i Block 0 to Block 0 ZR32767 2R32767 esses 10 points are set ZR32768 ZR32768 beyond ZR32767 Oeps e Block1 be Block 1 x 4 Only special function units of the GOT connection station can be designated Set within the address range of the buffer memory of the designated special function unit 5 Set the device numbers in multiples of 16 4 52 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 3 Motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU Latch relay L LO to 8191 Annunciator F FO to F2047 Link relay B BO to B1FFF Special relay SM 1 SM0 to SM255 Word device bit Specified bit of the following word devices Data register D 2 3 DO to D32767 GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 x 1 When setting the special internal relays M9000 to M9255 use SM as the device name and the value decreased by 9000 i e 0 to 255 as the device number x2 When setting the special data registers D9000 to D9255 set them as they are D9000 to D9255 3 D8192 to D8999 and D9256 to D9999 are outside the range 4 Cannot be monitored using GT S
192. d key window do not appear ON D1 b4 to turn OFF D2 b4 D1 b4 Turns ON to turn OFF the numerical input signal of the system information Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Numerical Device D101 p lt Option gt tab User ID 1 Input A lt Trigger gt tab Trigger type ON Device M1 Numerical Device D102 F lt Option gt tab User ID 2 Input B lt Trigger gt tab Trigger type ON Device M2 Numerical Device D103 7 lt Option gt tab User ID 3 Input C lt Trigger gt tab Trigger type ON Device M3 Numerical lt Basiostab Device D104 lt Option gt tab User ID 4 Input D lt Trigger gt tab Trigger type ON Device M4 Action when condition success Display cursor and key window System Information Read device D1 Action when condition fail dialog box Write device D2 Erase cursor key window and input object Refer to Section 5 8 2 for details of the system information function 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The numerical input function consists of the following setting items e Numerical Input dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Basic 2 t Device Device _ O Device dialog box Set the Device No f Data type Signed BIN Unsign
193. d on the connection target CPU and connection form Device availabilities are listed below on connection target CPU and connection form bases 1 QCPU A Mode ACPU Se Coil CC ounter cian a oy File register R Accumulator A Z Index register 1 Z0 to Z6 Z0 Z V0 to V6 VO V GOT data register GD GD100 to GD1023 x 1 Write to the index register cannot be performed during computer link connection Bit device Word device 2 wees a FXo FXON FXos FX1 FXis FXiN FX2 FX2C FX2N FX2NC series Device name setting monitoring notation X0000 to X0377 Gas ae ea 3 Y0000 to Y0377 Auxiliary relay M ol to M3071 State S 50000to s0999 to S0999 Special n to M8255 Decimal Bit device Too0toT255 C000 to C255 GOT bit register G GB132to GB1023 Timer current value T T000 to T255 Counter current value C C000 to C255 Data register D D000 to D0999 i Decimal RAM file register D D1000 to D7999 Special data register D D8000 to D8255 GOT data register GD GD100 to GD1023 Word device 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT b FX 2N 10GM FX 2N 20GM series Device name ae setting monitoring notation GOT bit register GB GB132t0GB1023 Daad Z Z0 to Z7 32 bits V Vo to V7 16 bits 2 gt Ss a Index register 3 QCPU Q Mode QnACPU Latch relay L LO to L32767 Annunciator F FO to F32767 Link relay B
194. data is cancelled and the previous data is maintained Figures and objects are cut and stored in the clipboard Selected figures characters and objects are stored in the clipboard Figures and objects stored in the clipboard are pasted Selected figures and objects are copied and pasted on the multiple editing screen Selected figures and objects are deleted Length of continuous line or lines designated by polygon is changed Only figures are edited Only objects are edited Figures and objects are edited Report lines are edited All figures and objects are selected Selected figures and objects are grouped Grouping of selected objects as a single object Grouping of selected figures and objects is canceled Selected figures are flipped vertically Selected figures are flipped horizontally Selected figures are rotated to the left by 90 Selected figures and objects are aligned Selected figures and objects are brought to front Selected figures and objects are sent to back Attributes of selected figures and objects are changed The set monitoring devices are replaced with other devices Overlap screen numbers are batch changed Screen details are displayed in monitoring image Screen details are displayed in ON Editing screen is re displayed 16 colors that are displayed on the color list are selected Displays the device list used for each screen Displays the device list used for each project Object li
195. deo window change the device values used to set the coordinates X axis Y axis In case more then two video windows are moved frequently there might be no response to move by the overlap window touch 4 When placing video window in overlap window a A video window may be placed only in the overlap window 1 b All windows displayed in front of the overlap window 1 are shown in front of the video window c The video window placed in the overlap window 1 is transparency processed automatically Refer to 8 for the transparency processing d When the screen specified to place the video window is changed from the base screen to the overlap window 1 while the video window is being displayed the video window is closed once and then opened in the overlap window 1 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 5 Full mode In the full mode the picture taken with a video camera is displayed on the GOT as is When the full mode is used up to four video windows can be displayed simultaneously A single video window can display pictures by changing one channel number to another SS A Video picture Video taken picture appears as is a Resolution effective pixels and size In the full mode a video window can be displayed at the resolution of 720x480 dots or 640x480 dots and its size can be changed in three steps 100 50 25 at each resolution Resolution Siig 1 Set the same re
196. dinary ON OFF Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Others Gain 1 Gain 1 value setting Gain 2 Gain 2 value setting Offset Offset value setting Upper Fixed ______ Setting of Fixed Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Lower Fixed Setting of Fixed __ Device _ Device dialog box Set the Device No User ID Unchecked checked lL Setting of User ID No Move Unchecked checked destination ID H Setting of Move destination ID No Screen setting Screen auxiliary setting dialog box hian Confirmation key operation setting 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Data input Setting up numerical input from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset and expression can be set e The system key window of the GOT is available for value input Input keys can be created freely e Values including decimal points can be displayed or input 2 When using the GOT F900 series e The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT s system window e The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT s system window only 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT
197. ding to the result of operation 1 Expression format A A B C A B C D E AB A B C D A B C D E A B C A BC D A B C D E e Values available for A to E Numerical value Numerical value of up to 32 digits decimal including minus and decimal point are available 9 rata ales Used to specify monitor device values as values A to E SW iis ea is tat Used to specify input values as values A to E Available only when the numerical input function is used GN entitled Used to specify the monitor device values expression result values as values A to E DOVICC estes Used to specify the current device values as values A to E 2 Available operations Addition Reminder operation 1 Division Multiplication x Subtraction 1 The left side of the symbol is divided by the right side and the reminder is the result of operation 100 3 1 100 3 33 with remainder 1 d Operation sequence 1 Sequence of expressions for other than numerical input function Operation Monitor Mask Shift gt gt gt using GOT display device value operation operation expression Da Net ko tae ein Sec Sean el ENE nee f If no expression is specified 2 Sequence of expressions for numerical input function Operation using Mask Input value gt expression gt Shift operation gt operation x2 Write word operat
198. e GB64 to GB16383 Bit device GBetoGB16383 00 to 063 e When using CP 9200 H GOT data register GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 May be set only when CP 9200 is used f When using PROGIC 8 Word device 2 gt Ss a Word device Bit device 3 W0001 to W2048 Holding register SW0001 to SW2048 R0001 to R1024 Link register SR0001 to SR1024 GOT data register GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 Word device 1 Internal coils N1 to N1536 may be set as 0513 to 02048 However make setting to avoid 01 to 00512 from overlapping 0513 to 02048 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 8 Allen Bradley PLC a When using SLC500 series B3 0 0 to B3 255 15 Bit B B10 0 0 to B255 255 15 T4 0 14 to T4 255 14 a arlo T4 0 TT to T4 255 TT Timer timing bit TT T10 0 14 to T255 255 14 T10 0 TT to T255 255 TT T4 0 13 to 14 255 13 edi T4 0 DN to T4 255 DN Timer completion bit TN T10 0 13 to T255 255 13 T10 0 DN to T255 255 DN C5 0 15 to C5 255 15 C5 0 CU to C5 255 CU Counter up counter CU C10 0 15 to C255 255 15 C10 0 CU to C255 255 CU Decimal C5 0 14 to C5 255 14 C5 0 CD to C5 255 CD Counter down counter CD C10 0 14 to C255 255 14 C10 0 CD to C255 255 CD C5 0 13 to C5 255 13 at a C5 0 DN to C255 255 DN Counter completion bit CN C10 0 13 to C255 255 13 C10 0 DN to C255 255 DN Integer N N7 0 to N7 255 z N10 0 to N255 255 Word
199. e ee H U xlolx xlxlololx x x storage count Max 2000 times a The number of parts that may be displayed actually is as follows Maximum setting points in the above list base screen overlap screen b The size of the memory capacity changes with the conditions such as the presence absence of the display frame The above sizes are the minimum sizes of the corresponding parts c The built in memory capacities of the GOT F900 series are as follows e F940WGOT 1M bytes F940GOT 512k bytes F930GOT 256k bytes e F 20GOT 128k bytes e Max recipe operation 256 points e Max number of points for write operation 16 bits 4000 all ite Character size x q points Max number of monitor device points Consecutive bit devices O x x Max number of points for write operation Bit momentary bit RST bit SET RPA bit ALT 40 Data SET 16 bits 20 Data SET 32 bits 10 as 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 4 Overlap Setting 4 4 1 Figure and object GOT A900 series Bom GOT F900 series Meow When the GOT is used for display objects are displayed on figures regardless of the setting order of objects 4 4 2 Objects GOT A900 series om GOT F900 series For the following combinations only objects can be displayed with overlap When the GOT is used for display for other cases not shown below the overlap area becomes improper display Make adjustments on the object display conditions to prevent overlap o
200. e System Signel 1 4 Device dialog box Set the Device No O External I O Function output information 7 O System Signel 2 O Device dialog box Set the Device No O GOT Error Code O On screen Base Screen Number O On screen Window Screen Number O Numeric Value Input Number O Current Cursor Position O Previous Cursor Position Key Code Input mO Previous Numeric Value Input 32bit O Current Numeric Value Input 32bit O Currently printed report screen m O External I O Function Input Information mO Cursor Position s Numeric Value Input O Select All Unselect 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series m Read device _ System Signel 1 _ _ _ Device dialog box Set the Device No Current Recipe No m Write device On screen Base Screen Number Device dialog box Set the Device No On screen Overlap Base Screen Number 1 On screen Overlap Base Screen Number 2 After input Object ID System Signel 2 Reserve area 10 points 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function gt Setting up GOT Action System information from Contents of Help 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 3 Observe st
201. e data is updated upon completion of all processings set on the screen Errors of about 10ms may occur depending on the processing setting Also the object not processed by the security function will not be the target e Monitor scan time counter GS10 Incremented every time one cycle of processing set on the display screen is completed e Script common information GS14 Stores the error information of the script functions b15tob13 b12 b11 to b9 b8 b7 b6 to b1 bO bO Turns ON at error occurrence b1 to b6 Reserved b7 Turns ON at BCD error occurrence b8 Turns ON at zero division error occurrence b9 to b11 Reserved b12 Turns ON at communication error occurrence b13 to b15 Reserved 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT Script error pointer GS15 Stores the pointer value 16 to 46 which indicates the address where the script error data GS16 to 47 is stored Default 1 Every time error data is stored the pointer value changes as indicated below 4 gt 46 gt 48 gt 20 gt gt 46 gt 16 The pointer value denotes the address of the script error data GS16 to 47 as indicated below Example 1 When GS15 is 16 error data is stored into GS16 17 Example 2 When GS15 is 46 error data is stored into GS46 47 Script error data GS16 to GS47 Store the script numbers and error codes of the scripts in error in due order starting from the higher addresses of the storage area When an err
202. e parameter setting screen of the motion monitor function or servo amplifier monitor function to prevent accidental changes from being made to the parameter settings of the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU or servo amplifier at the connection destination e Data transfer operation Set a password at the time of uploading the screen data of the GOT to GT Designer to prevent accidental upload operation 1 Function outline a Changes the object functions which can be performed by specific persons On the following screen where many object functions have been set change the operative items depending on operators En 150 eee For display changing the production target Security level 1 3 Power seereereeserererreenen Switches line power ON OFF Line control screen Security level 2 Production target Run eeeeeereeereerereeeenee Starts the line Security level 1 Stop srreeeseeseeeeseaes Stops the line Power Run Stop Ladder Security level 15 Ladder sertesestreeeeeeeeee Starts the ladder monitor function Password Security level 15 Password eeeeeen Shows the password input screen Security level 0 Operation items Operative x Inoperative P operator Power Ladder display Field worker O Field responsible 2 person
203. e z on fort foe 10 mo Os vimo x coo SWD x 1 Setting cursor moving distance 6 Setting screen display data object 2 Enlarging screen ID device 3 Setting grid color 7 Setting screen background color 4 Grid distance 8 Setting screen background color 5 Switching ON OFF object functions pattern 9 Setting screen color pattern 10 Switching screen drawn target GOT F900 series only 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 6 Toolbar Figure Object This is where the figure object setting items laid out in the tool palette appear as buttons Move the cursor onto any tool button and click it to perform the corresponding function 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 4MOAOC AAD aK m BORA TH o SaNa HM as Names of tool buttons 1 Line 6 Clock display function 2 Line freedom 7 Comment display function 3 Rectangle 8 Alarm history display function 4 Polygon 19 Alarm list display function 5 Circle 20 Part display function 6 Arc 21 Part movement display function 7 Sector 22 Lamp display function 8 Scale 23 Panel meter display function 9 Text 24 Line trend bar graph display function 10 Paint 25 Statistics graph display function 1 Insert BMP format file 26 Scatter chart display function 2 Insert DXF format file 27 Level display function 13 Numerical display function 28 Touch key function 4
204. ecked checked t QnHold display Unchecked checked OBit trigge OBit Bit count setting Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling t O Mask None AND OR XOR t Pattern Set the mask value L O Shift NonelLeft Right L QONo of shift Set the shift count __OExpression Olnput Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up graph display Setting up level display from Contents of Help e Security offset and expression can be set e A level can be displayed at top bottom left or right of a figure e The level display color and filling pattern can be changed when the monitor device value reaches a given value 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 5 Touch Key Functions When Touched Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device Value Change and Screen Switching GOT A900 series zon GOT F900 series Gem The touch functions are designed to perform the following operations when the corresponding touch keys are touched 7 GOT A900 GOT F900 Turns the bit device ON OFF by touching the key E oa Ree ee cre function Changes the word device value by touching the key ro o o Base sw
205. ecution number GS49 to 79 is stored Default 1 Every time an execution number is stored the pointer value changes as indicated below Script execution pointer 4 49 gt 50 gt 51 gt gt 79 gt 49 The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number GS49 to 79 as indicated below Example 1 When GS48 is 49 the execution number is stored into GS49 Example 2 When GS48 is 79 the execution number is stored into GS79 GS49 to 79 Script execution number Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history GS384 Script common information write only Turning ON GS384 0 clears the script error data GS16 to 47 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT Set the monitor time of one script in seconds If a script does not end the preset time after its start script processing is stopped Error code 15 The initial setting of 0 is processed as 10 seconds Setting Example 1 second Set whether initial operation will be performed or not when any of the following conditions is enabled e The screen script function is used e The execution condition trigger type selected is Rise Fall e Switching to the screen having scripts takes place iat ay Bit Value of Ni GS386 Screen script initial operation Setting Example Trigger Type Tae Initial Operation Bit Bit ON to OFF to OFF OFF Bit OFF to ON ON Other than 0 Not performed Bit ON to OFF OFF e Refer to Sectio
206. ed Y Specify the header repeated lines i Vv End 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 5 Installation Operations of System Program GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series POINT When using GT SoftGOT you need not perform this operation 6 5 1 Types of system program installed on GOT To operate the GOT the following system programs must be installed on the GOT POINT e If the system program of GT Designer used to create the screen data is newer than the system program installed in the GOT unit the older system program may not be compatible with some new functions When downloading the screen data it is recommended to install the system program again e The versions leftmost versions of the basic function OS PLC communication driver and extended function OS to be installed into the GOT should be the same If they are different the GOT will not operate Example 1 Example 2 Basic function OS Ver 9 Basic function OS Ver 9 PLC communication driver Ver 9 PLC communication driver Ver 8 Extended function OS Ver 9 Extended function OS Ver 8 The GOT operates The GOT does not operate 1 Standard monitor OS The system program to control the monitor function 2 Communication driver The driver to communicate between the GOT and the PLC CPU 3 Extended function OS Installed as required a The system programs whi
207. ed Figures in bitmap file format displayed on the GOT F900 series are 3 types 256 colors 16 colors and black and white There are some colors that cannot be displayed on some GOT types and they are displayed in reduced colors Ex e 256 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color black and white white and blue GOT F900 series e 16 color bitmap is displayed in reduced colors on the 8 color black and white white and blue GOT F900 series 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 2 4 Character size by magnification 1 When the GOT A900 series is used Length x Width dot Length magnification magnification 8x 112 8 x 128 16x 112 16 x 128 32x 112 32x 128 48 x 16 48 x 32 48 x 48 48 x 64 48 x 80 48 x 96 48x112 48x 128 64 x 16 64 x 32 64 x 48 64 x 64 64 x 80 64 x 96 64x 112 64x 128 80 x 16 80 x 32 80 x 48 80 x 64 80 x 80 80 x 96 80x 112 80x 128 96 x 16 96 x 32 96 x 48 96 x 64 96 x 80 96 x 96 96 x 112 96 x 128 112 x 16 112x32 112x48 112x64 112x80 112x96 112x112 112x128 128 x 16 128x32 128x48 128x64 128x80 128x96 128x112 128 x 128 e Set the character magnification for both length and width to the multiple of 2 4 6 and 8 if high quality font is used e If a part with high quality font is displayed with the part display part movement display function on the screen which is not using high quality font the part is not displayed in high quality font When any of characters on the screen are changed t
208. ed BIN BCD Real m Data length 16bit 32bit OShape Unchecked checked l O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape OFrame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 t O Plate Designation of Backgroud 0 to 255 OColor Designation of Color 0 to 255 t OBlink _No Low Middle High Text Text and Plate O Reverse Unchecked checked o tO Format Signed Decimal Unsigned Decimal Real Octal Binary Hexadecimal Right alignment Left alignment Center t O Disp all digits Unchecked checked O High quality font Unchecked checked t O Size Heightxwidth size setting mO Digits Digit count setting ODecimal point Digit count setting C Adjust decimal point range O a OMask None AND t O Pattern Set the mask value o 32 OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count t O Monitor word Olnput Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression OWrite word ___ Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression Of Case Setting for each case OSet O Edit Display Format dialog box ee Set the display attribute changing conditional expression and display attribute O ns di i e OSecurity Display OSecurity Input OOffset Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Set the Device No OWrite device Unchecked che
209. ed to the place adjacent to the input value indication frame e A single touch switch is used to perform multiple operations corresponding to multiple states e As soon as the alarm list system alarm function detects an error the troubleshooting screen appears automatically Complicated arithmetic processing e A polynomial operation which was difficult to be represented in a ladder program is represented simply on a single line Ladder program Script D6 K100 DB T D3 D4 D gt D5 D1 D2 100 D3 D4 100 t L D K100 D L D6 D D5 e Not only four fundamental operations but also various application arithmetic functions such as trigonometric and exponential functions can be used optionally Unlimited application fields e The corresponding year month and day are found by the entry of year month and day and the entry of the number of days When will it be 345 days after May 20 2000 April 30 2001 e The day of the week is found by the entry of year month and day What day of the week is February 21 1961 Tuesday 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 3 MELSOFT Easy to understand programming language As ascript is a language type program like the C language all you need is entry level programming knowledge to create programs Programming editors available on the market You can use the familiar text editors e g Microsoft Windows standard memo pad Wordpad for programming to improve program produ
210. eeceeeeeeeeceeeeneeeeaeeeeaeeseaeeesaaeeseaeeceaeescaeeseaeeseaaeeseaeescaeeseaeeseeeseeaeessaees 5 2 5 1 1 Numerical display function shows word device data as a numerical value cceceeeeeee 5 2 5 1 2 Data list display function lists multiple word device states as numerical values 0 0 5 5 5 1 3 ASCII display function shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character string 5 8 5 1 4 Clock display function reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU cccccceessesesstesseseeeeetenes 5 11 5 2 Message Display FUNCIONS y A A a a aa a a a a E A a TA a A A NRSA 5 14 5 2 1 Comment display function shows a comment corresponding to ON OFF or value of monitor device s ssssssssnssneeneenernneneeneee 5 14 5 2 2 Alarm history display function shows a history of occurrence times comments and others when a condition is enabled 5 18 5 2 3 Alarm list display function shows the error information of the system at error occurrence 5 24 53 Animation Display Functions 2 4 24 00 aed head ei ae eed aaea ee 5 27 5 3 1 Part display function shows a part screen corresponding to a device ceeceeseeeeteeeteeeeees 5 27 5 3 2 Part movement display function Shows the movement of a part corresponding to a device 5 30 5 3 3 Lamp display function changes the lit up color of a lamp with a device value 0 5 33 5 3 4 Panelmeter display function shows a meter according t
211. eeds depend on the number of objects set on a screen the shape of a figure drawn and the frequencies of transient transmission Object name Bus connection Level Touch key displa Bit pay momentary 160x160 dots Ra pa 6 digits 48x48 48x48 9 E dots dots 240x120 240x120 dots dots gines 2 ines 10 points Drawing 6 digits condition cPudirect Sequential device 02 o2 ozs ozs os 02s o2 os o2 o2 connection Randomdevice o2 o2 os os os os o2 os o2 o2 Computer ink Sequential device os os os os os os o2 os o2 os connection ee MELSECNET 10 connection CC Link connection Remote device station CC Link connection Intelligent device station Ethernet connection Bus connection Display speed Unit s CPU direct connection Computer link connection MELSECNET 10 connection CC Link connection Remote device station App 5 device device device He device device device Pas 0 Sequenti 0 er or Tor f o foroa f oef os fos forf os l seueniadevco o2 o2 025 oz os oas o2 o7 o2 o2 Randomdevice o2 o2 os os os os o2 o7 o2 o2 aee os os os Jos os os a o7 og os ee device 4 0 1 R device a wf ow ae Foe oe vs os oe oe a0 oe oe device gt 5 0 25 25 Random device Sequential device 0 2 App 5 Cyclic e
212. eeeaeeaecaeseeeeaeeaesaeseaeeaesaesaeseaseeseeteaeeaeeas 6 4 6 5 1 Types of system program installed ON GOT ccecceceeseeeeceeceeeeeeeeceeeeaeeaesaeseeseaesaeeaeseeeeaeeaeeaeseeeeaes 6 4 6 5 2 Required knowledge before installation of system program sssssssssssrssrssrsrrsrsrsrsinssnsrnsrnsrnens 6 7 6 5 3 Installation ot ROM BIOS m enee es Lins r E E ai ie aa 6 9 6 5 4 Installation Of OS DAE 6 10 6 6 Download of Screen Data e ccccccsccssesssesssecsseeeeceeeseeeceeeseeeseeeeeeeseaeseeeseseseseseaeseaeseaeseaeseaesesescaeseaeseaeseaeeaas 6 11 6 7 Debugging Of S reen Data siana t hanane atunen iaae aaaea eaaa a eenaa aa daaa ae aaaea a aariaa arrinin Eas 6 12 Te QVOIVIGW a naa N RNE AN N A N A N 7 1 fea We M E eN T E AA A A A A AT 7 1 FAs2 Operating INStr Ct ONS isipite ni geiena aana p bahaan iaaa aaan aai ona aiaia 7 3 7 2 O PECIfiCA ONS ae a a a etal aide eas a ie a eee ee at an ae 7 6 PAN TYPOS ET EN niin Alani sani alan N TE T 7 6 72 2 CONtOl SUUCIUTE soci Siva ei SE A E SS S T S A S E EE E ede E 7 7 7 2 3 Usable data and representation Methods eceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeseaeeeaeeeaeeeaeenaeenaeeeaeeeateas 7 10 72 4 Script Cxecution iiini die anaa aaraa aAa a SEA EAN Ta a aaa dance siete vie was a Vadaa a 7 14 7 3 Settings and Procedure for EX CUtION c ccecceceeseeeececeeeeaeeeecaeeeeeaecaecaeeeaeeaesaesaeeeaseaesaeseeeeateesneeeaseates 7 17 A 6 A 6 TA Froga Examples 4 n240 Sih G nie Hina nee
213. eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeateaeeeaeeeateeaeenatenas 4 27 4 2 1 Types of drawing fiQUIeS aea E A AA T 4 27 4 2 2 Attribute type tof Sele CTO eerren enan AEAEE EAEE TENAR ENERE TATAA AEN AKATERE AET ATETA 4 29 4 2 3 Figures in bitmap file toma recne a 4 31 4 2 4 Character size by MaQnifiCation eecceccecceceeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeceeeeaecaeceeseeeeaecaeseeeeaesaesaeseeseaeeaesaeseaeeateas 4 32 4 2 5 Data Capacity Of each figur Eara a ea ER ER rA TRARRE A ARTERE E NA 4 33 4 3 Types and Specifications of Available Object FUNCTIONS ssesssesseeiererersrsrsrsrsrsisrnrnrnrnennsrsrnrnnrnnenenns 4 34 4 3 1 Types of and restrictions on object functions for setting ee eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeteetieeeaeees 4 34 4 3 2 Specifications of the object functions that May be Set ccccecsceesesseeeseeeseceeeeaecaessaeesseeeaeeeaeeeas 4 37 44 Overlap Set Aea r eeveteh i a a ra a eesti aa aa aa evita bareheaded 4 45 rc afl Fouro and Objatie suana R A A RE 4 45 AAP CDJOCHS a a a a A a aN A a A tei dae eee de de 4 45 r REPA E EIB AN O EAN E AE E A E N AE EE 4 46 A 5AInternal devices of GOT idiin ee BG ee ee ie a 4 46 4 5 2 Device ranges available for the GOT AQ00 SEVi S ecceceseceeceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeaesaesaeeeeeeaeeaeeeseneeateas 4 51 4 5 3 Device ranges available for the GOT F900 series ecceseeceeceeeeeeeceeeeeeaeeaesaeeeeeeaesaeserseeeeateas 4 65 5 1 Data Display Functions cccccceeecee
214. een 1 calls set 40 X number of displayed window screen 1 scripts set 36 X number of displayed window screen 2 calls set 40 X number of displayed window screen 2 scripts set 36 X number of displayed superimpose screen calls set 40 X number of displayed superimpose screen scripts set 5 Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices __ functions D a l2 5 dD O 5 2 0 8 T 5 5 Display attributes S 2 o 5 5 9 512 35 Si 2 2 Others amp lt zZz S o 2 o Z 2 e 3 0 V9 2 5 8 2 a 8 8 52 28 acl 2 8 8 5 8 e Oja x a zl al 2 F g s Ol1s 9 p 42 OJO X OJOLx OJOlO xO x x Max Function setting points per screen Script 256 Gateway setting 20 20 X number of assigned devices 16 20 X number of set GOTs to be monitored 20 4 X number of destinations 2 2 X total number of destination subject and From characters 12 2 X total number of login name and password characters 1 The number within parentheses indicates the maximum number of set points at the maximum setting of the setting item 2 For the touch keys to which ON OFF delays were set the maximum number of set points is 100 points 3 Unusable only when the memory storage function is used 4 Operates only during ON 5 The capacity of the script function set to each window is 0 bytes if the window screen is not disp
215. een as a single screen 1 Function outline a Shows the same display information on multiple screens Necessary screen memory space display setting is for one screen only D10 D20 Base screen 2 Base screen 4 Base screen 8 Setting Portion Settings Base screen 4 call setting dialog box Screen type Base screen No 2 Base screen 8 call setting dialog box Screen type Base screen No 2 b Shows multiple called screens on a single screen nn ee Base screen 1 Base screen 2 Base screen 5 Setting Portion Settings Screen type Base screen No 1 Screen type Base screen No 2 Base screen 5 call setting dialog box c Shows a screen having a layered nest structure As a single screen can display up to 16 levels of nesting screen design of high freedom can be Paes Only the GOT A900 aC A 1254 A 1254 B 348 B 348 DS ite Bae A 1254 A 1254 BE o gs wens indow screen1 348 i i Alle i lala M ol maea nil Bsr pene a pee Base screen 5 Base screen 1 Window screen 3 Base screen 6 Level 1 l Level 2 l Level 3 5 111 5 111 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT
216. eieie Connection with AB SLC500 Connection with ABSLC500 supported Connection with AB MicroLogix1000 1500 x vc sc boc ve e fe ve se Poe J xe supported Connection with AB MicroLogix1200 supported suppor P lt PX TX P lt P lt P lt P lt P lt PT PT PO Toshiba PLC connection xx x PEEP CAKA CA CA A CI E CE Connection with T3 and T3H supported X X x X xxxlelolerereeeeeeereeLeTe xix x xxx xx xIxIx xloj oleloejo eo EIEE E E E Sea E E E E EA EAA SIEMENS PLC connection x xix xixix xix ololoro ejejejejejejo Connection with SIMATIC 57 300 supported SSS EES RSS xlx x x x lt x aeaea EEEE series CEEE xxx EIR EI ES EEE E B z ee S PDP PPP p ppp bole Q00J Q00 Q01CPU theme connection PERE ERR eee eee Supports connection with the motion controller CPU Q172CPU Q173CPU BRRRREREE a E mm GEG A a a a a Inverter connection o ooo eea 1 Only F940WGOT compatible x 2 Only GT SoftGOT compatible x3 When using the Ethernet communication module A9GT J71E71 T whose hardware version is E or later use GT Works Version 5 26C or later or GT Designer Version 5 26C or later The module cannot be used with GT Works Version 5 P to Y or GT Designer Version 5 P to Y EJIE EE Eg Ea eao ATE Sra S So PEPR EEE EEIE lt X App 23 App 23 APPENDICES MELSOFT 4 GT Designer functions added a Added figure drawing functions SW2 SW3 SW4 Figure Drawn Description of Added Function TAT
217. en b You can touch the RGB screen to return to the monitor screen This function can be selected from among the following six different operations FULL L UP L DW Touching any place in the The window changes to the The window changes to the window switches it to monitor screen only when monitor screen only when the monitor screen you touch its top left you touch its bottom left R UP R DW NONE f ara SSS The window changes to the The window changes to the The window does not monitor screen only when monitor screen only when change to the monitor you touch its top right you touch its bottom right screen if you touch it 4 21 4 21 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 1 Instructions for touching the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen When you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen the RGB screen display hide selection bit does not turn off Hence you cannot change the GOT monitor screen to the RGB screen again since the RGB screen display hide selection bit is on When you have touched the RGB screen to change it to the GOT monitor screen turn off the RGB screen display hide selection bit Using the script function allows you to turn off the RGB s
218. en number 10 Superimpose window display position NaThe added options are available Name A B C Main screen Window screen Options of product A Options of product B Options of product C Window screen number Screen 1 Touch button A to display window screen 3 a 7 A The added options are available mr gt Name e added options are available A A B Name x 5 T D A B PEE FJ E D C B E F G l C l 2 Touch button B to display window screen 7 The added options are available Name The added options are available A A B Name A B c A B C B C S a E y C l J The added options are available A Name The added options are available A A B Name A B T A B P aja B F c C 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 6 Precautions for display of the superimpose window screen If the superimpose window sc
219. ence value using the hard copy function while the monitor screen with value display function for 50 points is displayed Type of printer to be used 1 k Printer applicable for Printer applicable for Printer applicable for PCL pore Connection ESC P command ESC P command black command 16 colors and white CPU direct connection 1sec 40min 40 9min 31 3min Bus connection 1sec 39min 40 9min 30 9min Computer link 1sec 39min 39 1min 30 6min MELSECNET connection data link system 1sec 42min 42 4min 32 2min MELSECNET connection network system 1sec 37min 40 1min 33 5min CPU direct connection 1sec 08min 33 4min 27 9min Bus connection 1sec 09min 31 0min 27 0min Computer link 1sec 07min 33 4min 26 7min MELSECNET connection data link system 1sec 09min 31 1min 28 2min MELSECNET connection network system 1sec 09min 31 5min 28 0min CPU direct connection 1sec 10min 32 3min 27 1min Bus connection 1sec 08min 30 4min 28 1min A970GOT Computer link 1sec 07min 33 1min 26 8min MELSECNET connection data link system 1sec 08min 30 4min 28 1min MELSECNET connection network system 1sec 08min 33 5min 28 0min CPU direct connection 30 5min 20 3min 22 9min Bus connection 30 3min 21 2min 23 0min Computer link 21 5min 22 8min MELSECNET connection data link system 31 5min 19 5min 22 5min MELSECNET connection network system 33 6min 19 3min 23 0min
220. er Not allowed for use Version H or later Not allowed for use Not allowed for use Version P or later Version Q or later Version S or later Gateway function 1 If either of the following status has occurred during use of the flash PC card perform the scan disk of the flash PC card on the personal computer used e PC card related error code 334 351 352 353 354 and 355 was detected by the alarm list System Alarm function e The Data transfer error message was displayed when you executed the screen copy of the utility functions 2 The corresponding ROM_BIOS is factory installed in the GOT unit e How to check the ROM_BIOS version installed in the GOT Use the memory information function of the GOT MEMORY INFORMATION S W Version e ROM BIOS Ver 2 0 ROM BIOS e SYSTEM COMM DRIVER PLC MONITOR LADDER A SP UNIT MON e SP UNIT DATA SP RECIPE WAVE NET WORK MON Ver 2 0 Ver 2 0 0 Ver 2 0 0 ESC PRINT B CODE Not Installed Ver 2 0 0 Ver 2 0 0 Not Installed Ver 2 0 0 Version 2 If ROM_BIOS of the GOT is not compatible reinstall ROM_BIOS of the GT Designer in the GOT e How to check the ROM_BIOS version of the GT Designer Select the Communication Install ROM_BIOS menu and check the version of ROM_BIOS in the ROM_BIOS Install dialog box 3 Install the OS in the GOT 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONIT
221. er to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Type Offset in Keyword of Help 5 123 5 123 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 9 4 Expression function performs operation processing of PLC CPU on GOT GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function operates on the device value set to the corresponding object with the preset calculation expression to perform the corresponding object function with the resultant value 1 Function outline a Shows a monitor device D100 value as a numerical value having a decimal point Operation expression monitor 100 Operation 50 100 0 5 Setting Portion Settings lt Basio gt tab Device D100 lt Format gt tab Format Real Decimal point 1 lt Expression gt tab GOT A900 series only _ Expression 100 1 Numerical Display dialog box 1 Not needed when you use the function that automatically adjusts the number of decimal digits of the numerical display functions b Writes a numerical value with a decimal point to the PLC CPU Operation expression write W Xx 100 operation expression monitor 100 0 5 o o Sail TT il Operation monitor 50 100 0 5 Operation input 0 9x 100 90 Setting Portion Settings Device D100
222. eration of each line is controlled with a touch key and the control states of three lines are represented by one lamp Part Operation Definition All lines stop Control status lamp The lamp color and comment are changed according to the operating states of the lines Line 1 key Used to control the operation of line 1 Line 2 key Used to control the operation of line 2 Line 3 key Used to control the operation of line 3 Stop all ares key Used to stop all lines stop all lines 2 Monitor screen settings Object Type Setting Item Setting Indication range V 0 Lamp color 182 Characters All lines stop Indication range V 1 Lamp color 3 Characters Line 1 running Indication range V 2 Lamp color Characters Line 2 running Indication range V 3 Lamp color Control status _ lamp Lamp indication function word nen Characters Line 3 running Indication method word Indication range V 4 Lamp color Characters Lines 1 2 running Indication range V 5 Lamp color Characters Lines 1 3 running Indication range V 6 Lamp color Characters Lines 2 3 running Indication range V 7 Lamp color 162 Characters Lines 1 2 3 running oan Touch key function bit i Operation setting Bit ALT Touch key function bit Operation sein Bit ALT Monitordevice XB Touch key function bit Operation setting Bit ALT Monitor device Stop all lin
223. eries is used o o 0 D100 50 100230 Alt LL Setting Portion Settings 150 150 150 300 0 300 0 300 Meter 1 Meter 1 Meter 1 Device D100 Needle 255 Meter panel 109 Text Meter 1 lt Form gt tab Type Top1 2 Upper Fixed 300 Lower Fixed 0 Range 200 lt V Needle 0 Scale value display V x H 1 Upper 300 Lower 0 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 series 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The panelmeter display function consists of the following setting items Panelmeter dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O 8 L Q Device Device ODevice dialog box Designation of device to be monitor oO 16bit 32bit co _QShape ____ Q Image List dialog box _ Specify the panel meter display frame OFrame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 OPlate Designation of Background 0 to 255 t ONeedle Specify the panel meter display Needle 0 to 255 IL Meter panel Unchecked checked_ Specify the panel meter display Plate 0 to 255 OText O Text dialog box Set the text display position and spacing from frame t OSize Des
224. es key Touch key function bit Bit SET 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Program example Data format 16 bit signed BIN Trigger type Any time if b X1 OF F amp amp b X2 OFF amp amp b X3 OFF w D10 0 stores 0 into D10 if lines 1 2 and 3 are all OFF if b X1 ON amp amp b X2 OF F amp amp b X3 OFF welt stores 1 into D10 if line 1 is ON and lines 2 and 3 are OFF if b X1 OFF amp amp b X2 ON amp amp b X3 OFF Oe stores 2 into D10 if line 2 is ON and lines 1 and 3 are OFF if b X1 OFF amp amp b X2 OFF amp amp b X3 ON w D10 3 stores 3 into D10 if line 3 is ON and lines 1 and 2 are OFF if b X1 ON amp amp b X2 ON amp amp b X3 OFF w D10 4 stores 4 into D10 if lines 1 and 2 are ON and line 3 is OFF if b X1 ON amp amp b X2 OF F amp amp b X3 ON w D10 5 stores 5 into D10 if lines 1 and 3 are ON and line 2 is OFF if b X1 OFF amp amp b X2 ON amp amp b X3 ON w D10 6 stores 6 into D10 if lines 2 and 3 are ON and line 1 is OFF if lb X1 ON amp amp b X2 ON amp amp b X3 ON w D10 7 stores 7 into D10 if lines 1 2 and 3 are ON if b XO0 ON if all lines stop turns ON rst b X1 turns OFF line 1 st b X2 turns OFF line 2 turns OFF line 3 Iturns OFF all lines stop rst b X3 rst b
225. es the following data Turning on off the corresponding bit device controls the operation of the video RGB screen Bi et r Description Bit Status Remarks Position F F Valid when video window is open f full N Cl d Selectiori tor fulor elip Q Clip mode is selected Can be changed while video window is being mode OFF Full mode is selected displayed placement screen OFF Base screen is selected automatically when the b1 is ON ON Transparency processing is performed OFF Transparency processing is not performed ON Specified color is transmitted through OFF Other than specified color is transmitted Valid when b1 and b2 are on through Selection of whether size aa Valid when Valid when video window is open ON Size is not changed FE i i is changed or not when TAN Can be changed while video window is being z OFF Size is changed video window is touched displayed ON Valid only while video window is being ON Freeze frame picture is selected displayed as moving picture OFF Moving picture is selected OFF Valid only while video window is being displayed as freeze frame picture Selection of transparency processing Selection of thru color specifying method Selection of moving or freeze frame picture 2 3 4 ON Video windows are displayed in front of lection of vi i i e echon 3 video Window oe aP ang test pees Can be changed while video window is being display pr
226. esigner You can confirm the actual screen display using the preview display function of GT Designer 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT GT Designer screen A956WGOT screen 2 If you run the monitor A9S56WGOT the screen may flicker depending on the type of object shape fill pattern used when creating images This is due to the specifications of the LCD panel and not a malfunction Be sure to check the combination of type of pattern and color on the machine before using a Examples of patterns where flicker is likely to occur As in the following pattern examples a pattern of lines points or the like whose colors change line by line horizontal pattern particularly tends to cause a screen to flicker A basic figure or the like that uses a horizontal pattern may also flicker Also a figure or the like that is clear in light and shade is likely to flicker When Background black Foreground white and others are selected lt Examples of patterns where flicker is likely to occur gt ee EEE b How to prevent flicker EEE e Flicker is reduced by selecting a solid color pattern e When using a horizontal pattern or the like flicker is reduced by selecting similar colors for foreground and background Example1 Select a solid color pattern for Pattern Example2 Select similar colors for Foreground and Pattern A solid color pattern 8 Background Foreground Blue 3 Background Light blue 31 Pattern
227. et value change e Buffer memory s current value change e For restrictions on the test function refer to Section 4 3 1 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 8 Barcode function writes data read with barcode reader to PLC CPU GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function writes to the PLC CPU the data which are read with a barcode reader connected to the GOT 1 Function outline a Reads barcode data with a barcode reader and writes them to the specified devices DO to D5 of the PLC CPU Barcode Read data PLC CPU 123456789 GOT poo eee 123456789 D1 3231H Data s_ 9 21 D2 3433H Data 43 D3 3635H Data 65 87 9 o0 D4 38374 Data D5 20394 Data Setting Portion Settings Device DO Barcode dialog box g Device points 6 2 Setting items The barcode function consists of the following setting items e Barcode dialog box m ODevice O Device dialog box Set the Device No ODevice points ODelete 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function gt Setting up Barcode from Contents of Help POINT For restriction
228. evels Called screens are displayed in the following numerical order Since screens displayed later are shown on earlier ones latter screens come to front Order of call setting to one screen on GT Designer 2000 8 15 QO all Line 1 Called screen level order A 1254 B 1254 C 348 D 348 Line 3 v e Up to 16 nesting levels not including the base screen are displayed When multiple call settings were made on the same screen screens are shown in the setting order on GT Designer Among called screens having a layered nest structure deeper screens are shown later A screen having multiple call settings is displayed later than a called screen having a layered structure The security function observe status function and script function set on called screens are also processed in the same order as the called screen displaying order 5 114 5 114 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b Instructions for superimposing a called screen When superimposed a called screen is shown as described below and therefore setting should be made carefully 1 When screen displays are overlapped e Fig
229. example acos lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the arccosine of lt word device or constant gt Arccosine atan Statement example atan lt word device or constant gt Application Function Calculates the arctangent of lt word device or constant gt Arctangent Function arithmetic Statement example abs lt word device or constant gt operation Function Calculates the absolute value of lt word device or constant gt Absolute value acos Statement example log lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the logarithm of lt word device or constant gt Logarithm Statement example log10 lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the logarithm common logarithm of base 10 lt word device or constant gt Common logarithm ele i ley n Statement example exp lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the power of base e lt word device or constant gt Exponent Statement example 1dexp lt word device 1 or constant 1 gt lt word device 2 or constant 2 gt 1dexp Function Calculates the lt word device 2 or constant 2 gt power of lt word device 1 or constant 1 gt lt 2 Exponential product exp Statement example sqrt lt word device or constant gt Function Calculates the square root of lt word device or constant gt Square root Statement example Constant Constant Function Represents a constant decimal nexadecimal BCD real number
230. f multiple objects on the GOT at the same time 1 Combination with touch key Objects created without the touch key Numerical input and ASCII input can be overlapped with the touch key When setting the touch key set Shape to No Do not set Text 2 Combination with level display Objects created with numerical display and comment display can be overlapped with the level display only one object for one level display function In this case the display mode in numerical display and comment display must be designated to Transparent or XOR If not designated Transparent becomes effective as the default Ex 1 When the display mode is designated to Transparent It is effective when using a color display Ex 2 When the display mode is designated to XOR In contrast to the object in Transparent the overlap area of the level can be inverted It is effective when using a black and white display FULL Numerical display or comment display placed over level display e A numerical comment display is not blinked flickered e A numerical comment display is not highlighted e A numerical comment display may not be provided properly if it comes out of the display frame of a level display e A numerical comment display may not be provided properly if a frame figure has been set to the numerical or comment display function e A numerical comment display is updated only when a level display has changed
231. fied device status ON OFF device value e The display can be superimposed on a level display or used for XOR display Only one value may be superimposed on a level display e Values including decimal points can be displayed or calculated 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Expression can be set 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 1 2 Data list display function lists multiple word device states as numerical values GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function gathers the states of multiple word devices periodically and lists them as numerical values 1 Function outline a Sorts a list in the preset priority according to the states of the corresponding word devices D11 D21 D31 D41 ___GOT display setting 030 y Machining Plan Output Failure D31 be Machine D10 D11 012 D32 Machine D20 D21 D22 D40 a Machine D30 D31 D32 D41 Machine D40 D41 D42 D42 F Sorted in ascending order on the basis of this column List is sorted every time the display is updated No bese Plan Output Failure No Machining Plan Output Failure pi Machine htop i te aa 1 Machine 100 3 2 Machine 100 2 3 gt lt 2 Machine 100 39 3 a Machine 100 30 3 3 Machine 166 aa lt 8 4 Machine 499 4o 3 4 a Meme 100 at s 100 41 3
232. g transition gt 2 3 4 gt Touch key for switching to specified screen is touched p Touch key for switching to higher level is touched 1 gt 3 gt 5 gt 3 gt 1 e The level information is made invalid when the GOT is powered off Note that if you switch power off then on again on any midway level the screen displayed first will be on the top level g Closes a window screen Spe Base screen a switching device o o Base screen No 1 Base screen No 1 Base screen No 1 rid 9 gt LIGH IL Window screen v No 1 Specified value 1 Specified value 0 Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Window Basic Next screen Fixed 1 Window Basic Next screen Fixed 0 POINT By setting this function to window screens window screens can be switched h Starts the ladder monitor function e g extended function Ladder monitor function appears Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Exlended Extended action Ladder monitor The touch key extended function can be used to set the following different items e Utility e Ladder monitor 4 e Key window e System monitor e Test wi
233. gnation of Color 0 to 255 ORule Designation of Rule 0 to 255 __c Reverse Checked unchecked O 0O Rows mO Display rows Row count setting t O Columns Column count setting t O_Label Checked unchecked t O Interval Vertical x horizontal spacing setting IL O Size Heightx width size setting O Sort Number Ascending Descending No sort OSort Attr column QHigh quality font Checked unchecked O List m ORow n O Edit Rows dialog box Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Comment No O Comment List dialog box Set the display comment Label pattern _Designation of Label pattern Label foreground _Designation of Label foreground 0 to 255 Label background Designation of Label background 0 to 255 OCol n O Edit Columus dialog box Format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Real Octal Binary Hexadecimal Right alignment Left alignment Center L Disp all digits add 0 Digits Digit count setting O Decimal point Digit count setting Device _ BCD Signed BIN Unsigned BIN O Title Set the column item name Color 0 to 255 t6bit S2bit Expression O Mask None AND OR XOR O Pattern Set the mask value O Shift None Left Right O No of shift Set the shift count Expression Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expre
234. gt description Additional 1 main description w TMP0001 0 while w TMP0000 lt w D100 if w TMP0000 1900 4 w TMP0001 w TMP0001 1 inti Omitted w TMP0010 w TMP0002 w TMP0003 w TMP0004 1 w D200 w TMP0010 7 Additional description Changing device variable describing method include lt stdio h gt main Description gt wTMP0001 0 change I S Fe Description while _ wTMP0000_ lt wD100_ change 1 Description if wTMP0000__ 1900 4 change i Description gt _wTMP0001__ wTMP0001_ 1 change i aana Omitted aridis Description gt wTMP0010__ wTMP0002_ wTMP0003__ change Description _wTMP0004__ 1 change i Description _wD200__ wTMP0010__ 7 change 1 i l To the next page commercially available text editor and crate a frame with main Also describe include lt stdio h gt at the beginning 3 Change the device variable describing method for script function into that for C language When changing the variables for script function into those for C language changing them in the following definitions enables smooth restoration to the GOT script Definition 1 w gt _w Definition 2 b gt _b Definition 3 J gt __ Using the batch replacement function of the commercially available text editor will be convenient to make changes 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS
235. h B loeo D10 eee b3 b2ib1 bO Z gt OFF ON OFF ON i Figures and objects of specified color can be transmitted through Through color si ecif in Through Se E Other than specified color is transmitted through placka are displayed o on the video window seamans mmnm e pE Specified color is transmitted through Jinhe video window e The touch LFONT L and numerical ASCII input function under video windows are made usable by performing transparency processing e When placing a video window in the overlap window 1 transparency processing is performed automatically if the transmission processing selection bit b2 is OFF 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 9 Examples of using video windows a Examples of using full mode 1 A single video window is used to display channels 1 to 4 and a touch key is used to switch between the channels S hra nN Cannel1 Cannel2 Cannel3 Cannel4 Change from 1 to 2 to 3 to 4 Set video input signal then again from 1 D108 2 X axis NTSC or PAL Channel No pio7_osiey no 2 While channel 1 is being displayed change the video window size KS D Size2 Size1 Size0 Device D100 Set video input signal 1 Cha
236. h line having the GOT internal device GD GB Note that the monitor processing of the GOT may delay when GD internal devices GD GB are used in man 6 Precautions for converting Digital s script language The LS devices described in Digital s script language are designed to be free from a substitution delay Hence when Digital s script language using LS devices as shown in Example 1 in 5 is converted different operation may be performed on the GOT As shown in Example 2 in 5 use temporary works in Digital s script language using LS devices to prevent a substitution delay 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 2 Specifications This section describes the specifications of the script functions 7 2 1 Types There are the following types of script functions 1 Project script function This type of script operates for the whole project created on GT Designer The project script function can always be performed during online processing of the GOT A script is executed when its preset execution condition is enabled Up to 256 scripts can be set to one project e Operating for the whole project a project script is useful for the following case Example As soon as the alarm list system alarm function detects an error the troubleshooting screen appears automatically e The project script monitor devices are always operating Therefore note that a larger number of monitor points will make the monitor screen slower in response
237. h object operates while the RGB screen is being displayed e While the RGB screen is being displayed the RGB screen cannot be printed or a BMP file cannot be saved on a PC card if you use the hardcopy function 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 2 Screen save for RGB screen To use the screen save function while the RGB screen is being displayed the display power saving function of the personal computer must be active If it is inactive the screen save function set on the GOT is invalid Screen save for an RGB screen is performed in the following sequence Only when human sensor setting is made TATTENTION NO SIGNEL TATTENTION NO SIGNEL PLEASE CHECK PLEASE CHECK INPUT OR CONNECTION INPUT OR CONNECTION The above message appears The display message remains After elapse of screen save after detection of display unchanged after elapse of human time set on GOT side power saving status of personal sensor off delay time set on GOT enters screen save status computer GOT side POINT e When the GOT monitor screen is being displayed screen save operates independently of whether the display power saving function of the personal computer is active or not For details of the GOT screen save function refer to the GOT A900 series operating manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Extended Option Functions Manual e If the RGB signal
238. h quality font Scale display Scale points Panel meter display 24 Shape Frame Plate Scale display Scale points Graph Style Width e Max number of graphs 8 x TO OpMEEST se e Max number of points 100 saving Shape Frame Plate Scale display Scale points Graph Style Width e Max number of graphs 8 x T6 ORNISEE Xg e Max number of points 500 fa f S g HHH HH Shape Frame Plate Graph Pattern Background O i a a a N Max number of graphs 8 N N oO OaE e e a i i i ee ea Cra OO i OOS Oat Ot ed o a SAO eo o J o J o es ea esi 4 SPECIFICATION Scatter chart Level display Touch key Max setting points per screen 24 Memory saving 16 x1 256 10 1 2 Used memory space bytes 128 4 number of stored memories X number of points 1 MELSOFT Specifications Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices __ functions lo x When stored onto PC card sa ea ee ee ee ne ed ed x fe ee Display attributes Bit device eos a O Rise Fall epe oeo a Bit Trigger E E a a Offset designation Station number changing ol oOo o0 O o Security O Shape Frame Plate No of Partitions Direciton Scale display Scale points Graph Pattern Background Graph Rectangle graph Circle graph e Graph type Sample batch display e Number of points that may be saved into memory
239. he GT Designer to be started m Execute GT Designerresssssssssssseeseeeeees Starts the GT Designer L Exit ssesseseeseeeneesnsceneresessessensosaeensuase Ends the data GT Converter Start Conversion sssssererrerreressnneneneeeseesseneneneneneesenennene Executes the conversion of the monitor screen data for GOT900 Screen ___ Log display sseeseersrerresereseennesennnene Displays the result of conversion to the monitor screen data for GOT900 Help Help toi ssssssssssseerererernenenenennnnnnne Operation help for the GT Converter ADOUt sssssssssssesnnsnsrnsnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnennnnnnnn Displays the software version of the installed GT Converter File Opens the debugging file Closes the debugging file Saves the debugging file Saves the current debugging file and editing continues Ends the GT Debugger Communication gt Start ssseeseeeeeeerrrsereseereseeteneeeeseneneenen Starts communication with the GOT L End sususonosssosossssussososossososonss or Ends communication with the GOT Setting Registration Device srrr rrereteeeeeeeee Registers device for debugging Delete Device Deletes registered device from device registration el 0 0 aseenaan aaan Sets the communication port and the communication speed Help Reference topics srrrsssstteesssteeesseeeeees Operation help for GT Debugger About tecerettereneneerenene
240. hecked Repeat range JE O Start OEnd O Start OEnd O End 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Report Function Introduction Report Function from Contents of Help e For restrictions on the report function refer to Section 4 3 1 e You can print the numerical data of word devices and special function module s buffer memory in decimal or hexadecimal e You can print numerical data and comments associated with bit ON OFF e You can print the rules and characters drawn on the report screen It should be noted that the report screen displays all rules in continuous line but vertical rules are actually printed as e You can register data of up to eight reports eight report screens to a single project e You can set up to 256 points of print objects values comments on a single report screen e You can perform data operations 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 Other Object Functions This section explains the objects which have various functions other than the monitor and data input functions There are the following other object functions e Hardcopy function e eee Prints a displayed monitor screen on a printer e System information function Confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU e Observe status function Writes to the PLC CPU when a condition is en
241. ideo window RGB screen Selection Swite TISIPSn lt Video RGB gt tab 5 dialog box Device D100 1 Two or more video windows cannot be displayed in the clip mode 2 Setting items The video display function consists of the following setting items e Switching Screen dialog box 8 Video window RGB screen Unchecked checked_ A t QO Use A9GT 80V4 Setting of the number of video windows Z A9GT 80V4R1 to be displayed OUse A9GT 80R1 S RGB screen only 5 O Device O Device dialog box e Setting of device number Vv o Data OBIN OBCD 5 109 5 109 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings 1 Choose Help Firstly 2 Choose Setup operations using the Common menu Setting up screen switching devices Video windows can be used with the A985GOT V only 5 8 14 RGB screen display function GOT A900 series O GOT F900 series x This function displays a personal computer screen on the GOT POINT Refer to Section 4 1 5 for details of the RGB screen 1 Function outline a When the RGB display controlling bit turns on the screen of a personal computer is displayed on the GOT RGB screen display hide selection bit ON b15 Turning the bit on changes the GOT monitor screen to the RGB screen D10015 b2 b1 bO
242. ignation of Size V x H 0 5 to 8 OColor Designation of Color 0 to 255 QhHigh quality font Unchecked checked o O Type 1 4 Top Bottom Left Right Top Right Top Left Bottom Left Bottom Right eee 1 2 Top Bottom Left Right 3 4 Full circle m ODireciton Clockwise Counterclockwise H OPoint 9 90 180 270 tO Data eee Wet BIN Unsigned BIN Real BCD O Meter frame Unchecked checked Upper Lower Fixed Numerical setting Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No fo OEdit OEdit Display Format dialog box 0 me D O Range O Edit range dialog box Set the device value range in O Needle Specify the needle color 0 to 255 Delete Deletion of table setting OScale display Unchecked checked m OScale points Color OScale value display Unchecked checked OSize Designation of size height x width of numerical value to be displayed 1 OValue no Designation of number of numerical values to be displayed 2 to 11 L QUpper Lower Designation of upper lower limit value to be displayed L OColor _ Designation of display color of numerical Setting of Security 0 to 15 value 0 to 255 Device dialog box Specify the device to be offset None AND OR XOR Set the mask value None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count OExpression O Input Expression dialog box Setting of Defined case
243. igner Version5 For the converting operation refer to the SW3NIW A8GOTP Drawing Setting Software Package Operating Manual Monitor Screen Creation Manual 1 Install the software by executing setup exe in the GOT800 folder on the CD ROM START Vv Start the GT Converter j Select the monitor screen dataforGOT800 fer Refer to 2 Convert it to the monitor screen data for GOT900 and store the new data f Refer to 3 y Start the GT Designer are and edit the new data j essee Refer to 4 App 1 App 1 APPENDICES MELSOFT 1 Screen make up of GT Converter ie GT Converter Project Screen Help _H Menu bar s s alte _ Main window 2 Selecting the data to be converted a Perform either of the following operations e Click the icon on the tool bar e Select the Project Open menu b As the Open dialog box appears select the file type e A8GOT file Screen data for GOT800 series e PRO file GP PRO PBIII DOS version made by Digital e PRW file GP PRO PBIII for Windows 95 Ver 2 0 Ver 2 1 made by Digital GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 3 0 made by Digital Select the file type File name Files of type a gotp got The data of the Digital package that may be converted is only the data created by GP PRO PBIII DOS GP PRO PBIII for Windows 95 Ver 2 0 Ver 2 1 and GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 3 0
244. ile number to be displayed OSymbol Setting j OScript Symbol dialog box Character string replacement m OEditor Select O Editor Select dialog box E Notepad Use Word Pad OSelect Path Setting of path to editor Option Editor option designation 5 107 5 107 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function gt Setting up Script from Contents of Help 5 108 5 108 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 13 Video display function GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series This function displays the picture taken with a video camera in the GOT video window Refer to Section 4 1 4 for details of video windows used in the video display function 1 Function outline a The picture taken with a video is displayed on the GOT as is Full mode In the full mode up to four video windows can be displayed at the same time Video picture Setting Portion Settings itching S Video window RGB screen Selection Swite ree lt Video RGB gt tab i dialog box Device D100 b The specified part of the picture taken with a video can be displayed on the GOT Clip mode Video picture Specified part QS oe L Setting Portion Settings itching S V
245. in 1 digit N TP TA CP CA w N007255 The file number is described in 3 TT TN CU CD digits and the element number in 3 b TT004255 R CN digits The data block DB is described in D w D000100000 4 digits and the data word DW in 5 digits LR AR HR WR b HR207 w B000003 b MB02343 Devices that may be monitored on the GOT depend on the monitor destination PLC CPU Refer to Section 4 8 for details 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 4 Usable temporary works and representation methods Up to 1024 points of temporary works may be used with global variables double word type without initial values The temporary work representation changes with the specified device type as indicated below Device Type Statement Example Representation Example w TMPO001 Bit device b temporary work number bit position b TMP1023 01 Temporary works are used in the following cases Example 1 Prevention of a write delay in substitution processing performed for the PLC CPU refer to Section 7 1 2 Example 2 Write destination device of while statement refer to Section 7 2 2 Example 3 Variable for operation When substituting a DO 1 value into D1 and substituting a D1 1 value into D2 w TMP0001 w DO0 1 w D1 w TMP0001 w D2 w TMP0001 1 substitutes DO 1 into TMP0001 substitutes TMP0001 into D1 substitutes TMP0001 1 into D2 The temporary work is a 32 bit global
246. ing 50M bytes or more Compatible with Windows 95 Windows 98 WindowsNT 4 0 Windows Me Windows 2000 Professional Mouse keyboard printer Compatible with Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 WindowsNT 4 0 Windows CD ROM drive Me Windows 2000 Professional Depending on the language of your Operating System this software may not start In such a case start this software after setting the Regional Settings within Control Panel of Windows 95 Windows 98 WindowsNT 4 0 to English 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSOFT 2 2 System Configuration of Data Transfer and Document Creation 2 2 1 System configuration 1 When the GOT A900 is used RS 232C cable GOT A900 Series IBM PC AT or 100 compatible OS program and monitoring screen data can be transferred written on the PC card a PC card with PCMCIA Ver 2 1 Z GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 J Printer cable Windows compatible printer 1 Refer to Item 2 2 2 for wiring diagram of RS 232C 2 Refer to Item 2 2 3 for available PC cards 2 SYSTEM CONFIGURATION MELSOFT 2 When the GOT F900 series is used RS 232C cable GOT F900 series IBM PC AT or 100 compatible AO Printer cable Windows
247. ion AND Input value is calculated 4 using the expression Data is written to destination device y Numerical Operation using A Mask value expression ee lt operation display Monitor word operation p AND Written value is calculated using the expression If no expression is specified x1 It is opposite to the write shift operation For example if the shift operation is performed 2 bits to the right the reverse shift operation is carried out 2 bits to the left 5 127 5 127 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5 128 MELSOFT gt 2 What arithmetic is done by write mask operation Write mask operation is different from ordinary logical product AND operation The following arithmetic is done Operation result write value processing result up to shift operation AND mask value OR present value AND reverse pattern of mask value Example This example assumes the following setting Devi i ri evice value prior to write AAAAH present value Processing result up to shift operation Device value prior to write present value and mask value are ANDed and reverse pattern of mask value are ANDed 5555H AND OOFFH 0055H AAAAH AND FF00H AAOOH The above two processing results are ORed and its result is handled as a write value 0055H OR AAOOH AA55H 5 Expression performed when GOT F900 series is used There are the following methods for expression perfo
248. ion refer to Section 4 3 1 e The operation panel is incompatible with the operation screens dedicated to the utility menu system monitoring function ladder monitoring function special module monitoring function list editor function and motion monitor function If you have pressed the touch key and operation panel at the same time both are made valid and the one detected first is processed first 5 100 5 100 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 10 Time action function performs specified operation at preset time GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function performs the following operations at the preset times of day on the preset days of week e Turns a bit device ON OFF e Writes a value to a word device GOT A900 series only e Plays a sound file from an external speaker GOT A900 series only 1 Function outline a Holds MO ON between 8 00 AM and 5 00 PM from Monday to Friday OFF t Mo Kafka O t ON MO OFF OFF MO 7 g Starting End Starting End time time time time Setting Portion Settings lt Time gt tab GOT A900 series only Mode Daily Start 8h Omin Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri End 17h Omin lt Time gt tab GOT F900 series only Start 8h Omin Osec Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri End 17h Omin Osec lt Action gt tab Bit Device MO b Plays sound 1 and writes 9999 to D100 at 8 00 AM on Monday and plays sound 2
249. ion ee Contents gt tab Device D10 PC card Use lt Read Trigger gt Trigger 1 tab X2 ON time 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items MELSOFT The recipe function consists of the following setting items e Recipe dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series 5 93 oggit OPecipe Attribute Of Operation Contents it dialog box ORecipe name Set the recipe operation name O Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No O Device Setting of Device points 1 to 8192 points Data type Signed 16bit Unsigned 16bit Signed 32bit Unsigned 32bit File register Unchecked checked O Drive _OFile name OFile File name OPC card Not used Use In the case of a file not being used a file will be created with the recipe device Use Not set recipe device value Read Trigger Trigger 1 Device ODevice dialog box Setting of Device No ON Off Trigger 2 Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No ON Off Write Trigger Trigger 1 Device ODevice dialog box Setting of Device No ON Off Trigger 2 Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No On Off Eve value Setting of Device value O Copy Copying of recipe operation O Paste Creation of copied recipe operation duplicate
250. ion sequence up down OEdit OEdit Display Format dialog box 9et the switching method for the case where t_OWindow OKey Action Window conditional expression is not applicable switching dialog box ONext OFixed screen l ODevice O Device dialog box Setting of Device No Data type Bit Word BIN16 Word BCD 16 Type Overlap Window1 Overlap Window2 Superimpose Window Action for bit E ce E E E A NE i Same as the settings of Operation setting Action for bit l Key operation setting base switching dialog box pooh ccs hae Ang mig dso Wem pan ene ah pee ee SE la etre cheat Recta tae Weary ay sing elem eg aged Meee By ere FA T CEE ey aR Eee oe ee Me aye eRe guest get eg te AEs ae gate I iSame as the settings of Operation setting Action _ i i for word tab in ee I l To the following page Key operation setting base switching dialog box 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS From the previous page MELSOFT Ne __ Station O Key Action Switching O ce 2 Station No dialog box ONext O Host station OOther NW No Station No Q Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No O Data type Bit Word BIN16 LOMode hee Word BCD 16 OScreen _O Base Overlap window1 Overlap Type wind
251. iority OFF Video windows are displayed at rear of A displayed overlap and test windows Reserved Valid when video window is opened first after power on of GOT Cannot be changed thereafter Selection of video picture ON 720x480 dots are selected Valid yhen video window Js openga first after power on of GOT luti FF 640 x4 A resolution O 640 x 480 dots are selected Cannot be changed thereafter ON Valid only when GOT monitor screen is displayed OFF Valid only when RGB screen is displayed Valid when Valid when video window is open Selection of video input ON Input in PAL system signal format OFF Input in NTSC system b2 Selection of RGB screen ON RGB screen is displayed display or hide 5 OFF GOT monitor screen is displayed o ak oa x 1 With the exception of b15 selection is made for all video windows 2 The following operations cannot be performed when the bit is on Open a video window The video window cannot be opened when it is not being displayed Close the video window Change the display position of the video window 3 In case the power supply of GOT is turned on while the bit is ON the video window is not shown In order to show the video window the power supply of GOT should be turned on while the bit is off 4 In case the other bit is turned on simultaneously it is with no effect the b5 takes priority 5 When any of the utility function system monitor f
252. iss das Move destination ID 4 Ascii Input B Basic gt tab Device D20 Option gt tab User ID 2 ii In i vice x pica ease ae a Move destination ID 3 User ID 3 a Device D Ascii InputC i lt Basic gt tab evice D30 lt Option gt tab Move destination ID 1 Ascii Input D lt Basic gt tab Device D40 User ID 4 lt Option gt tab Move destination ID 2 Screen auxiliar setting y Cursor Movement Defined key action User ID order 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items The ASCII input function consists of the following setting items e Ascii Input dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series ODevice Device _ O Device dialog box Set the Device No O E OShape Unchecked checked aa O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape OFrame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 O Text Designation of Color 0 to 255 O Blink No Low Middle High E Text Text and Plate Reverse Unchecked checked o O Size Heightxwidth size setting Digits Digit count setting O Option t QOSecurity Display 3 t QSecurity Input ze on 2 OOffset Checked unchecked Device Device dialog box Set the Device No wi 1 OUser ID Unchecked checked Device Set the User ID OMove destinatio
253. itching function Switches the base screen by touching the key Eon Window switching function Switches the window screen by touching the key a Extended function Switches to the extended function screen such as ladder monitor or test window by touching the key Station switching function Switches the station by touching the key Creation of numerical ASCII input key 1 Function outline a Turns a bit device ON OFF By changing the operation type any of the following four operations can be performed Bit SET I When touched the specified bit turns ON Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Bit Device X1 Action Set Bit RST o o o R W When touched the specified bit turns OFF Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Bit Device X2 Action Reset Bit ALT st ALe ON gt OFF When touched the currently specified bit status is reversed Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Bit Device X3 Action Alternate Bit momentary o o nS l KA d S l Only while touched the specified bit turns ON Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Bit Device X4 Action Momentary 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS
254. itional expression for word device range Bit Bit count setting Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling 5 65 5 65 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Display Key trigger Bit Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Shape No Basic figure Basic figure ONOFF Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Switch Y Designation of Switch 0 to 255 Text Text dialog box Set the touch key text Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 VxH Designation of Size VxH Action Copy from ON Copy ON time text setting to OFF time text setting Bit Key Action Bit dialog box Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Action Set Alternate Reset Momentary Word Key Action Word dialog box Device Device dialog box Set the Device No m 16bit 32bit ____ Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Type Fixed Set the fixed value to be written to word device Indirect Device Device dialog box Initial value 4 Condition value condition Reset value Base Key Action Base switching Basic Previous dialog box L Edit Change the setting Fixed Screen Image dialog box Choo
255. itoring the objects For details refer to the operating manual for the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 compatible Connection System Manual e The devices for the following objects do not allow the switching station number Even when a Switching station number is instructed the GOT continues the monitoring using the same device specified by the object e Alarm list 4 e Switching screen e Trend graph display gt 4 e Alarm history display e Hardcopy function e Switching station number e System information function e Report Function Clock display e Scatter chart display function 1 1 Unusable only when the memory save function is used e The station number can be changed by performing station number switching operation with the touch key Refer to Section 5 5 for the station number switching operation with the touch key Monitoring the Monitoring the host station other station NW No 2 EI Station No 10 5 130 5 130 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT CHAPTER6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT 6 1 Operations to Be Set for the First Time GOT A900 series mom GOT F900 series mom The following describes the outline of the procedures for common setting required for preparing screens on the GT Designer For operation procedures of each item refer to the help windo
256. l a When using the GOT A900 series OLevel device Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device Edit Password dialog box Setting of Password Delete Password Verify dialog box Deletion of level password ODate Transmission Register Password dialog box Setting of Password Utility Delete Password Verify dialog box Deletion of Password b When using the GOT F900 series Level device Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Setting of Device Edit Password dialog box Setting of Password Delete Password Verify dialog box Deletion of level password Date Transmission Register Password dialog box Setting of Password Utility Delete Password Verify dialog box Deletion of Password Display password input error e Screen Auxiliary Setting dialog box Set the security level for the screen Security Setting of Security 0 to 15 e Security function setting object setting dialog box Set the security level for each object Input object m O Security Display Setting of Security 0 to 15 Security Input Setting of Security 0 to 15 Display object Security Setting of Security 0 to 15
257. l mail icos ru NPP Uralelektra Sverdlova 11a RU 620027 Ekaterinburg Phone 7 34 32 53 27 45 Fax 7 34 32 53 27 45 e mail elektra etel ru STC Drive Technique Poslannikov Per 9 str 1 RU 107005 Moscow Phone 7 095 786 21 00 Fax 7 095 786 21 01 e mail info privod ru RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA RUSSIA Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC NDUSTRIAL AUTOMATION Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 2102 486 0 Hotline 49 1805 000 765 Fax 49 2102 486 7170 www mitsubishi automation de megfa mail meg mee com www mitsubishi automation com
258. l ad a P Addition of input triqqer device setting function Addition of the function which displays values with decimal points after automatic xl xx x x Px x xpx gt pxpx px xpxix px px dx adjustment made with the the Numerical object function Addition of the function which displays high quality characters Character display Addition of the function which can change display attributes according to the specified device sid bade saul Vaal all Pcl ic Mal Vial Vice cal EA Mca Una ca status ON OFF device value Addition of input triqqer device setting function Numerical Addition of the function which input displays values with decimal points after automatic xl x gt x xixiTx xpx x Pxpx x xpxpPxtx dx px adjustment made with the the object function App 24 App 24 APPENDICES MELSOFT b Object functions added Function Ajai clelFiH yialclalclalrialolrls k e Ru feq Panel meter Barcode Statistics display Addition of the function which allows the panel meter shape to be selected function Connect the barcode reader to the GOT Add the function that writes the data read with a barcode reader into the PLC CPU Addition of the function which sets the display direction in a O 0 0 10 101 0 010 10 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 00o Rectangle graph chart Touch key App 25 x by the comment function in character string display Addition of the touch key extended function
259. l register GS GSO to GS511 1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data 2 If the device specified is outside the range the object set to the out of range device may not be displayed In that case check and correct the device 4 58 4 58 Bit device Word device 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 9 Sharp PLC 20000 to 75777 Timer counter contact T C0000 to T C1777 T C0000 to T C1777 60000 to b3776 09000 to 09776 19000 to 19776 29000 to 29776 39000 to 39776 49000 to 49776 59000 to 59776 69000 to 69776 79000 to 79776 89000 to 89776 99000 to 99776 E0000 to E0776 E1000 to E1776 E2000 to E2776 E3000 to E3776 E4000 to E4776 E5000 to E5776 E6000 to E6776 E7000 to E7776 1000000 to 1177776 2000000 to 2177776 3000000 to 3177776 File register 4000000 to 4177776 5000000 to 5177776 6000000 to 6177776 7000000 to 7177776 Timer counter current value Register 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 10 Toshiba PLC a PROSEC T Series Available range for setting monitor External input X X0000 to X511F External output Y Y0000 to Y511F Internal relay R R0000 to R999F Special relay S S0000 to S255F Link register relay Z Z0000 to Z999F Link relay L LO000 to L255F Timer contact T x4 T000 to T999 Counter contact C 4 C000 to C511 Bit device Designated bit of the following word devices except timer Word device bit x5 current value and counter current value XW
260. layed a b Memory capacity for setting of high quality font The memory capacity of high quality font is 128 bytes for 1 character regardless of the character size Maximum setting count when the cycle trigger is set for the display The maximum setting count in one screen for the cycle trigger is 100 points Maximum setting count of objects The maximum setting count of objects in one screen is 512 points If 513 or more objects are set in one screen note that 513th object becomes invalid 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT d Data capacity of object stored on PC card Hard disk 1 Capacities of data stored on the PC card When using the A985 97 x 960 95 956WGOT Depending on the object used it has a function which can store data on the PC card The following table lists the capacity of data stored onto the PC card on an object basis Object Name Data Capacity Bytes Report function Number of devices x 8 36 number of devices x 8 8 x collection count When 3072 points of alarm history displays are saved Alarm history function In Cumulative mode Store CSV format Approx 97k bytes Approx 400k bytes In History mode Store CSV format Approx 72k bytes Approx 360k bytes Data capacity per screen see below x number of screens stored Data Capacity per Screen Kbytes Model At BMP file At JPEG file A985GOT V A985GOT A970GOT TB Hard copy function A956WGOT Recipe function 117 x number
261. le Set the Sampling Interval Start Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Rise Fall Time Set the Time End Device _ Device dialog box Set the Device No Rise Fall Time Set the Time Frequency Set the Frequency Use Sampling Unchecked Checked 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function Setting up Sampling from Contents of Help Sampling results can be printed by a printer connected to the GOT This cannot be performed when the PLC is connected by RS 232C communication 5 105 5 105 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 12 Script function exercises display control under GOT program GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function controls a GOT display under the GOT s original programs hereafter abbreviated to scripts Using the GOT side scripts to exercise GOT display control load on the system side PLC CPU microcomputer etc display can be reduced significantly Refer to Chapter7 Script functions for details of the script function This chapter provides details on the specifications setting procedures program examples and troubleshooting of the script function Also refer to Section 7 4 for the setting methods of specific examples explained in the function outline and the program data of scripts 1 Function o
262. led as follows according to the destination GOT PC card e If installed to GOT The OS is installed to the built in memory of the GOT via RS 232C e If installed to PC card The OS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the personal computer Mount the PC card which contains the OS to the GOT and install the OS to the built in memory of the GOT by the following procedure 1 Mount the PC card to the GOT 2 Turn OFF the GOT 3 Remove the communication board communication unit option unit from the GOT If the GOT has the built in communication interface disconnect the communication cable 4 Turn ON the PC card access switch 5 Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT display simultaneously 6 The message to indicate that OS is being installed appears on the GOT display and installation is carried out 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 6 Download of Screen Data GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for downloading the screen data For further details refer to the help window of the GT Designer Select the Communication Download to GOT Monitor Data menu The download dialog box for the monitor data is displayed Select the destination GOT PC card Select whether to download all data or part of data If part of data is selected de
263. link No Low Middle High Numeral Numeral and Plate 0O Reverse Unchecked checked o O Format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Real Octal Binary Hexadecimal Right alignment Left alignment Center O Disp all digits add 0 Unchecked checked O High quality font Unchecked checked O Size Height x width size setting O Digits Digit count setting Decimal point Digit count setting Adjust decimal point range Extended tab OEdit Display Format dialog box Set the display attribute changing conditional expression and display attribute OOffset Checked Unchecked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No ODisplay mode Transparent XOR OJ Trigger t O Trigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No I 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range t Olnitial display Unchecked checked t OhHold display Unchecked checked OBit trigger OBit Bit count setting O Expression Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling t Mask None AND OR XOR t OPattern Set the mask value t OShift None Left Right
264. list display fUNCtION 0 cee 5 5 Numerical display function cece 5 2 Data input function ASCII input function 5 72 Numerical input function 5 68 Index 1 Data list display function s 5 5 Pepu ggih in eae T 6 12 Debugging of screen data cceeeees 6 12 Dialog BOX cenuar niiair 3 10 Display color areae eeaeee ei 4 29 Display speed of object App 6 Pownload oeo es nE TAT TS 6 11 Download of screen data 6 11 Drawing sheet ceeeeeseeeseeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeees App 10 Drawing figures and attribute types 4 27 Dropdown MENU ceeeeeeeseeeteeeeeeeeeeaeeeaeeees 3 6 DXF Til svete tit Al tn uate ve 4 27 E Extended function OS 6 4 F FONOS ice i e Sed dug cbush bag sues bugs diet dig eSes Deceaee 4 27 Floating alarm function n 5 24 G Graph display function Bar graph display function eee 5 45 Level display function 5 54 Line graph display function cee 5 42 Statistical graph display function 5 51 Trend graph display function ee 5 39 Scatter chart display function 0 0 0 5 54 H Hardcopy UNCION arisi eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 98 Hard diSk Spaca osuran 2 1 How to use help ssssseseesssesesrerisrrsrrerrsrrsn 3 17 Install OS personal computer GOT 2 6 10 ROM_BIOS personal computer GOT 6 9 Installation Of OS 6 10 Installation of ROM_BIOS cceceeeeeeeee 6 9 I
265. m Print Cancel 2 Printing the current topic Click the Print button Setting up numerical display Outline of numerical display am The numerical display function enables the display of data set to a device Operation Procedure 1 Perform either of the following operations Click on L on the tool palette Select the Draw Data Display Numerical Display menu 2 Specify the following using the Numerical Display dialog box displayed and then click the OK button 3 Adoti uired size of the numerical display appears at the 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT CHAPTER4 SPECIFICATION 1 Table at top right of each section The table at top right of each section indicates the following meanings GOT Type GOT AQ00 series GOT F900 series ee Function available x Function unavailable 4 1 Types and Number of Screens Created GOT A900 series O GOT F900 series O When the GOT A900 series is used the base screen window screen two display methods overlap window and superimpose window and report screen are created 4 When the GOT F900 series is used the base screen and key window screen display method overlap window can be created Close key Movement key P window screen Touch the close key of the overlap window screen and the overlap window closes To move the overlap window screen touch the moveme
266. me can be set 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 4 2 Line graph display function shows word device values on line graph GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series o This function gathers the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph 1 Function outline a Batch collects the data of multiple word devices and shows a line graph 100 gt 200 300 D101 50 gt 0 gt 400 D102 300 gt 400 gt 100 D103 _0 100 0 400 gt 400 300 400 400 300 300 2004 1004 100 od 04 100 101 102 103 104 100 101 102 103 104 Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tao Graph Line lt Monitor Device gt tab Device D100 Continuous lt Form gt tab Number 1 lt Graph gt tab Scale display V x H Scale points 5 x 5 Points 15 GOT A900 series Scale value display V x H 2 1 lt Others gt tab Value no 5 x 5 Jccase gt tad upper A00 Lower g GOT F900 series Upper 400 x 104 Lower 0 x 100 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 series 400 300 200 100 a 100 101 102 103 104 b When the line graph display is updated the old graph is not erased but a new graph is overlaid on the old one Only when the GOT A900 series is displayed D100 100 gt 200 300 D101 50 0 400 D102 300 gt 400 100 D103 _0 gt 100 gt 0 400 400 300
267. mode can be changed to a freeze frame picture When two or more video windows are displayed in the full mode all of them are changed to freeze frame pictures Moving picture freeze frame picture selection bit ON b5 Turning the bit on changes moving picture into freeze frame picture D10 b5 b4 b3 b2 b1 bO v OFF ON POINT e While the screen is still touching operation for a video window and switching from the PLC are invalid Hence note that the following operations are disabled while the screen is still Window channel changing size changing display position changing closing and opening of video window e f the picture of the video window placed in the overlap window is changed to a freeze frame picture moving the overlap window causes the video picture to be hidden 8 Transparency processing You can specify the through color to display the objects and figures located under a video window You can choose either of Other than specified color is transmitted through and Specified color is transmitted through When two or more video windows are displayed all windows are transmission processed Transmission processing selection bit ON b2 Turning the bit on performs transmission processing Thru color specifying method selection bit ON b3 Turning the bit on causes the specified color to be transmitted throug
268. n eeeeeeeeeteeteteeeteteee 5 104 SCA e E E ankle ne hive 4 27 Scatter chart display function eseee 5 51 Screen Configuration cccecceseseeeeeeeeeees 3 1 Security FUNCTION ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeees 5 118 Shift operation ceeeceeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeaes 5 126 Sound UNGON erer ar aa 5 95 PID OE r dase eas cata ie rai a ee 3 10 Standard monitor OS n se 6 4 Station number switching function 5 129 Statistical graph display function 4 5 48 Status bal ssav aniinesiieeineiitvaedincen 3 5 Superimpose WiIndOwW ccecceseeeeeeeeeeees 4 8 System configuration System configuration of data transfer and T document Creation s s s 2 2 System configuration Of MONItOriNg SCFEEN eee eeeeeeeeeeteeeee 2 1 System information fUNCtION ceeee 5 82 System program cecceeeeeceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeteees 6 4 Tabirini ehana eR ai e 3 10 Template Panelkiturntin wide tian a a aa 3 12 PAIS wet E A A 3 12 Parts display area 3 12 Parts liIDPAry eeeeeesceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeees 3 12 Pasting method of parts s s 3 14 Tree display area 3 13 Test TUNCtON ici ie ei a hn ee 5 59 VOX sedis ana a ehh oc neae cat dees 4 27 TOK DOX eerk See ete 3 10 Time action function 0 0 eee eee eeeeeeeeeteeeteeeee 5 101 Tithe bardinaire a 3 2 POOL DAN a a A AE A AR AAAA A 3 3 Tool palette Attribute setting list DOX eee 3 16 Cursor butt
269. n 3 This program example uses GOT special registers GS The GOT special registers GS store the GOT s internal information communication states script error information and others A wide variety of operations can be achieved by making proper connections of the GOT special registers GS with the script functions Refer to Section 4 5 for details of the GOT special registers GS 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS 7 5 Troubleshooting MELSOFT The script functions do not provide error indications and so on caused by errors They stop the script in error to prevent the other scripts and various monitor functions from stopping Hence refer to the following description and debug each script without fail 7 5 1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger Since a script is like the C language slight corrections made to it allows simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger e g Microsoft Visual C This function is effective for debugging a complicated script which uses many control statements Use the following procedure to perform simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger Changing file extension text1 txt texti c 1 Change the script file extension txt created for the GOT into a C language source file extension c Additional description of main and include 2 Open the C language source file on the Additional gt include lt stdio h
270. n 4 5 for details of the GOT special registers GS Script monitor time 0 default Performed e For details of the system monitor function refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Compatible Extended Option Functions 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Error code list Error Definition Corrective Action 1 Initialization of project script functions e Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts failed e Reduce the number of project script functions to be executed 2 Initialization of screen script functions e Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and base screens base failed e Reduce the number of screen script functions base to be executed e Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and superimpose Initialization of screen script functions screens superimpose window failed e Reduce the number of screen script functions superimpose window to be executed e Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window Initialization of screen script functions screens 1 overlap window 1 failed e Reduce the number of screen script functions overlap window 1 to be executed e Reduce the number of monitor device points of scripts and overlap window Initialization of screen script functions screens 2 overlap window 2 failed e Reduce the number of screen script functions overlap window 2 to be executed
271. n ID Unchecked checked Device Set the Move destination ID Screen Setting O Screen Auxiliary Setting Set the Defined key action O OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Range Bit trigge m 16bit 32bit m Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real Device Device dialog box Set the DeviceNo ORange Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range OBit trigger To Bit count setting Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Device Device _ Device dialog box Set the Device No Shape Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 Text Designation of Color 0 to 255 Size Height x width size setting m Digits Digit count setting Alignment Left Right Center Trigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Device Device dialog box Set the Device No m User ID Unchecked checked L Setting of User ID No Move destin Unchecked checked Setting of Move destination ID No Screen setting Screen auxiliary setting dialog box itis Confirmation key operation setting 3 Setting method Refer to the f
272. n SS PC card O O OFF i A D20 f0 D21 20 D22 30 D23 40 2 Specified device values are read and stored onto PC card Setting Portion Portion Settings Device D20 lt Operation Contents gt tab Device points 4 PC card Use Not set recipe device value lt Read eee a Trigger 1 eee a X2 ON time Periodically writing device states to a PC card in the method b to back up the data enables a return to the status b when a next startup or the like is made in the method a For the GOT F900 series both the read and write triggers should be set in the recipe operation setting since the read data are stored into the GOT c Using the spreadsheet or similar software of the personal computer edit the device values read from the PLC CPU and saved on the PC card as a CSV format file Only when the GOT A900 series except the A950 handy GOT is used 2 Perform read edit etc of PC card file on spreadsheet software or like 1 Device value data read from PLC CPU 3 Save on PC card in CSV file format the device value data edited on personal computer and use them on GOT Specify the same file name as that of the edit source Setting Portion Portion Settings Device points 3 lt Operat
273. n clock function refer to the A9GT RS2T serial communication board user s manual 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 2 Message Display Functions The message display functions show comments or error messages corresponding to the PLC CPU status They are available in the following types e Comment display function Shows a comment corresponding to a device state e Alarm history display function Shows occurrence times and comments when condition is enabled e Alarm list display function Shows error messages or comments in list form 5 2 1 Comment display function Shows a comment corresponding to ON OFF or value of monitor device GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series men This function shows a comment corresponding to ON OFF of a bit device or the specified range of a word device 1 Function outline a Shows a comment corresponding to ON OFF of a bit device X0 OFF ae o JE ON X0 is OFF X0 is ON Setting Portion Settings Device XO b Shows a comment corresponding to the value of a word device D100 When the GOT F900 series is used this function shows the comment of the comment number equal to the value of the word device D100 Current production Current production mai Today s production quantity is 1 quantity is 10 is completed Settings Device D10
274. n dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series m Parts Fixed No Image List dialog box Set the Part No switching Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Data type Bit Word m Display mode Replay Positioning Top left Center Type Part Mark Image List dialog box Set the Part No Fixed Color 0 to 255 Case Bit No Image List dialog box Set the Part No __ Color _ Designation of Color 0 to 255 Case Word Start No Preview comment Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Set the Part No 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up animation display gt Setting up part display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset and expression for display method case word only can be set e Parts screens registered by the user can be displayed e The user created base window screen can be displayed as a part e According to the change of the device only the white area of the registered part figure can be displayed in a different color Only one part can be used e Part display color and attributes can be changed according to the
275. n simulator GOT900 Abbreviations generic terms_and special terms GT Converter Abbreviation of data conversion software GT Converter for GOT900 Software CPU GT Debugger Abbreviation of debugging software GT Debugger GT Manager Abbreviation of GT Manager data editing software for GOT900 GT SoftGOT Abbreviation of GT SoftGOT monitoring software GX Simulator fan term of SW O D5C LLT E ladder logic test tool function software packages SW5D5C LLT E or later QCPU Q Mode Generic term of QOOJCPU QOO0CPU Q01CPU Q02CPU Q02HCPU QO6HCPU Q12HCPU Q25HCPU Q12PHCPU and Q25PHCPU CPU units AnACPU Generic term of A2ACPU A2ACPU S1 and A3ACPU CPU units Q ACPU Large Type eneric term of ANUCPU AnACPU and AnNCPU CPU units A2US H CPU eneric term of A2USCPU AZUSCPU S1 and AZUSHCPU S1 CPU units AnS H CPU eneric term of A1SCPU A1SHCPU A2SCPU and A2SHCPU CPU units A1SJ H CPU eneric term of A1SJCPU S3 and A1SJHCPU CPU units ACPU Small Type eneric term of A2US H CPU AnS H CPU and A1SJ H CPU CPU units eneric term of ACPU Large Type ACPU Small Type and A1FXCPU CPU units Generic term of FXO series FXON series FXOS series FX1 series FX1N series FX1S series FXCPU FX2 series FX2C series FX2N series FX1NS series FX2NC series FX 2N 10GM 20GM eries CPU unit eneric term of A273UCPU A27 3UHCPU A27 3UHCPU S3 A171SCPU S3 A1 71SHCPU Motion controller CPU A172SHCPU Q172CPU Q173CPU CPU unit
276. nction that sets the device as a monitoring device writes the designated data into the device saves the designated device range into the memory card and writes it into the PLC CPU Section 5 8 5 Sound O Function that reproduces the voice file in WAV format and provides a touch sound on the touch key or sounds in status monitoring function Section 5 8 6 Test x2 O Function that displays the test window during display of the monitoring screen to change the device value Section 5 8 7 Overlap screen O Function that retrieves other screen on the current screen for overlap display The retrieved screen is displayed in green frames Section 5 9 1 Operation panel x7 Q Function that allows operation from outside the GOT using an operation panel connected Section 5 8 9 Report 1 7 8 Function that gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the buffer memory of a special function module or to print numerical data and comments associated with bit device ON OFF Section 5 7 Time action Function that performs operation such as device write at the specified time of the day of the week Section 5 8 10 Sampling Function that collects data in the specified cycle or under the bit condition and displays them in a graph or the like Section 5 8 11 Script 1 Unusable on the A950 handy GOT 2 Unusable on the F940 handy GOT 3
277. ndex 1 K L M N O Keyboard sinaia A 2 1 Lamp display function eseeseeseeeeeeeeen 5 33 Level display function eee eeeeeeeeeeeeteeeee 5 54 Tita aria RSR 4 27 Line Tector eona nan ai a n 4 27 Line graph display function eee eee 5 42 ia E E E A E A 4 29 LING WICH eee eee eee eeeeeeneeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeaeeeatenas 4 29 List bOxsiAcsia aati aaa ak 3 10 List Of key CODES eeceeceeeceeeeeteeeeeeeteeteees App 7 Logging report 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeees 5 76 Mask Operation ecceceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeaeeeas 5 7 EALO A E E A A E AT 2 1 Menu Par saen anana TA AAS 3 2 Menu configuration 3 6 Message display function Alarm history display function 0 5 18 Alarm list display function eee 5 24 Comment display function ceeee 5 14 MOUSE win einai aera 2 1 Numerical display function eee 5 2 Numerical input function 5 68 Object function list eeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeees 4 34 Observe status function 0 eceeeeeeeeeteee 5 85 Offset FUNCTION ecceeeteeeeeeeeeteeteteeeeeeeaeees 5 122 Operation environment 2 1 Operation for creating a report screen 6 3 Operations for drawing figures 2 0 06 6 2 Operations for object Setting ceeeee 6 2 Operations for use of conventional model cee eeeeeeeeteeees App 1 Operation panel function s ssssese esseen 5 99
278. ndow shows it in the forefront 4 When you attempt to display the picture of the same channel in multiple video windows it appears only in the last specified video window and the other windows are displayed blue d Touch key disable areas around the video window The displayed video windows of specific sizes have touch key disable areas as indicated below Video widow Right t Bottom 3 IZ j At 720x480 dots At 640x480 dots At 100 720x480 dots 640x480 dots No disable areas No disable areas At 50 360x240 dots 320x240 dots No disable areas 180x120 dots At 25 Disable area 12 dots at right 8 dots at bottom 160x120 dots Disable area 8 dots at bottom 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT e When touching operation is performed to return the size to that at the video window opening time the display position also returns to the position at the video window opening time e The resolution of the video picture input from a video camera should be the same as that of the video window displayed on the GOT The following cases will be happened due to different resolutions Example 1 Video picture resolution 720 x480 dots Video window resolution 640 x480 dots Video window Video picture 640 x 480 dots 720x480 dots ee Not displayed partly Example 2 Video picture resolution 640 x480 dots Video window resolution 720 x480 dots Video window Video picture 720 x 180 dots 640
279. ndow 1 2 e Special function monitor 4 x2 e Start hardcopy e Abort hardcopy e Password e Clock setting e Clean screen e Network monitor e Brightness adjustment e List editor e Motion monitor e Servo amplifier monitor x1 Cannot be set when the A95 GOT is used x2 Cannot be set when the A956WGOT is used 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT i Performs the station switching function The station switching function allows multiple stations to be monitored on the same screen by switching the object device currently monitored on the data link network system to the same device of a different station 1 Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number Monitoring the Monitoring the host station other station 2 ral Station No C Specified station number Other station NW No 2 Station No 10 Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Station No Basic Next station Other NW No 2 Station No 10 Mode All 2 Switches the monitor destination to the specified station number according to ON OFF of the specified bit device When OFF When ON Monitoring the Monitorin itori J g the Monitoring the host station other station other station G Station No 5 Station No 15 When X0 is ON Station No 15 Station No 5 appears Station No 15 appears When OFF Station No 5 Setting
280. ne 1 Line Line 1 Product Engine Product Engine Produ ate Product Engine Production 0 Production Produ fh Production 100 if Settings of line 1 are displayed Touch the production Type production count Engine production Offset value 1 input area of engines setting is complete Comment No 1 Device D100 1 D101 am Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen Line 5 Line Line Product Tire Produ ae Product Eng ey window Production oO Produ Th Production Settings of line 5 are displayed Type the line you want Touch the production Offset value 5 to display input area Comment No 5 Device D100 5 D105 Setting Portion Settings Numerical Input dialog box Device D200 Comment Display dialo pae E ai Bassia dove Jai Device D100 Production Numerical Input dialog box lt Option gt tab Offset Device D200 5 122 5 122 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items MELSOFT The offset function consists of the following setting items e Offset function setting object setting dialog box OOffset Unchecked checked Device 3 Setting method O Device dialog box Setting of Device No Ref
281. ne 4 80pcs Production List Line Name Amount Line Name Amount Line 1 90pcs Line 3 105pcs Line 2 100pcs Line 4 115pcs Line1 110pcs Line 3 125pcs Line2 120pcs Line 4 135pcs Printed when print trigger turns ON first time Products Products Set print objects values Setting Portion Settings Report Comment Setting dialog box Trigger watch cycle 3 minutes Initial Report style Page No lt Format Trigger tab gt tab g Collect trigger type Print trigger Edit Parameter dialog box Report num 1 Sampling num 2 lt Log gt tab ee Over processing Overwrite Delete trigger type Print Log page Not print Rise X10 Rise X100 Set to D100 D101 D102 and D103 respectively Device D100 to D103 Print style Unsigned decimal Digits 3 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items The report function consists of the following setting items e Report Common Setting dialog box Make setting used commonly to all report screens 0O Change page before print Unchecked checked mO Trigger watch cycle _ Set the trigger monitoring cycle 1 to 60 t O Abort trigger type _ None Rise Fall Device Device dialog box Set the Device No 7 O Initialize change page after abo
282. nes fl FStop all lines Stop all lines ii Stop q lines Line 1 running appears Lines 1 3 running appears All lines stop appears c Password input screen with clock limit function The password input screen returns to the previous screen if a correct password is not entered within 10 seconds after it appeared Touching Manager button switches to Manager password input screen Manager password Manager screen Manager 3238 Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 13 135 L25 4328 Manager password input screen returns to 7 previous screen if there is no correct Touch Manager button password entry for 10 seconds Type Manager password Manager screen appears 5 106 5 106 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The script function consists of the following setting items e Script setting dialog box OAdd OScript No Script number setting list OScript View dialog box Choose the Script lOScript Edit dialog box OFile name Script file name designation reference Browse Choose the File name OComment Commernt setting to script file OData Format Signed BIN 16Bit Unsigned BIN 16Bit BCD 16Bit Signed BIN 32Bit Unsigned BIN 32Bit BCD 32Bit Real 32bit OtTrigger Ordinary Format ON OFF Rise Fall Sampling ON Sampling OFF Sampling Sampli
283. next script waits for execution e When a screen change takes place during use of the screen script function the scripts set on the corresponding screen are all executed and the next script then waits for execution e The script is kept stopped until error history clear is performed 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 3 Settings and Procedure for Execution This section provides the settings and procedure for executing the script functions Start Create edit scripts on the text editor commercially available J Refer to Section 7 4 When many control statements were used to create a complicated script perform operation simulation as required with a general C complier settee Refer to Section 7 5 1 Read the created scripts to project data on GT Designer and set the data format trigger type ete iofoto GT Designer BIGIP Make grammar check on the read scripts on GT Designer Refer to GT Designer Help Grammatical Download the project data from the personal computer to the GOT on GT Designer p O Refer to Section 6 6 Start monitoring and check the script operating status using the system monitor function OO Refer to Section 7 5 2 Is operation normal The grammar check function diagnoses whether the created scripts are grammatical or not If a grammatical mistake is found the corresponding script number line number and
284. ng Interval Set the Sampling Interval Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No OPrevious Switch to preceding script file ONext Switch to next script file OScript Edit Script file editing OSyntax check Grammar check on script file OEdit OCopy Copying of script setting OPaste Pasting of script setting ODelete Deletion of script setting OUp Move up the script setting execution order ODown Move down the script setting execution order OScreen Base Window Screen No Type OAdd OScript Editing dialog box Same settings as in project OEdit OCopy Copying of script setting OPaste Pasting of script setting Delete Deletion of script setting Up Move up the script setting execution order ODown Move down the script setting execution order o OEnable internal device GD GB assignment delay m OScript View OScript View dialog box OBrowse Browse dialog box Path reference OScript Edit Script file editing t Path Replace ppt ina box OBefore x g L OAfter L OAIl the same Unchecked passing is checked converted OSyntax Check Grammar check on script file OAIll Check Grammar check on all script files ODelete Deletion of script setting QOScript No Setting of script f
285. nication retry function which restarts Communicati communication if a on setting communication error occurs during transfer of data to from the GOT Improvement in drawing setting operability Toolbars icons App 31 App 31 APPENDICES MELSOFT 5 Added GT Converter data to be converted ews aTetclete atafalclalclale alo Tr a x eTalu Bed Digital s package GP PRO PBIII for Windows 95 Ver 2 0 Ver 2 1 data L tag conversion supported an x x x T E tag conversion supported x x a ze supported E x a Supports S tag conversion AEAEE IE lt Xx ol P x PLC type Memory link SIO Ethernet x x x KERERE RE Addition of the conversion option function that aele ime TIS ine baso sarcen is converted ATTA NE E EAE NA e into the parts window screen or not when Digital package data is converted Digital s package alel zlea eleal GP PRO PBIII for Windows Ver 3 0 data XTX e eana Supports conversion of quality characters and EE E EEE EEE E E E E E ee basic touch key lamp figures of GOT800 series 6 GT Manager function added swiss sw2 swa swat swe ___ Description of Function Added owt Swe SW3 SW4 Uk ale olele n slafcla colalela o efslk P r u bec Addition of the function which erforms cut copy paste on a Project copy per PEP inction project basis xixixi x xi xxxix xx Enables backup onto multiple FDs App 32 App 32 APPENDICES MEL
286. nnel No D108 32 X axis NTSC or PAL 21 0 Size D109 64 Y axis 3 While channels 1 to 4 are being displayed in four video windows change the size of video window 3 Setting Setting 1 Channel No 2 Si 32 X axis Set video input signal 480 Y axis NTSC or PAL 2 Channel No 4 Channel No 2 Si 208 X axis 480 Y axis 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 While channels 1 to 4 are being displayed in four video windows change the video window sizes using the touch key function and script function oi bjere aZ Al Fal ase Al BZA Setting Device Setting Device D106 1 Channel No D114 D107 2 40 32 Size D115 D108 32 X axis D116 D100 Set video input signal D109 480 gt 0 480 Y axis D117 480 Y axis NTSC or PAL D110 2 Channel No D118 4 Channel No D111 2 0 Size D119 2 Size D112 208 32 X axis D120 560 X axis D113 480 0 Y axis D121 480 Y axis Create a script which repeats the following every time the touch key is pressed 1 Window 1 Small to large 2 Window 1 Large to small Window 2 Small to large 3 Window 2 Large to small Window 3 Small to large b Exam
287. nning Produce a sufficient amount of free space on the hard disk before using the drawing software If you have to use the drawing software with an amount of free space that is barely above the requirement save project data as often as possible When GT Simulator is used with GX Developer or GX Simulator free space is required separately Refer to the GX Developer or GX Simulator Operating Manual for the free space required for use of GX Developer or GX Simulator 3 Using a spin box in a dialog box e Do not enter into a spin box a numerical value with a number of digits that drastically exceeds the maximum number of digits that can be entered into the spin box Entering a number of digits that drastically exceeds the maximum allowable number of digits may cause a forcible termination of the program On the Action tab selectable from the Touch key dialog box the spin box provided for selecting a key code does not display the key codes in the order of valid key codes when it displays the key codes for the special keys used by such functions as the alarm history display data list display and alarm list user alarm display When you keep on clicking the button therefore the key codes will not be scrolled forward or backward in the order of the valid key codes Clicking the button when the spin box displays FFEF for example will not display FFBO as the valid key code that comes next in the order To specify such a key code for a special key
288. ns 20 X number of conditions stored in the devine internal each recipe file 108 memory Recipe f When number fe 16 bit stored in the devices ih PC card each recipe file 14 x sum of 32 bit devices in each recipe file Max number of points for write operation Bit momentary bit RST bit SET bit ALT 40 Data SET 16 bits 2 Data SET 32 bits 1 0 0 e Max recipe operation 256 points e Max number of points for write operation 16 bits 8192 32 bits 4096 Max number of sound files 100 Max number of monitor device points aa x RO Wort cevice e kpl ooo x S x ef kbl o 0o S O f x pe OD Floating 1 a f O Consecutive bit devices a 1Project is meer err IBS XX XXO XXO x x 512 points Random bit devices 255 points erla screen Operation panel Print format number Numeri int tormat nu Report type cal of print digits number x x x xX x1 x x x x Real time continuous logging of fraction digits page renewal e Report screen Comment 256 48 number of print digits x Up to 8 screens may be created per project Ti 1592 Time action operation ee cit Re eal a es Max setting count 32 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT Specifications Used memory space bytes 36 40 X number of project scripts set 36 X number of displayed base screen calls set 40 X number of displayed base screen scripts set 36 X number of displayed window scr
289. nt key and then touch the desired position for movement Base screen 4 1 1 Base screen GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This screen is the basic display of the GOT Each screen operates as an individual screen x Max Number Registerable GTSotGot 1024 768 BRS ERE Arcot oT Seot og 80 4096 1 to 32767 A960GOT_ si een A o ascot s2 20 Fosowcot 480 234 Fosocot 320 240 Fosocor 240 80 F cor _ 12 64 1 to 500 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 1 2 Window screen GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series Oe The GOT F900 series except the F920GOT allows only the key window to be created There are 2 window screens the overlap window that pops up on the base screen and the superimpose window that compose contents Up to 1024 window screens can be created Screen numbers can be registered from 1 to 32767 1 Setting range of screen size GOT Type i Sasa Sacer Horizontal x vertical dots Horizontal x vertical dots ae 1280x1024 1024x768 econ 800x480 gt lt ss7xGOTGT SotGOT S040 1 sroaany 640x400 gt x F930GOT 240x80 240x80 x F cor eses For the overlap window the above values indicate the maximum setting range applicable when the close and move keys are hidden When the close and move keys are displayed the maximum setting range is as follows When using G
290. nter Output in Chinese simplified language 2 Used optional device External key input Operation panel ten key panel operation panel function Proximity I O External I O device external I O function Video RGB input Video camera video display function personal computer RGB display function 4 ROM_BIOS Reinstalled as required ROM_BIOS is a system program designed to control the GOT hardware and to make communication between the personal computer and GOT ROM_BIOS is installed the GOT before it is shipped from the factory but when specific functions are used ROM_BIOS of the compatible version or later must be reinstalled in the GOT Before starting reinstallation always check the precautions in Section 6 5 2 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 5 2 Required knowledge before installation of system program 1 Operations required to use new functions supported by the new version of the GT Designer 1 When using the following function check that the version of ROM_BIOS installed in the GOT is compatible with the function used Applicable version of ROM_BIOS Function Name For A985 97 960GOT For A95 GOT When using the flash PC card 1 QnA ladder monitor function Q ladder monitor function When using the A9GT FNB8M Version J or later A9GT QFNB8M Maximum number of base screens set when using 1025 to 4096 screens Ethernet connection function Version F or lat
291. o a word device value 1 c0 5 36 5 4 Graph Display FUNCIONS nusreta e a e AT AET E E E EE EET RERAN 5 39 5 4 1 Trend graph display function shows a word device value on trend graph sssssseesssssesseee 5 39 5 4 2 Line graph display function shows word device values on line graph s ssssssssssesssssnsssnsssnsse 5 42 5 4 3 Bar graph display function shows word device values on bar graph ccccceseeeeeeeeeteeeees 5 45 5 4 4 Statistical graph display function shows word device values on statistical graph 006 5 48 5 4 5 Scattered chart display function shows word device values on scattered chart c cceee 5 51 5 4 6 Level display function shows a word device value as a leVel ceecceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeaes 5 54 5 5 Touch Key Functions When Touched Touch Keys Perform such Functions as Device Value Change ANC Screen SWitChing eeraa iaee a AAE a T EAA E A Eaa L aS d ARE 5 57 5 6 Data Input FUMCHONS nena ar asai aa aa ia aaa aaa da aana raaa a aaa ioaad 5 68 5 6 1 Numerical input function writes any value to device sssesseessrsssnssinssrnsrinsttnsnnrtnsnnnrnnntnnnnnne 5 68 5 6 2 ASCII input function writes any key code to word devices ccesceeseeeeseeseceeseesseesseesseesseeeees 5 72 5 7 Report Function Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer M MOTY cc cccsecseeeseeeteeeeeeeseeeaeeees 5 75 A 5 A 5 5 8 Other Object Functions
292. o high quality font the part is displayed in high quality font 2 When the GOT F900 series is used Length x Width dot Length magnification magnification 4 32 4 32 4 SPECIFICATION 4 2 5 Data capacity of each figure MELSOFT GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om Memory capacity of figures and characters for drawing is as follows The following memory capacity applies to figures regardless of attribute tyoes and sizes 1 When the GOT A900 series is used Figure Line Memory capacity byte 20 Line Freedom 16 4xn n is the number of vertexes Rectangle 24 Polygon Circle ellipse 16 4xn nis the number of vertexes Start and end points are counted as one of vertexes Arc ellipse arc Sector Painting of enclosed area 16 Figure data in bitmap file format 20 data capacity of bitmap file 28 2 n 1 nis the number of characters memory capacity in the left regardless of 2 byte 1 byte character High quality font 128 xn nis the number of characters Scale 24 Report figure line 64 for rules of 32 x 32 dots Report figure text 16 4 x number of characters 2 2 When the GOT F900 series is used Figure Line Memory capacity byte 20 Rectangle 24 Circle 24 Figure data in bitmap file format 20 data ca
293. ock display function Message Display Comment srrreststetstssteteteaseteeeeeees Sets the comment display function m Alarm History Sets the alarm history display function Alarm List sersseeeeeeeeeeeerseeseeeneees Sets the alarm list display function Animation Display Part Display s sits ssserstiensssewsstacs Sets the part display function m Part Movement srrrrssrssrsstteeeeeeeees Sets the part movement function t Part Move Route srrsrtrrstttrsteseeeee Sets the part movement route Lamp ssseeesseeeeeeeees Sets the lamp display function Panelmeter Sets the panel meter function Graph Trend Line Bar srsssrsseeresreeeeeeee Sets the trend graph display function the line graph display function and the bar graph display function Statistics srereeserssesertsreveerecenseneces Sets the statistical graph function Scatter chart Sets the scatter chart display function Level sre Sets the level function Touch Key sstserrertseerersserssessenenneennenns Sets the touch key function m Data Input t Numerical Input srterstereeeeeeeee Sets the numerical input function ASCii INDUt srrereeteetteeeeteteeeeeee serene Sets the ASCII input function Overlap Screen srrttrrsssteteesesteeeeeee tenes Sets the overlap screen function Window Position Overlap Window 1 srssseseesssseeeeeees Sets the window screen position for overlap window 1 t Overlap Window 2 srrttttresssseeeeeees
294. of 30 of 50 p D100 70 gt 30 gt 50 End End End point point point gt i Parts Parts ii Parts Starting point Starting point Starting point Move way Line Position D100 Maximum 100 Minimum 0 Preset upper limit 100 Preset lower limit 0 Part Movement dialog box lt Basic gt tab 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The part movement function consists of the following setting items a When using the GOT A900 series e Part Movement dialog box Set the part movement display function O Basic Q amp t OParts OFixed No Olmage List dialog box Choose the Image List 2 switching 3 ODevice O Device dialog box Set the Device No co Data type Bit Word BIN16 Word BCD16 t Move way Position Line Point Route No t Position O Device dialog box Set the Device No t OMaximum Minimum t ODisplay mode Movement Locus t OPositioning Top left Center OType OPart LS Mark Image List dialog box Set the Part No L Fixed Blink No Low Middle High O Case Bit O Color 0 to 255 O ON OFF Time set
295. of recipe files 9 x sum of 16 bit devices in each recipe file 14 x sum of 32 p bit devices in each recipe file 2 Capacities of data stored on the hard disk When using the GT SoftGOT Some objects have the function to store data on the hard disk of the personal computer The following table indicates the capacities of data stored on the personal computer hard disk object by object Object Name Data Capacity Bytes Number of collection times number of 1 page printable data collection times 1 Report function number of 1 page printable data collection times x number of header lines 1 x data size on 1 line number of collection times x repeated lines x data size on 1 line Data size per line see below x number of printing times number of occurrence recovery check times 1 Data Capecty Bytes History mode Alarm history function Cumulative mode status only Cumulative mode cumulative time or occurrence time status Cumulative mode eee 97 cumulative time occurrence time status Data capacity per screen see below x number of screens stored Data Capacity per Screen Model dot Data Capacity Kbytes SoftGOT 1280 x 1024 1281 0 117 x number of recipe files 9 x sum of 16 bit device points of all recipe files 14 x sum of Recipe function 5 seca 32 bit device points of all recipe files Hard copy function 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 2 When the GOT F
296. oftGOT 5 Set the device number as a multiple of 16 Bit device 9 3 gt o g iS 4 CC Link connection Remote device Device name ee monitoring YO to Y7FF Bit designation of GOT data register GD Bit device GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 Converting GOT bit register to word GB GOT special register GS Word device 4 SPECIFICATION 5 4 54 MELSOFT FXCPU TS Device number Device name Available range for monitoring f expression Input relay X X0000 to X0377 Octal notation Output relay Y Y0000 to Y0377 Auxiliary relay M M0000 to M3071 State S 0000 to S0999 Special auxiliary relay M M8000 to M8255 Timer contact T T000 to T255 Counter contact C C000 to C255 Word device bit 1 GB64 to GB16383 GOT bit register GB Timer current value T000 to T255 p Counter current value C C000 to C255 Data register D D000 to D0999 RAM file register D D1000 to D7999 Special data register D D8000 to D8255 Bit device word x2 3 GOT data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 While the touch key function to which a word device bit is designated as the monitor device is executed do not write the word device in a sequence program 2 Bit devices of the timer contact T and counter contact C cannot be converted to words 3 Use a multiple of 16 for designating the device number
297. oftGOT only For details of the mail sending function refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Up to 8 points can be set to one project 5 103 5 103 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 11 Sampling function reads PLC CPU data under specified condition GOT A900 series GOT F900 series om This function collects data stored in word devices at specified intervals or on bit condition 1 Function outline a Samples four consecutive devices starting from the specified word device DO Sampling results can be displayed on the GOT in list or graph format Also they may be read to GT Designer and saved onto FD or processed as text data on a personal computer Sampling condition Intervals 1 minute 400 a Displayed as graph 1004 or list 0 L D100 D101 D102 D103 Sampling at intervals of 1 minute Save onto FD Edited as text data Setting Portion Settings Device DO Sampling dialog box Trigger Cycle 1 min Use Sampling checked 5 104 5 104 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The sampling function consists of the following setting items e Sampling dialog box Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Trigger Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Rise Fall Cyc
298. og box Set the calculation expression Ho o D Security Setting of Security 0 to 15 0 E O Offset Unchecked checked k Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No Display mode Transparent KOR Preview Unchecked checked comment Browse Comment List dialog box Setting of comment Disp head O Fixed 1 to 32767 O Device__ O Device dialog box 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic m Device Device dialog box Data type Bit Word Shape Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Image List Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Size Height x width size setting Case Bit ON Off No Comment List dialog box Setting of comment Direct Unchecked checked Copy from ON OFF only Attribute ON Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 Attribute OFF Change attribute Unchecked checked Text Designation of Color Case Word Edit Folt Display Format Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 dialog box Change attribute Text Designation of Color 0 to 255 Start No Set the first device number of comment to be displayed 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help
299. ollowing items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Data input gt Setting up ASCII input from Contents of Help POINT 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security and offset can be set e Input keys can be created freely e By setting the user ID and move destination ID the position of the next input area can be set freely 2 When using the GOT F900 series e The input keys of the F940GOT are available from the key window and GOT s system window 10 key pad e The input keys of the F930GOT are available from the GOT s system window 10 key pad only e Input keys can be created freely e By setting the user ID and move destination ID the position of the next input area can be set freely 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 7 Report Function Prints Values Stored in Devices or Buffer Memory GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function gathers and prints numerical data stored in the word devices or the buffer memory of a special function module every time a data collection trigger occurs or prints numerical data and comments associated with bit device ON OFF 1 Function outline a Gathers and prints data per data collection trigger Real time report The current data and next data are printed continuously without the printer paper page being renewed
300. olor according to the current value of a monitor device Present temperature Present temperature Present temperature Monitor device DO Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Case1 Defined case V lt 0 Numeral 3 lt Basic gt tab Device lt Case gt tab Case2 Defined case 100 lt V Numeral 0 Plate 255 c Used with the level display function refer to Section 5 4 6 Only when using the GOT A900 series Ea ak Monitor device DO Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Device DO Numeral 0 lt Option gt tab Display mode XOR e The numerical display function allows only one value to be superimposed on one level indication provided by the level display function e A numerical value on a level indication does not blink flicker 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The numerical display function consists of the following setting items e Numerical display dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series Basic tab Device Device _ Device dialog box Set the Device No m Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real Data length 16bit 32bit Shape Unchecked checked l O Image List dialog box Choose the Shape O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 O Numeral Designation of Color 0 to 255 O B
301. on 0 ecceceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeaes 3 15 Figure drawing button 3 15 Object setting button 3 16 Touch key function sses 5 57 Trend graph display function eee 5 39 Index 3 V W Video display function ee eeeeeeeeeeeteeeeees 5 109 Video WINKOW 2 ccceceeeeteeeeteeeeeeeeeeeteeeees 4 11 Window screen Display Method sanaan 4 3 Movement method ccccceeeeeesteeeees 4 3 Overlap WINKOW ceceeseeeeeteteeeeeeteeees 4 4 Setting range of Screen size cceeeee 4 2 Superimpose Window ccceeeeeeeeees 4 5 Index 3 Microsoft Windows Microsoft Windows NT are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and other countries Pentium is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation in the United States and other countries Other company and product names herein are either trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners SPREAD Copyright C 1998 Farpoint Technologies Inc Aa MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC HEADQUARTERS EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES EUROPEAN REPRESENTATIVES MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B V Gothaer Stra e 8 D 40880 Ratingen Phone 49 0 21 02 486 0 Fax 49 0 21 02 4 86 11 20 e mail megfamail meg mee com MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC FRANCE EUROPE B V 25 Boulevard des Bouvets F 92741 Nanterre Cedex Phone 33 1 55 68 55 68 Fax 33 1 55
302. on 5 4 5 display scatter chart Level display O o x Function that displays the word device value in level with the Section 5 4 6 ratio for upper lower limits 5 Function that performs bit device ON OFF word device value Touch key O O O changing screen switching etc according to the touch keys Section 5 5 touched Numerical O O O Function that inputs the desired value into the designated Section 5 6 1 input word device ASCII input oO O Function that inputs the desired ASCII code into the Section 5 6 2 designated word device The hardcopy function enables you to capture and print out a GOT monitor screen and save to a PC card using Hardcopy Ed y3 K O A 2 BMP JPEG type data file by setting a bit device to ON OFF or Section 5 8 1 by touching the touch key set in the Touch key Extended settings x1 x2 x5 Function that writes the data from the bar code reader into the Barcode O x O PLC CPU Section 5 8 8 System information Function that checks the GOT operation status with the PLC CPU Section 5 8 2 Observe Status Function that writes data to the PLC CPU when the specified condition is enabled ON OFF of specified bit device word device value range designation Section 5 8 3 Floating Alarm display Function that displays the comments of the ON bit device in the order of occurrence from right to left on the base screen in relation to the comments of multiple bit devices Section 5 8 4 Recipe Fu
303. on enabling o OMask None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count Expression Olnput Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 49 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Graph Rectangle graph Circle graph Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Image List Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 m Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 m No of Designation of No of Partitions 0 to 8 Partitions Direction Up Right Division L Edit Attribute dialog box Graph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 Device Device dialog box Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN 16bit 32bit Scale display Unchecked checked Scale points Designation of Scale points 2 to 50 Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up graph display gt Setting up statistical graph display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset and expression can be set e Statistical graphs of up to 32 divisions for 32 devices can be displayed e Graphs can be sorted in ascending descending order e Scales and scale values c
304. on of Size V x H Value no _ Designation of number of numerical values Vx H to be displayed 0 2 to 11 Upper Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value O Option displayed lower limit value V x H Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 OSecurity Designation of Security 0 to 15 OOffset Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No OStore Unchecked checked memory No clear trigger O Trigger Clear on trigger rise Clear on trigger fall t OTrigger type Rise Fall Device ODevice dialog box Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval _ Set the Device No ON Sampling OFF Sampling 1__Olnitial display Unchecked checked OMask None AND OR XOR Pattern Set the mask value O Shift None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count OExpression Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Graph Trend Shape Unchecked checked L Shape Image List dialog box Choose the Shape No Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Plate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 Form Direciton Right Left Number Designation of Number 1 to 4 Points De
305. onsosonssson Switch group sssosososoosssosossosoonssos ee Ungroup sueeeneceseeeeueeesensusesessesuen Rotate Flip Flip Vertical s sseeeseeetesteeeees Flip Horizontal la e Rotate Left OEETETETEETETEITETTEETEEECEECET Align Stacking Order L Bring to Front srrsssssrstessssteeseeeeees Send to Back Attribute seeccccccuccccscccucoucuscscususcussccce Replace Devics srrttttsrttettestessseessees be Replace Overlap Screen PTITITITITi Tiree View Preview ttrrsssrssssssssennsssnennnnnnnennnnnennn Object Overlap Screen ON Image susuosusososononanonosssuosonssooonons Redisplay ence nenccncnccsencccencuccccccccccnese Color Setting sssosssuosanosossssonsasosososssos Device List L Project ssrterrsseteeetetteeetetteeteeees List trtttetttee eee eee eee eens eee nee New project data is created Existing file is read Editing file is closed Editing file is saved with project data Editing file is saved as different name and editing continues Other project data is used for the project data in editing BMP format figure data is pasted on the screen DXF format figure data is pasted on the screen GX Developer device comment file to be read into the GT Designer is specified Setting data and screen image is output to printer and files Operation display and communication environments are set GT Designer is ended The last operation for the
306. oose Setting up Other Object Function Setting up Hardcopy from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e For restrictions on the hardcopy function refer to Section 4 3 1 e When using the hardcopy function always install the extended function operating system ESC printer PCL printer to the GOT e If a hardcopy is executed with the GOT in the screen save status video pictures will not be output correctly in hardcopy When making a hardcopy of the monitor screen which displays a video picture start a hardcopy after making sure that the GOT is not in the screen save status 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 2 System information function confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series Eom This function confirms the GOT operating status on the PLC CPU or transmits the information on the GOT900 series operating status from the PLC CPU to the GOT 1 Function outline a Reads information on the GOT operating status from the PLC CPU and controls the GOT operating status 1 Read device D10 data is changed 2 Read device data is confirmed 3 Display is cleared according to the new data of read device D10 b1 ON Forced screen saver enable gt signal ON When bit turns ON screen save status is forcibly chosen D10 0 ote b2 b1 bO k OFF gt ON
307. operation expression relational operation expression 1 if either of relational operation expressions is true or 0 if both are false Logical OR operator Statement example if relational operation expression Function 1 if the relational operation expression is 0 or 0 otherwise Logical NOT operator Statement example lt Term 1 gt lt lt term 2 gt Function lt Term 1 gt is less than lt term 2 gt Left inequality operator Statement example lt Term 1 gt lt lt term 2 gt Function lt Term 1 gt is less than or equal to lt term 2 gt Equivalence left inequality operator Statement example lt Term 1 gt gt lt term 2 gt Function lt Term 1 gt is greater than lt term 2 gt Right inequality operator Statement example lt Term 1 gt gt lt term 2 gt Function lt Term 1 gt is greater than or equal to lt term 2 gt Equivalence right inequality operator Statement example lt Term 1 gt lt term 2 gt Function lt Term 1 gt is not equal to lt term 2 gt Non equivalence operator Statement example lt Term 1 gt lt term 2 gt Function lt Term 1 gt is equal to lt term 2 gt Equivalence operator Statement example lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Adds lt factor gt to lt term gt Addition operator Statement example lt Term gt lt factor gt Function Subtracts lt factor gt from lt term gt Subtraction operator Statement example
308. or occurs a script number and error code are stored on a 2 word basis as a history Note that if 15 or more errors occur the upper addresses are overwritten in order Script execution pointer GS48 Stores the pointer value 49 to 79 which indicates the address where a script execution number GS49 to 79 is stored Default 1 Every time an execution number is stored the pointer value changes as indicated below 4 49 gt 50 gt 51 gt gt 79 gt 49 The pointer value denotes the address of the script execution number GS49 to 79 as indicated below Example 1 When GS48 is 49 the execution number is stored into GS49 Example 2 When GS48 is 79 the execution number is stored into GS79 Script execution number GS49 t GS79 Store the script numbers of the scripts executed as a history Gateway information GS200 to GS229 Stores the error information when the gateway functions are used For details of the error definition stored refer to the GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Compatible Gateway functions 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT b Write devices GS384 Script common information GS385 Script monitor time GS386 to 399 Reserved Gateway common control GS401 to 499 Reserved GS500 GT SoftGOT common information GS501 to 511 Reserved e Script common information GS384 Clears the script error data GS16 to 47 or re executes the script at error
309. ort output F eee eee ee Ree eee Addition of hard copy signal x x x x x x x x x x x System Allows selection of only the information functions necessary for system x x x x x x x xIx x x x xIx x x x x information Addition of key window output signal to system ntormaton 2 x x x P e heeele The following data are added to system information e Used recipe number e Superimposed screen numbers 1 2 e Input completion object ID Addition of the function which Operation allows an operation panel to be panel connected for operation from x x outside the GOT Addition of the function which External I O transfers signals to from outside x x the GOT Addition of the function which Report gathers and prints data per x x x trigger Addition of the function used to set level device for security setting x x x x xixixK xy x x x gt x xIxKIxK x x x A AIAILA Addition of the function which enables selection of whetger message will be displayed or not TX X X X S TOY Password if error occurs at password entry Addition of the password used to change the parameter setting of x x x x p A E x x p A p p k p B P p p p the motion monitor function Addition of the parameter setting changing password of the servo x x x x p aa 8 a S 9x I Se Se Se I Se a a g amplifier monitor function Addition of the function use to creen select whether screen
310. ose the Image List OFrame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 COPlate Designation of Background OSize Designation of Comment Size V x H Device points Set the Device points ODevice O Device dialog box Set the Device No O Storage Unchecked checked Device dialog box Set the Device No Comment No Set the first device number Comment List dialog box Setting of comment of comment to be displayed Ooffset O Device dialog box Set the Device No O Number Plural Single OSort Ascending Descending Oldest Latest OAlignment Left Right Center S me 3 Security Specify of Security 0 to 15 O Detailed display Comment window Window screen Base Screen Store memory Unchecked checked Scroll on Unchecked checked Display date Unchecked checked Set the Comment No Continuous Random One touch Unchecked checked O offset Device dialog box Set the Device No O Trigger OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range t Olnitial display Unchecked checked t QHold display Unchecked checked
311. ouch key sound App 25 Addition of the function which uses character strings created N olololololololololololololololololo x x x x APPENDICES MELSOFT Object Function Description of Function Added Ape el elelals AlC A CI AlLE AIDE J 1K LP A U ped Addition of the touch key motion monitor function that displays xix xixixix x xix xixi xix xixix x x x x the motion monitor function Touch key Addition of the touch key servo amplifier monitor function that xl xl xl xd x x dodo dd lel ed A T T displays the servo amplifier monitor screen Addition of the function which allows lamps to be set as free figures Addition of the function which Lamp display can change display attributes function according to the specified device X X POS PSY status ON OFF device value The basic conversion figures from GOT800 are added as the x p B x x xxxix xixixix x xx K x basic figures of group 2 Addition of the function which outputs the screen image of the F940GOT to a printer Addition of the function which Hard copy alllows data to be savedonPC x x x x xI x x x xI xKIx x x xI x card as JPEG format file Addition of the function which can provide 256 color mode x x x gt xpxipx gt x xpx gt xpxpx xpxix px px x printer output x detection signal e em E e E EEEE external I O equipment Addition of the currently printed se se 32 report screen area Addition of the rep
312. ow2 Superimpose window of Action _ For bit O Host OOther NW No Station No O Hold For word BO I eee A gee a rg eae ia ee ge ee a 1 l Fi F z 1 i Same as the settings of Operation setting Action for word tab in Key operation setting base switching dialog box O Edit Change the setting lee faa SPS E E S a EA So EA E a a a Delete Delete the setting O Key code Set the Key code o fo z t O Security Display Specify of Security 0 to 15 n O Security input Specify of Security 0 to 15 3 O Simultaneous press OOn preference O Off preference oO Delay No ON OFF Press twice O Attribute for middle O Shape Choose the Shape of two presses t O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 O Switch Designation of Switch 0 to 255 O Pattern Designation of Pattern O Background Designation of Background 0 to 255 O Text Text dialog box O Style Regular Bold Solid Raised 1 0O Edit key group Checked unchecked LO Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 O Solid Designation of Solid of chraracters O VxH Designation of Size VxH O High quality font ___ Offset Unchecked checked _ Device Device dialog box Set the Device No O OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Range Bit trigge Device Device dialog box Set the Device No 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real Edit Range dialog box Set the cond
313. pacity of bitmap file Text 344 n n is the number of characters 4 SPECIFICATION 4 3 Types and Specifications of Available Object Functions 4 3 1 Types of and restrictions on object functions for setting GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series Row This section explains the object function types Restrictions on the object functions are marked x Refer to Chapter5 for details of the object functions Function Numerical display GOT A900 series AQ GOT GT SoftGOT GOT F900 series MELSOFT Allowed for setting X Not allowed for setting Details Function that displays the data stored in the word device ina numerical value The display color and attributes can be changed according to the monitor device value or specified device status ON OFF device value Refer To Section 5 1 1 Data list display ASCII display Function that displays the status of multiple word devices in numerical values on the table Designation of one row out of 5 rows maximum as a sort key allows sorting of display according to the set priority Function that displays character strings acknowledging data stored continuously in the word device as character code ASCII code Section 5 1 2 Section 5 1 3 Clock display Function that displays the clock data of the PLC CPU When GT SoftGOT is used the clock data of the personal computer appears When the GOT F900 series is used the clock data
314. play function 5 Comment display function 15 Level display function 6 Alarm history display function 16 Touch key function 7 Alarm list display function 17 Numerical input function 8 Part display function 18 ASCII input function 9 Part movement display function 19 Print object numerical function 10 Lamp display function 20 Print object comment function 11 Panelmeter display function 21 Setting report header line 22 Setting report repeat line 4 Attribute setting list box Line i mE Pattern aI Siar 4 Text 0255 ai 7 8 9 1 Set change of line style 6 Set change of painting background 2 Set change of line width color 3 Set change of line color 7 Set change of character color 4 Set change of painting pattern 8 Set change of character decoration 5 Set change of painting color 9 Set change of character shade color 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 3 6 How to Use Help Help is installed together with the corresponding software of GT Designer Version5 Help includes not only how to operate the corresponding software but also GOT screen data creating editing methods and other information Example When checking the Numeral item of the Numerical Display dialog box Basic tab setting lt GT Designer setting dialog box gt Numerical Display x Basic Form Case Option Trigger Expression Device OFF f Sioned BIN
315. ples of using clip mode 1 Using touch keys change the clip coordinates of a video picture Ls Video picture Specify clip coordinates with touch keys Setting Device Setting D100 Clip mode selection 1 Channel No 70 75 80 D101 Cal vor X axis to be clipped 50 55 60 D102 112 X axis 010 Y axis to be clipped D103 256 Clip width 112 Y axis D104 256 Clip height 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 1 5 RGB screen GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series The picture of a personal computer can be displayed on the GOT An RGB screen allows SVGA 800x600 dots or VGA 640x480 dots to be selected This section explains the RGB screen functions Refer to Section 4 1 6 for RGB screen settings An RGB screen is usable only when the A9GT 80R1 A9GT 80V4A1 is fitted to the A985GOT V 1 How to display RGB screen a An RGB screen is switched from to the GOT monitor screen depending on whether the monitored RGB screen display hide selection bit bit device in word device set on GT Designer is on or off RGB screen display hide selection bit ON b15 Turning the bit on changes the GOT monitor screen to the RGB screen D10 b15 r b2 b1 b0 y OFF gt ON g flim RGB screen Monitor scre
316. ponding company for the clock data when the GOT is connected to the third party PLC 7 About the messages displayed at start Internal error null pointer access If the above error has appeared change the setting in the following procedure 1 Click the Start button point to the Settings Control Panel menu and click 2 Double click the Regional Settings icon 3 As the Regional Settings Property dialog box appears choose English If the above message appears with the setting of English choose the language other than English and restart the personal computer After a start choose English again and restart the personal computer Abnormal termination If the above error has appeared check whether the hard disk has the free capacity of 50MB or more A 2 A 2 REVISIONS The manual number is given on the bottom left of the back cover Print Date Manual Number Revision Aug 2000 SH NA 080117 A First edition Oct 2000 SH NA 080117 B Partial corrections Section 2 1 2 Partial additions Section 4 5 2 Section 2 2 3 Appendix7 Nov 2000 SH NA 080117 C Partial corrections Section 7 2 3 Partial additions Section 4 3 1 Section 4 3 2 Section 4 5 2 Section 4 5 3 Section 5 2 1 Section 5 2 2 Section 5 2 3 Section 5 3 3 Section 5 5 Section 5 6 1 Section 5 6 2 Section 5 8 Section 7 1 2 Additions Section 4 1 4 Section 4 1 5 Section 5 8 13 Section 5 8 14 Feb 2001 SH NA 080117 D
317. r movement Movement key area Touch the movement key area of the window The window screen moves to the desired screen position where touched 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 Overlap window a Display type of overlap window The overlap window has a close close screen and a move bar move screen bar to perform manual window operation You can make setting to display or hide these close key and move bar lt Close and move keys displayed gt lt Close and move keys hidden gt Overlap window screen Overlap window screen Screen can be moved or Screen cannot be moved closed manually Set screen switching device value to close b When overlap windows are overlaid KK Overlap window 1 display position Two overlap windows can be displayed together When two windows are overlaid touch the lower hidden window to bring it up PX Overlap window 2 Overlap window 2 Overlap window 1 Overlap window 2 display position Touch the lower hidden window screen The lower window comes up c Relationships between overlap windows and touch keys Touch keys are invalid around overlap windows in the area equivalent to one key 16 dots Therefore note that touch keys hidden under the overlap windows are invalid if pressed Valid touch key area a Invalid touch key area Overlap window
318. reeeeaeceeencorerenes Displays software version of installed GT Debugger 4 GT Manager Project Execute ssrsssssrssssrresssnnesnnnensnnnnennnn Starts GT Designer RENUMber aaa a Changes the drawing data screen number ja Delete sssosussosossosossssososossososonsosonsosos Deletes the drawing data kiy Exit sososuosssssosnosososossosososossossosososnsoses Ends the GT Manager Edit Cut srrvrvsssesssssesereseeetenenennseneneseneaeas Cuts the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard nL A Copies the selected drawing data and stores in the clipboard LL Paste snsusssssssssosossososossosossosossnsononons Pastes the drawing data stored in the clipboard Help Reference topics vrrrrrrrrtttstetettstsssstees Operation help of GT Manager About oe oa Displays software version of installed GT Manager 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT 3 3 Basic Operation of Dialog Box Numerical Display Basic Form Case Option Trigger Expression Device O FF Signed BIN v J 16bit C 32bit 2 Command button Frame Plate Numeral 0255 v Blink he ea Fevers 3 List box 4 Check box Text Pasition 5 Radio button Text 6 Text box Horizontal alignment mjm Fl el sl 7 Spin box Offset P 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT Tab To
319. reen or base screen the detailed contents and corrective actions for when the specified devices turn to ON status ON status Setting Portion Alarm History Common dialog box Detailed display Comment window Window screen Base Screen 5 18 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The alarm history display function consists of the following setting items a When using the GOT A900 series e Alarm History Common dialog box Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function OMode O History Cumulation OAlarm Set the number of device points to be monitored 1 to 3072 OWatch cycle Set the monitoring cycle 6 to 800 Detailed display Not display Comment window Window screen Base Screen History store Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No History erase Unchecked checked Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No 0O Memory store Unchecked checked Set the storage cycle 1 to 60 Store CSV format Unchecked checked When number of alarm occurences exceed set Unchecked checked value delete oldest alarm occurences History print _ Unchecked checked Print Format Print Format dialog box Delete Delete the setting Set the row count column count margins etc ODevice No Continuo
320. reen overlaps the base screen be careful for the following points a Contents of each screen overlaps 1 Figure data Figures of superimpose window screen are brought to front Superimpose window screen Base screen Screen display 2 Object data The object with changed values out of objects in the base screen and the Superimpose Window screen is brought to front 00000142 000001 gt Superimpose window Base screen screen Screen display When the value of the object changes the object with changed value is brought to front 3 Touch key The touch key of the superimpose window screen is brought to front If the touch keys overlap both touch key functions of the base screen and the superimpose window screen become effective when touched j l L Superimpose window Base screen screen Screen display If the touch keys of the superimpose window screen and the base screen overlap and the touch keys are briefly touched only the touch key of the superimpose window screen may function 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT b If the superimpose window screen is displayed out of the base screen With the reference point at the upper left for the superimpose window screen the limited area c
321. result between data formats Note that any of the following cases will produce an unintended processing result e When the script data format selected is other than 16 bit BCD and 32 bit BCD the constant described is outside the range of the selected data format e When the script data format selected is 16 bit unsigned BIN or 32 bit unsigned BIN the constant described is negative e When the script data format selected is other than real number the constant described is with a decimal point POINT Refer to Section 7 2 3 for details of the data formats 4 Instructions for monitor device description Some PLC CPU devices to be monitored require their device numbers to be described in the specific number of digits Note that a malfunction may occur if they are not described in the specific number of digits Refer to Section 7 2 3 for details of the describing method 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 Instructions for substitution delay The script function writes the operation result to the PLC CPU at an end of one script Hence performing substitution processing as in Example 1 causes a write delay Describe a script as in Example 2 and Example 3 to minimize the frequencies of communications with the PLC CPU and avoid influence on monitor processing Example 1 Substitution processing using PLC CPU devices w D1 w DO substitutes DO into D1 w D2 w D1 substitutes D1 into D2 Do w he D1
322. ribute dialog box OGraph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 Pattern Designation of Pattern OBackground Designation of Background 0 to 250 ODevice O Device dialog box tO Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real 16bit 32bit ODevice O Continuous O Random 2 2 O Scale display Unchecked checked 0 E O Scale points Designation of Scale points 0 2 to 11 55 Color _ Designation of Color 0 to 255 Scale value Unchecked checked display F Size _ Designation of Size V xH m Value no Designation of Value no L Color _____ Designation of Color 0 to 255 O Option t OSecurity Designation of Security 0 to 15 OOffset Unchecked checked Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No QSort Unchecked checked Ascending Descending O t OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No m 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range t Olnitial display Unchecked checked t OhHold display Unchecked checked OBit trigger i Bit Bit count setting Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and conditi
323. ries b Shows the ratios of the gathered multiple word device data to the total ona percentage bar graph DO 11 40 20 50 D1 60 30 gt 70 l D2 M70 90 gt 40 D3 m 30 gt 60 40 100 100 Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Graph re graph Device ppoecla No of Partitions DO Graph 255 Pattern 8 lt Division gt tab D1 Graph 182 Pattern 8 Scale display Scale points 3 lt Graph gt tab Cale CISPlay P D2 Graph 109 Pattern 8 Scale value display 1 Value no 3 D3 Graph 0 Pattern 8 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 series 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The statistical graph display function consists of the following setting items e Statistics Chart dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Qa is t OGraph Rectangle graph 3 L O Circle graph a t OShape O Image List dialog box Choose the Image List L O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 t CPlate Designation of Plate 0 to 255 L ONo of Designation of No of Partitions 0 to 255 Partitions ODireciton Up Down Right Left O Division 0O Edit O Att
324. rinted out e The current number of alarm history data can be stored into the designated word device e The display for the restored device can be deleted using the designated bit device as trigger e When the specified bit device word device turns on at error occurrence for example off at restoration the date and time of occurrence restoration comment and others can be sent as electronic mail e For details of the mail send function refer to the following corresponding manual e When GOT is used GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version5 GT Designer Version5 Compatible Gateway functions e When GT SoftGOT is used GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual e For restrictions on the alarm history display function refer to Section 4 3 1 2 When using the GOT F900 series e The current status of the alarm history display can be printed out e The number of errors entered into the monitoring devices can be stored 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 2 3 Alarm list display function shows the error information of the system at error occurrence GOT A900 series Eom GOT F900 series Ros This function shows error information at error occurrence or shows comments corresponding to multiple devices in priority order 1 Function outline a Shows error information at error occurrence Only when the GOT A900 series is used Monitors GOT PLC CPU MELSECNET communication at intervals of three seconds to check for errors and sho
325. rlapped only the base screen touch key functions when touched Called screen display LI Base screen Called screen Screen display b When objects that may be set only once on a single screen are superimposed When objects that may be set only once on a single screen e g keyboard and alarm list are superimposed they are all displayed but the function is restricted and the display is not provided correctly 5 117 5 117 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 9 2 Security function limits users GOT A900 series OL GOT F900 series o By setting the security level 0 to 15 for each object or screen display data can be displayed or hidden according to the security level of the user A password can be set for each security level which can be changed by inputting the corresponding password The GOT F900 series allows only the security level of the base screen to be set Security level 0 No security function is set Security level 1 Low Security level 15 High In addition to the password of the security level there are specific screens functions that can restrict users by setting specific passwords e Utility screen Set a password at a start of the utility screen to prevent accidental upload operation e Parameter change screen only when GOT A900 series is used Set the password on th
326. rmed for the GOT F900 series The value resulting from four function arithmetic done on the data of a word element with the values entered into Gain 1 Gain 2 and Offset is displayed or entered a Gain 1 Multiplication is performed Defaults to 1 when not used e Word element data X Gain 1 b Gain 2 Division is performed Defaults to 1 when not used e Word element data Gain 2 c Offset Addition or subtraction is performed Defaults to 0 when not used Enter a negative value to perform subtraction e Word element data Offset Calculation is made in the following format Word element data x Gain 1 Gain 2 Offset 5 128 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 9 5 Station number switching function Switches the monitor destination to the same device of another station number GOT A900 series OE GOT F900 series This function allows you to switch the device of the currently monitored object to the same device of another station number on the same data link network CC Link system to monitor multiple PLC stations on the same monitor screen This function is available only when the connection target PLC is the MELSEC A MELSEC QnA or MELSEC Q series 1 Function outline a The same object is used to monitor the devices of the other stations Station No
327. rn statement is used to end a script Statement example Function Point Statement example Function Point Statement example Function Statement example Function if conditional expression set of expressions Exercises judgment control Evaluates the conditional expression and if its result is true other than 0 executes the set of expressions An if statement is the most basic judgment control which is used to perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program sequence if conditional expression set of expressions 1 else set of expressions 2 Exercises judgment control Evaluates the conditional expression and if its result is true other than 0 executes the set of expressions 1 or if false 0 executes the set of expressions 2 An if statement is the most basic judgment control which is used to perform specific processing for a given value or to change a program sequence while continuous conditional expression set of expressions Evaluates the continuous conditional expression and if its result is true other than 0 repeats executing the set of expressions If the continuous conditional expression is false 0 execution exits from the while statement e Awhile statement is used to perform given processing for up to a specific purpose For example waiting for touch key input Making the continuous conditional expression always true other than 0 result
328. rting Unchecked checked Print Format Print Format dialog box _ Lines Columns Margin Edit Parameter dialog box Set the report type and operations to each report screen O Format Trigger Report style O Real cont OLog page Page No Print at right top Not print OTime Not print at center top at left top at right top Collect trigger type Sampling Setting of Sampling cycle 3 to 3600 Rise Fall __ Device dialog box Setting of Device No Print trigger Rise Fall Device dialog box Setting of Device No Report num Set the repeat count of repeated row at print trigger occurrence Sampling num Set the number of times when collected data is stored onto PC card Over processing Overwrite break Logging Oldest Latest Delete trigger type Rise Fall Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No Turn on Print File name Set the file name stored onto PC card e Numerical Print dialog box Set the print position print device print format and others of the numerical data to be printed on report paper Device _ Device dialog box Setting of Device No Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real Data length 16bit 32bit Print style SignedDecimal UnsignedDecimal Hexadecimal Binary Real Right
329. s Device _ Device dialog box Set the Device No Basic tab Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Shape __ Designation of Frame 0 to 255 Designation of Background 0 to 255 Designation of Color 0 to 255 No Low Middle High Unchecked checked Text Text and Plate Size Height x width size setting Digits Digit count setting Security 3 g Offset Checked unchecked Device Device dialog box Set the Device No i Trigger t O Trigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger m 16bit 32bit m Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Device Device dialog box Set the Device No tO Range OEdit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range t O Initial display Unchecked checked O Hold display Unchecked checked O Bit trigger Ee Bit Bit count setting Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Basic Device Device _ Device dialog box Set the Device No Shape Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0
330. s oO This function writes reads device values to from the specified devices of the PLC CPU on the specified condition device ON OFF The read data are stored as indicted below depending on whether the GOT is the GOT A900 series or GOT F900 series e GOT A900 series Stored onto a PC card in CSV format except A950 handy GOT e GOT F900 series Stored into the GOT 1 Function outline a Turns ON the specified device X1 at a machining start or the like to write the initial device values of the PLC CPU from the GOT 1 Specified device write trigger X1 turns ON Pi Se ON D10 10 D10 10 D11 20 D11 20 D12 30 D1230 2 Device values are written D13 40 D13 40 to specified devices of PLC CPU Settings Device D10 Contents gt tab Device points 4 Trigger 1 X1 ON time Recipe Device D10 10 D11 20 D12 30 D13 40 POINT Device values may also be written to the specified devices of the PLC CPU from a PC card fitted to the GOT Only when the GOT A900 series except the A950 handy GOT is used 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b Turns ON the specified device X2 at a machining end or the like to store the specified device values at machining end onto a PC card Only when the GOT A900 series except the A950 handy GOT is used 1 Specified device read trigger X2 turns ON a
331. s according to the destination GOT PC card e If installed to GOT The ROM_BIOS is installed to the built in memory of the GOT via RS 232C e If installed to PC card The ROM_BIOS is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot Mount the PC card which contains the ROM_BIOS to the GOT and install the ROM_BIOS to the built in memory of the GOT by the following procedure 1 Mount the PC card to the GOT 2 Turn OFF the GOT 3 Remove the communication board communication unit option unit from the GOT If the GOT has the built in communication interface disconnect the communication cable 4 Turn ON the PC card access switch 5 Turn ON the GOT while pressing the following two areas on the GOT display simultaneously 6 The message to indicate that ROM_BIOS is being installed appears on the GOT display and installation is carried out 7 Complete installation according to the instruction on the GOT display 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 5 4 Installation of OS The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for OS installation For further details refer to the help window of the GT Designer Select the Communication Install OS menu The OS installation dialog box is displayed j Select the source path name and the destination GOT PC card Select the type of OS to install Click the Install button The OS is instal
332. s in an endless loop e A temporary work must be used as the write destination device switch term case constant set of expressions break case constant set of expressions break default set of expressions Creates a control statement using four reserved words of switch case break and default switch In either of the following cases executes the sets of expressions case following the case and default statements default e The term value matches the constant brake e It does not match the case statement and there is a default statement Statement example Function Point Statement example Function In either of the following cases execution exits from of switch e There is a break statement within a script e There are no case statements having the constants corresponding to the term and no default statement Note that there may be no break and default statements in the control statement The switch statement is used when a given variable value requires different processings to be performed return Ends a script A single script can have multiple returns Represents the end of a single statement This symbol is necessary at the end of a single statement 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT if relational operation expression amp amp relational operation expression 1 if two relational operation expressions are both true or 0 if either is false Logical AND operator if relational
333. s is used Di0v 0_100et 101991002100 over On Bea pes pt D100 0 gt 1 100 gt 101 Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device D100 Range V 0 Lamp 0 Blink No lt Case Word gt tab Range 0 lt V lt 100 Lamp 224 Blink No Lamp 224 Blink High The lamp figure display color attributes and character string can be changed according to the word device value 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items The lamp display function consists of the following setting items e Lamp dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Q sS 0 O Device Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No 2 2 Data type Bit Word BIN16 Word BCD16 o O Shape OBasic figure Free figure Case Bit ON OFF time setting Shape Free figure Basic figure Olmage List dialog box Set the figure number Panelkit dialog box Set the figure from t Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 parts library panelkit O Lamp Designation of Lamp color 0 to 255 tO Background Designation of Background 0 to 255 t O Pattern Specify the lamp figure pattern No 1 to 37 OBlink No Low Middle High t O Text O Text
334. s on the barcode function refer to Section 4 3 1 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 8 9 Operation panel function operates GOT externally GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series This function writes touch inputs numerical inputs screen switching etc to devices from outside the GOT using an operation panel 1 Function outline a Turns ON the bit device X0 of the PLC CPU from an operation panel outside the GOT Press key preset as f to turn ON XO OFF i x 7 eee XO an SG SA Pa Bog v ON 2 SS x PN Pes xo q A 4 X0 ON O O w OO O O O External I O unit must be fitted amp amp OOO Setting Portion Settings Edit Operation Panel dialog Available Operation Panel Checked Ke X39 Edit Action Key lt Action gt Bit Device X0 code dialog box tab Action Set 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 2 Setting items MELSOFT The operation panel function consists of the following setting items e Edit Operation Panel dialog box L O Operation panel key OEdit Action Key code Action dialog box O Initialize 0O Action key code O Available Operation Panel O Initialize Mode A8GT TK 3 Setting method ODBits 222222
335. s selected for Character decoration the display provided on the GT Designer screen is the same as when Shadow is selected but the correct display is provided on the GOT Raised is Character decoration as if Boldface ad Shadow are combined Uninfluenced by the character size the shadow part of Raised is always 1 dot large The shadow part of Shadow changes in proportion to the character size Example The shadow is 2 dots large when the character size is 2x2 2 When the GOT F900 series is used Figures Example of drawing Attributes for selection Line Line style line color Rectangle Line style painting pattern painting color Circle Figure data in bitmap DXF format Text ABC asc ABC ABC Text color size alignment 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 2 2 Attribute type for selection Attribute types for drawing are as follows 1 When the GOT A900 series is used Attribute Example of drawing f Full line Broken line Dotted line 5 Line style Alternate long and short dash line Alternate long and two short dash line f 1dot 2d 3dot Line width 4dot m Scot m co 256 colors Displayed in selected colors when the GOT used is compatible with 256 color display Displayed in reduced 16 colors when the GOT used is compatible with 16 color display Display color
336. se the Screen Delete Delete the setting Key code Set the Key code Option Trigger Simultaneous Unchecked checked press Trigger type Ordinary ON OFF Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Auto repeat Unchecked checked 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up touch key gt Setting up touch key from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security can be set to display hide data and to enable disable the touch key e Idling period from when the key is touched until operation starts set period touch again can be set in increments of one second with a minimum value of one second Delay setting e Setting can be made to disable touch keys from being touched simultaneously e The following multiple functions can be set to one touch key If the touch key is set as an extended key multiple functions cannot be set Operation priority Function Quantity under multiple setting Bit momentary Bit SET i Window screen switching overlap window 2 Window screen switching superimpose window Station switching Low 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 6 Data Input Functions The data input functions write any data to devices They are available in
337. signate the screen number to download Click the button e For screen data downloading reading operation performed when GT SoftGOT is used refer to the GT SoftGOT Version 5 Operating Manual e The screen data is downloaded as follows according to the destination GOT PC card When using the GOT F900 series you cannot select the PC card If downloaded to GOT The screen data is downloaded to the built in memory of the GOT via RS 232C If downloaded to PC card The screen data is copied to the PC card mounted to the PCMCIA slot of the personal computer Mount the PC card which contains the screen data to the GOT and select the screen copy function from the utility screen of the GOT to copy the screen data to the built in memory of the GOT For details of the screen copy function refer to the GOT A900 series operating manual extended option functions manual 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 7 Debugging of Screen Data GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series POINT When using GT SoftGOT you cannot use GT Debugger The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for debugging the screen data downloaded to the GOT between the personal computer and the GOT For further details refer to the help window of the GT Debugger Start Activate the GT Debugger Read the screen data downloaded to the GOT by either of the following operations e Select the File Open menu
338. signation of Points 2 to 50 Frame Unchecked checked Monitor Device Edit Attribute dialog box 7 Graph Designation of Graph 0 to 255 Style Designation of Style Device Device dialog box Set the Device No m Delete Deletion of setting Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN 1 6bit 32bit Upper Lower m Fixed Numerical setting Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Others Scale display Unchecked checked Scale points Designation of Scale points V x H Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 Trigger type Specify the cycle time 1 to 3600 Store memory No clear trigger Clear on trigger rise Clear on trigger fall Device _ Device dialog box Setting of Device No 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up graph display gt Setting up trend graph display from Contents of Help e Security offset and expression can be set e As the condition for graphing the specified word device value you can combine and set the monitoring cycle and bit condition ON OFF e Up to eight graphs for eight devices can be displayed on one trend graph e Up to 100 pieces of collected data can be displayed on the screen e Scales and scale values can be set e Graph fra
339. solution to four channels b Size change The video window size can be changed in the following procedure 1 Touch the video window You can disable size change through touching operation by turning b4 of Video RGB Common device on See Section 4 6 1 item 2 Size 25 Size 50 Size 100 Touching operation changes the video window size as described below lt Size change gt Size 50 For example when a video window is displayed at the size of 25 the first touching operation changes the size to 50 Size 25 Size 100 When the video window is displayed at 50 the first touching operation always changes the size to 100 Size 50 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 2 Change the value of the device where the size has been set D105 1 1 1 Channel No D106 2 gt 1 0 Size 5S D107 32 32 gt 32 X axis 32 gt 32 gt 32 Y axis nN x S S Size 25 Size 50 Size 100 c When multiple video windows are displayed 1 When opened the video window appears in the forefront 2 When the coordinates and or size of the video window is changed a new video window appears in the forefront 3 When video windows are overlapping touching the lower video wi
340. space the number of points that can be set may decrease 1 When the GOT A900 series is used Specifications Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices __ functions Max Function setting Used memory space points per bytes screen Display attributes Ordinary Rise Fall Bit Trigger Bit device Offset designation Station number changing Display format number of display digits Decimal 111013 Hexadecimal 1 to 8 Octal 1to6 Binary 11 to 32 Real 11 to 32 Display format number of display digits Decimal 111013 Hexadecimal 1 to 8 Octal 1to6 Binary 1 to 32 Real 1 to 32 Digits 1 to 80 Data format ge en m dd dd mm yy mm dd yy Shape Frame Plate Numeral Blink Shape Frame Plate Title Color Rule Reverse Shape Frame Plate Shape Frame Plate i i H ce 12 8 X registered comments 4 2 X total characters X Style Color Solid registered comments Reverse Blink High x x values in are quality font converted to the multiple number of 4 32 12 X row 1 6 X devices x Pox Jsi x ONOFF Sampling Sor Oe ee a E a on fo x Jlo o o e Max number of comments registered 32767 e Max number of characters set to 1 comment 512 characters independently of character size x Xx Max number of characters set to 1 comment 512 characters independently of character size Max number of monitor points Bit Device 3072 Word
341. ssion t O Device Continuous Random O Comment Continuous Random O Case m OEdit Edit Display Format dialog box Set the display attribute changing conditional _ODelete expression and display attribute 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT a 5 Security 3 O Offset Checked unchecked Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No 2 mo OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range Olnitial display Unchecked checked OHold display Unchecked checked OBit trigger O Bit Bit count setting Ye Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up data display gt Setting up data list display from Contents of Help e Security and offset can be set e Display Label rows can be set Combining the label rows and statistical or bar graphs makes effective display e Display sequence can be sorted in the ascending or descending order of number or device values e Display color and attrib
342. st set in the screen is displayed Overlap screens are displayed hierarchically Operation display and communication environments are set 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSOFT Draw Pane lkit ssrrtrttrrtttererseeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes Reads registers and deletes the panel kit Part srssrssserrssereressnnnessnnnesnnneesnnnnennnne Registers the part for the part display function and the part movement function Comment srrrsssrsrssrrrersrrresenennesennennnnn Registers the comment for the comment display function the alarm list display function and the alarm history display function Draw Figure Line esssnsuosonsosonssonsonsosonssossososonos Draws linear line Line Freeform srrrrssssstessessseeseeeees Draws a continuous linear line Rectangle sssr Draws a rectangle Polygon Draws a polygon Circle Draws a circle T Arc Sector stttttttttetesesetesssteseeeeees Draws an arc sector L Scale ssserseeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenseeenees Draws graduation Text trtttetetesteteeneneeseeeeseneneeseannee Inputs characters Paint srsersrrsrerssrrenensernnensnnnnennnne Paints a polygon or a closed area with selected pattern Data Display Numerical Display Sets the numerical display function Data List Sets the data list display function m Ascii Display Sets the ASCII display function fe T Clock snononsuosussossssosossosososonsonsose Sets the cl
343. stored on the PC card when a print trigger occurs Logging report Before printing the printer paper page is renewed Device states Device states cc c D100 Device used to monitor processed products in line 1 D100 10 D100 50 D101 Device used to monitor processed products in line 2 D101 20 m N D101 60 D102 Device used to monitor processed products in line 3 D102 30 y D102 70 D103 Device used to monitor processed products in line 4 D103 40 D103 80 in e a OFF ON Every tme collection trigger X10 turns ON device values of D100 to D103 are gathered and stored onto x10 gt PC card Ez Collection trigger occurs Ya PC card Z trigger occurs OFF ON x100 F Every time print trigger X100 turns ON collected data stored on PC card are printed x Report data file Data stored when the first data collection trigger occurred Data stored when the second data collection trigger occurred Texts and table are drawn with report figures Production List Line Name Amount Line Name Amount Line1 10pcs Line 3 30pcs Line2 20pcs Line 4 40pcs Printed when print trigger turns ON second time Products Set as repeat lines Products Line 1 50pcs Line 3 70pcs Line2 60pcs aad Li
344. sts the additional functions made available by updating GT Designer to Version5 Firsty aa aaaea Describes the screen and project operations and common setting items FIQUIG caeran aiet Describes figure drawing and editing operations Object Describes object setting and editing operations Transfer Print aeee Describes information required for data transfer and download upload operations ADO arie aiia a Describes the version information of GT Designer 2 GT Converter GT Debugger GT Manager help Reference topics Describes operations for GT Converter GT Debugger GT Manager AbOUt ruani Describes the version information of GT Converter GT Debugger GT Manager 3 6 2 Printing the help screen 1 Printing from the contents Click 2 or of the item to be printed to make selection and click the _ Print button Help Topics Drawing software help Contents Index Find Click a book and then click Open Or click another tab such as Index 2 Introduction Setting objects QJ Setting up data display 2 Setting up numerical display 2 Setting up data list display 2 Setting up ASCII display 2 Setting up clock display Setting up message display Setting up alarm history display Setting up animation display Setting up graph display Setting up Touch Key Setting up Data Input Setting up Other Object Function Operation for Panelkit Operation for Template
345. system configuration component devices part names option SH 4005 unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and 13JL70 error codes of A985GOT A975GOT A970GOT A960GOT unit Available as option A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT User s Manual Explains the specifications general system configuration component devices part names option SH 080018 unit loading methods installation and wiring methods maintenance and inspection methods and 13JL92 error codes of A950GOT A951GOT A953GOT A956GOT unit Available as option GOT A900 Series User s Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Connection System Manual SH 080119 Gives the specifications system configuration setting method and connection diagram of each 13JR20 connection form available for the GOT A900 series Available as option GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Extended Option Functions Manual Provides the specifications of the utility system monitoring ladder monitoring special function unit SH 080118 monitoring network monitoring functions list editor functions motion monitor functions and servo 138JU08 amplifier monitoring functions available for the GOT A900 series and how to operate the dedicated monitor screen Available as option GOT A900 Series Operating Manual GT Works Version 5 GT Designer Version 5 compatible Gateway Functions Manual SH 08
346. t Base screen No 10 Base screen No 20 Base screen No 30 Base screen No 80 When 1 lt D100 lt 10 10 When D100 100 20 When D100 gt 0 30 Base screen No 10 appears Base screen No 20 appears Base screen No 30 appears Base screen No 80 appears When normal 80 Setting Portion Settings Basic Action Base Next screen Device D100 Range 1 lt lt 10 No 10 100 No 20 0 lt No 30 Normally No 80 lt Action gt tab Choosing window switching with the operation setting tab enables window screens to be switched e By setting this function to window screens window screens can be switched e Up to 64 different comparison expressions including those for normal setting may be set f Switches to the higher level base screen Base screen switching device 2015 Base screen No 20 Base screen No 15 More previous base screen n U0 Previous base screen Base screen No 15 No 15 appears Setting Portion Settings lt Action gt tab Base Basic Next screen Previous 5 59 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT e The GOT stores up to 10 higher levels of base screen Nos which had been displayed up to now Therefore the base screens can be switched according to the history lt Screen switchin
347. t ONo of shift Set the shift count Expression Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 3 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Device Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Data length 16bit 32bit Shape Unchecked checked Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 m Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 L Numeral Designation of Color 0 to 255 Format Signed decimal Unsigned decimal Real Octal Binary Hexadecimal L Right alignment Left alignment Center Disp all digits add 0 Unchecked checked m Size Height x width size setting m Digits Digit count setting Decimal point Digit count setting Expression Gain 1 Gain 1 value setting Gain 2 Gain 2 value setting __ Offset Offset value setting 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up data display gt Setting up numerical display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset and expression can be set e The display color and attributes can be changed according to the monitor device value or speci
348. t device Counter C000 to C255 PLC control relay S00 0 to 831 7 GOT bit register GB132 to GB1023 Bit memory MW00 to MW30 Word device PLC control relay S00 to S30 GOT data register GD100 to GD1023 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 8 SIEMENS PLC S7 300 connection Input relay 10000 to 15117 Output relay Q0000 to Q5117 M00000 to M20477 GOT bit register GB132 to GB1023 Timer present value T000 to T511 Counter present value C000 to C511 Data register D000100000 to D102365534 GOT data register GD100 to GD1023 Bit device ord device Wi 9 Matsushita PLC FPO FP2SH FP2 CCU ees Timer counter elapsed value EV EVO to EV3071 eae Link register LD 1 File register FL 1 5 FLO to FL382764 GOT data register GD100 to GD1023 x 1 Except the FPO 2 Available for the FP2SH only 3 Data cannot be written 4 The special relays R9000 to R910F and special data registers D9000 top D9255 are also included For the FP2SH however access to the special data registers cannot be made 5 For the FP2SH access to only bank 0 can be made 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 10 Inverter EUS series A500 series E500 series F500 series Available range for setting monitoring Bit device Control status S 1 O to S7 e e E operation Program operation PG 1 x1 PG000 CO to PG89 O Special parameter SP x1 parameter SP 1 SP108 C to SP127 0O 1 Set the station
349. t value TP Timer current value TA Counter set value CP Counter current value CA Integer N GOT internal data register GD Available range for setting monitoring B3 0 0 to B3 255 15 B10 0 0 to B255 255 15 T4 0 14 to T4 255 14 T4 0 TT to T4 255 TT T10 0 14 to T255 255 14 T10 0 TT to T255 255 TT T4 0 13 to T4 255 13 T4 0 DN to T4 255 DN T10 0 13 to T255 255 13 T10 0 DN to T255 255 DN C5 0 15 to C5 255 15 C5 0 CU to C5 255 CU C10 0 15 to C255 255 15 C10 0 CU to C255 255 CU C5 0 14 to C5 255 14 C5 0 CD to C5 255 CD C10 0 14 to C255 255 14 C10 0 CD to C255 255 CD C5 0 13 to C5 255 13 C5 0 DN to C255 255 DN C10 0 13 to C255 255 13 C10 0 DN to C255 255 DN Designated bit of the following word devices GB64 to GB1023 T4 0 1 to T4 255 1 T4 0 PRE to T4 255 PRE T10 0 1 to T255 255 1 T10 0 PRE to T255 255 PRE T4 0 2 to T4 255 2 T4 0 ACC to T4 255 ACC T10 0 2 to T255 255 2 T10 0 ACC to T255 255 ACC C5 0 1 to C5 255 1 C5 0 PRE to C5 255 PRE C10 0 1 to C255 255 1 C10 0 PRE to C255 255 PRE C5 0 2 to C5 255 2 C5 0 ACC to C5 255 ACC C10 0 2 to C255 255 2 C10 0 ACC to C255 255 ACC N7 0 to N7 255 N10 0 to N255 255 GD100 to GD1023 MELSOFT Device number notation Octal Decimal 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 7 SIEMENS PLC S7 200 connection Variable memory V0000 0 to V5119 7 10 0 to 17 7 Output Q0 0 to Q7 7 M00 0 to M31 7 Special memory SMO000 0 to SM194 7 T000 to T255 Bi
350. ta can be written is 2039 2 6 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER CHAPTER3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER 3 1 Screen Configuration and Various Tools This section describes screen configuration and various tools MELSOFT 1 Title bar E GT Designer 2 Menu bar 4 Toolbar Main 4 MOA O CO Cl Al A aed F SOSRCDOMAMMOEEIC 5 Toolbar View Th a Fer Wy ak Ba B 1 No title PANE sat i SE tk 1LP_001 2LP_002 3LP_003 4LP_004 5LP_I 00s 6LP_ 008 FARA EA os a B Le EB PA Ros BE SMOAO CT Cm A A eed DF 2E ase EA Ss Eh T O GDS Ceat e iea 4 k A ire ad 7LP_007 8LP_008 9LP_009 255 v Pattern None v 255 v Mo Line y 1 J025 Pattem None _y 255 vmo Text 1255 E Reo v i W Text 255 E Reo E 11 Tool palette 6 Toolbar Figure Object 7 Toolbar Edit 1 Title bar 10 Template 8 Toolbar Draw Please select figures or objects x 135 Y 169 9 Status bar a New Ctrl N Open Ctri 0 Close Save Ctrl S 3 Drop down menu lt Save As Import File gt Print Ctrl P Option Est ALT F4 GT Designer meme Edit View Draw C 3 SCREEN CONFIGURATION OF GT DESIGNER MELSO
351. ten at end value t Sound Unchecked checked OStart O Sound Peot Browse sound file dialog box L OEnd P Sound File List Browse sound file dialog box _ Send mail Unchecked GT checked ODelete Deletion of time action SoftGOT Alarm history data Screen image Recipe file m ODelete all Deletion of all time actions only 5 102 5 102 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series Edit Hae attribute Time ae Start h min sec Starting time setting Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat Starting day of week setting L End ___ h min sec End time setting Bit _Unchecked checked Delete Deletion of time action L Device Device dialog box Delete all Deletion of all time actions Setting of Device No 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up Other Object Function gt Setting up Time action from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Up to 32 points can be set to one project Also bit word and sound output can be set together per point e For restrictions on the time action function refer to Section 4 3 1 e You can send various data such as the alarm history data recipe file and screen image as electronic mail GT S
352. ternal bit register GB GB64 to GB16383 Bit B B90 to eee Timer current value TA Counter set value CP Decimal Counter current value CA Integer N N7 0 to N7 14 k1 GOT internal data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT special register GS GSO to GS511 1 Writing on device is not allowed for 32 bit data 2 If the device specified is outside the range the object set to the out of range device may not be displayed In that case check and correct the device Bit device Word device c When using Micrologix 1500 series Monitoring range Device No notation Bit B B3 0 0 to B255 255 15 RR T3 0 14 to T255 255 14 Timer timing bit TT T3 0 TT to T255 255 TT 7 pore T3 0 13 to T255 255 13 Timer completion bit TN T3 0 DN to T255 255 DN C3 0 15 to C255 255 15 Counter up counter CU C3 0 CU to C255 255 CU C3 0 14 to C255 255 14 Decimal Counter down counter C C3 0CD to C255 255 CD Counter completion bit CN pea z ress EON Integer N N3 0 to N255 255 an Designated bit of the following GOT internal bit ee GB e to GB16383 Bt B _ B8 0t0oB255 255 T3 0 1 to T255 255 1 Timer set value TP T3 0 PRE to T255 255 PRE T3 0 2 to T255 255 2 Timer current value TA T3 0 ACC to T255 255 ACC 0 1 255 255 1 Counter set value CP e E k1 Decimal Counter current value CA EE T o G k1 Integer N N3 0 to N255 255 k1 GOT internal data register GD GD64 to GD16383 GOT specia
353. teway Server Client FTP Server Mai o 2 J Servo E monitor Mt Chinese Big5 Printer Barcode Report CSV Key board 2 Only one may be selected Chinese Big5 Printer Barcode Report CSV Video RGB gt 2 Chinese GB Printer Barcode Report CSV Key board 2 Chinese GB Printer Barcode Report CSV Video RGB 2 1 If the OSs are installed into the GOT where multiple extended optional functions have already been installed they may not be installed depending on the status of the GOT memory area In such a case install them again after removing the extended optional functions installed in the GOT 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 2 Install the Other extended function OSs when using the following functions e Report function e Operation panel function Printer function e Barcode function e Video display function RGB display e External I O function When object function is used to create CSV format files For this extended function OS refer to the following 1 and 2 and select the OS that meets the language to be output to the printer or CSV file and the optional device used 1 Language to be output to the printer connected to the GOT or the CSV file alarm history display function recipe function ESC printer Output in Japanese PCL printer Output in English Chinese Big 5 printer Output in Chinese traditional language Chinese GB pri
354. the GT Designer Help e To find the maximum setting of the columns left space width Printable area width of printer mm 25 4 x 15 Example Printable area width of printer is 204mm 204 25 4 x 15 120 47 Hence set the columns left space to within 120 in the GOT print format setting e To find the maximum setting of the lines top space height Printable area height of printer mm 4 23 Example Printable area height of printer is 280mm 280 4 23 66 19 Hence set the lines top space to within 66 in the GOT print format setting POINT The printable area of the printer changes with the printer used For details of the specifications refer to the instruction manual of the 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 1 4 Video window GOT A900 series LO GOT F900 series A video window displays a picture taken with a video camera The video window has two different modes the full mode in which a picture taken with a video camera is displayed as is and the clip mode in which part of a picture taken with a video camera is displayed Since video windows are independent of other screens the base screen can be switched with the video windows open This section explains video windows Refer to Section 4 1 6 for video window settings Video camera Cannnel No1 Video camera Cannnel No2 Video camera Cannnel No3 ll el Video camera 4 PA Cannnel No4 Video window4 Video window3
355. the general C language compiler or debugger The example shown on the left uses Microsoft Developer Studio You can utilize the step run variable watch and other functions available specifically from the debugger On completion of debugging reverse the steps 1 to 4 to restore the GOT script file e Choosing 32 bit BCD 16 bit BCD as the script data format disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger e Designed for use with only the script functions the set rst alt bmov and fmov statements disables simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger Use substitution of 1 or 0 instead of the set or rst statement e When the system define ON OFF description of the GOT is used unchanged the description of the define must be added to the C language source file e A substitution delay which occurs at the time of script execution on the GOT does not occur during simulation on the general C language compiler or debugger Hence take the occurrence of a substitution delay into consideration when performing simulation e By applying the above a new program created in C language and then debugged may also be used as a GOT script 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 7 5 2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution on GOT 1 Error checking method The error information of the script functions is stored into the GOT special registers GS Check the stored information using the system monitor
356. ting ONo O Image List dialog box Set the Part No t Q Color Setting of part color 0 to 255 OBlink YNo Low Middle High O Case Word L o Edit OEdit Display Format __ O it Device O Device dialog box dialog box OEdit range LOR an O Range dialog box Set the device value range Indicate ONo Olndirect Q Delete Deletion of display setting OColor O Hold L O Attribute OBlink No Low Middle High 2 5 OSecurity t Designation of Security 0 to 15 g OOffset t Unchecked checked ie r i O Trigger Device O Device dialog box Setting of Device No OTrigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real ORange O Edit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range Olnitial display Unchecked checked OHold display Unchecked checked OBit E Bit count setting Set Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit device and condition enabling OMask None AND OR XOR OPattern Set the mask value i None Left Right ONo of shift Set the shift count OExpression O Input Expression dialog box Set the calculation expression 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS M
357. tion e Bar graph lal Scattered Shows data in trend graph format display function shows data in bar graph format chart display function shows the X and Y axis device values in scattered chart format GOT A900 series e Line graph display function A Shows data in line graph format graph display function e Statistical Shows the ratio of each data to the total in statistical I graph format e Level display function shows data as a level at the ratio to upper lower limit 5 4 1 Trend graph display function shows a word device value on trend graph O GOT F900 series O This function gathers data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph 1 Function outline a Collects data stored in a word device and shows it on a trend graph After the last part of the display range is reached the screen is scrolled D100 Scrolling at display range end 400 4 300 a ee al mx w lt 100 1004 Number 1 lt Graph gt tab Scale display V x H Scale points 5 x 3 Points 3 GOT A900 series Scale value display V x H 1 lt Others gt tab Value no 5 x 3 GOT F900 series Upper 400 x 3 1 Scale value indication may be set for only the GOT A900 series lt Form gt tab lt Case gt tab Upper 400 Lower 0
358. tle TAEAE OAE ATE EEEE E ee Peete eng ene tee eee ete 7 18 7 4 1 Touch keys with interlock function ee eee eeeeeeceneeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeaeeeaeesaeeseeeseeesaeeseeeseeeseeeeeeesenaneaeeaaes 7 18 7 4 2 Lamps which change their indications under multiple conditions 0 0 eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeteeteeeeeees 7 19 7 4 3 Password input screen with time limit FUNCTION ee cece eee eeee eect eeeeeeeeteeeseeeteeeteeseeeteeeteeeeeeetats 7 21 f S lt TOUDISSHOOUNG icity aegis ean a ei tat a as ae a i a 7 23 7 5 1 Simulation on general C language compiler or debugger ceceeseeeeeeeeeseeeceeceeeeaeeaeeaeeeeeeaeeaee 7 23 7 5 2 Errors and corrective actions for script execution ON GOT ceceeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeaeeaeeaeeeeteae 7 25 Appendix1 Operations for Use of the Conventional Model Datta cccecceseseeeeeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeseseeeeateaes App 1 Appendix2 Display Speed of Object Reference Value cccccecceceeseseeceeceeeeeeeaeeeeeaeeaeeeseaeeaesaeeneeeaeeaes App 5 Appendix3 List of Key Code 0 cceccecceseeseeeeceeeeeeeeecaeceeeaesaecaeseaeeaesaeseeseaesaesaesaeseaesaesaeseaeeaesaeseeeaesaeseeseaeeaes App 7 Appendix4 Drawing Sheet ccccccsecceceeeseeseeseeeeeeecaeeaeeaesaecaecaesaesaecaecaeeaeeaecaesaeeeaesaesaeseeseaesaeseeseeseateaes App 10 Appendix5 Printing Time of Hard Copy Function Reference Value ccscccccecceceeseeeeeeeseeseeseeeeeeeeaes App 16 Appendix6 Relationships between Extende
359. to 255 Plate Designation of Background 0 to 255 Text Designation of Color 0 to 255 m Size Height x width size setting m Digits Digit count setting Left Right Center Alignment 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up data display gt Setting up ASCII display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security and offset can be set 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 1 4 Clock display function reads and shows clock data of PLC CPU GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series oO This function displays the PLC CPU s clock data GOT A900 series or GOT s built in clock data GOT F900 series on the GOT 1 Function outline a When using the GOT A900 series The clock data of the PLC CPU is read and displayed at power on and thereafter the clock data of the PLC CPU is read every hour Between when the clock data is read from the PLC CPU and when the clock data is read next the time counted in the GOT is displayed Either the date or time can be displayed When GT SoftGOT is used the clock data of the personal computer is displayed in real time 00 08 11 1 Clock display object date indication 2 Clock display object time indication i Display style Date Shape checked lt Basic gt tab
360. top Left top Left Bottom Scale display 1 2 Circle Top Bottom Left Right 3 4 Circle Circle 40 2 X Number of Shape Frame Plate e Max number of graphs Graph Style Scale x xx x x px x x x x x graph lines A e Max number of points display 36 2 X Number of Shape Frame Plate e Max number of graphs Graph Style Scale xx x xxx x x x x x graph lines i e Max number of points display Bar graph 50 44 Shape Frame Plate display Graph Scale display 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT Specifications Display operation Monitor write Option triggers devices functions Max Function setting Used memory space points per bytes screen Shape Frame Plate seardeviees No of Partitions Direciton Graph Scale display e Display trigger Shape Frame Switch Key Bit Color V X H Text e Action Key code Bit Word Base Shape Frame Plate Numeral XIX ae BERG Display attributes Others Rise Fall x During ON OFF Bit device Woadevce Bit Trigger om ON OFF Sampling Sampling Offset designation Station number changing Graph Rectangle graph Circle graph Px Ordinary O Display format number of display Shape Frame Plate ASCII input Color x digits Hardcopy Decimal 11 to 32 Hexadecimal 1 to 32 ee Observe 40 Status Project in common Octal 11 to 32 iy 1 to 32 1 to 32 sare of display digits 11020 gt Time action operation C i Ebb bebbbD ma
361. tting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device D100 Range V 1 Indicate Part No 1 lt Case Word gt tab Range V 10 Indicate Part No 2 Range V 100 Indicate Part No 3 c Shows the specified part according to ON OFF of a bit device X1 X2 OFF ON OFF H x4 x gt gt OFF OFF ON x21 x f Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings Parts switching Fixed Part No 1 omo pex ooo lt Basic gt tab EEE 7 lt Trigger gt tab 7 Parts switching Fixed Part No 2 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The part display function consists of the following setting items e Part Display dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series Basic tab Extended tab OParts Fixed No O Image List dialog box Set the Part No switching Device O Device dialog box Set the Device No Data type Bit Word BIN16 Word BCD16 Display mode Replay XOR Overwrite Positioning Top left Center OType Part Mark O Image List dialog box Set the Part No m Base Screen Window screen
362. ty 0 to 15 E Choose the Image List 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT b When using the GOT F900 series e Alarm History Common dialog box Make settings common to all projects of the alarm history display function Mode History Cumulation Alarm Set the number of device points to be monitored 1 to 1024 m Watch cycle Set the monitoring cycle 6 to 800 Detailed display Not display Comment window Base Screen History store Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No m History erase Unchecked checked Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No When number of alarm occurences exceed set value Unchecked checked delete oldest alarm occurences Delete Delete the setting m Display No Continuous Random Edi A nny ai Bi Device Device dialog box Setting of Device No Comment No Designation of Comment No Display No Designation of Detailed display No f Device reset Unchecked checked Copy aa PISTON Tn Set the history copy destination copy source copy count copied data etc Print Condition Print condition setting is fixed 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT e Alarm History Form dialog box Make settings to each screen of the alarm history display function _ Basic
363. type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN 16bit 32bit Case Upper Lower _ Fixed Numerical setting Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Scale display Unchecked checked m Scale points Designation of Scale points V x H Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 Trigger type Specify the cycle time 1 to 3600 M Store memory Unchecked checked No clear trigger Clear on trigger rise Clear on trigger fall Device Device dialog box Set the Device No Value not Unchecked checked displayed Designation of Value not displayed 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up graph display gt Setting up line graph display from Contents of Help 1 When using the GOT A900 series e Security offset expression and hidden values can be set e Up to eight graphs can be displayed e Up to 500 devices can be monitored with one graph e Scales and scale values can be set e Graph frame can be set 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Up to four graphs can be displayed e Up to 50 devices can be monitored with one graph e Scales can be set e Graph frame can be set 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 4 3 Bar graph display function shows word device values on bar graph GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series om This function shows dat
364. ue changing timer counter s set value and present value changing buffer memory s present value changing for a user created monitor screen system monitoring special module monitoring or ladder monitoring read the manual carefully to fully understand how to operate the equipment During test operation never change the data of the devices which are used to perform significant operation for the system False output or malfunction can cause an accident Precautions for using this software important 1 Memory of the personal computer used Processing may be terminated by Microsoft Windows 95 operation systm Microsoft Windows 98 operation systm Microsoft WindowsNT Workstation4 0 operation systm Microsoft Windows Millennium Edition Operating system Microsoft Windows 2000 Professional Operating System on some personal computer models having main memory of not more than 32M bytes Therefore use them after increasing the main memory to 32M bytes or more 2 Free space on the hard disk While this software is running free space of at least 50M byte is required on the hard disk Since free space of 50M byte is required by Windows 95 Windows 98 WindowsNT Workstation4 0 Windows Me Windows 2000 Professional as the swap area Windows 95 Windows 98 WindowsNT Workstation4 0 Windows Me Windows 2000 Professional may forcibly terminate the program if that free space is used up while the drawing software is ru
365. ultiple devices by setting of one device GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series The value of the set offset device is added to the monitor device address to monitor devices 1 Function outline a Shows multiple device values with one numerical display function Monitor device D100 to D199 offset device D200 Production screen Production screen Line 1 gt Line A Production 1025 Production 10 Production screen Production screen m Line Line 5 Produ fia Production 28532 Production of line 1 is Touch the line input area Type the line you want to display Production of line 5 is displayed displayed Offset value 1 Offset value 5 Device D100 1 D101 Device D100 5 D105 Setting Portion Settings Numerical Input dialog box Device D200 Numerical Display dialog Device D100 Production 7 box lt Option gt tab Offset Device D200 b Shows comments in synchronization with the offset function Input devices D100 to D199 offset device D200 displayed comment No D200 Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen Production setting screen Line 1 Li
366. umber number 0 to FFFF en 2147483648 to 2147483647 32 bit signed BIN 7 Hexadecimal number 0 to 7FFFFFFF 0 to 4294967295 32 bit unsigned BIN Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF 0 to 9999 16 bit BCD Hexadecimal number 0 to 270F 0 to 99999999 32 bit BCD Hexadecimal number 0 to 5F5EOFF Real number 32 bit real number Hexadecimal number 0 to FFFFFFFF 7 SCRIPT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 3 Usable devices and representation methods The devices available for the script functions are the same as those of the other monitor functions The device types and whether the station number is specified or not change how devices will be represented as indicated below Bit device b device number 2 b X100 b device number 2 bit position b D100 01 w x100 Station number specified Network number station 0 FF w D100 device 1 number w device number 2 1 When the QCPU QnACPU or ACPU is used omitting the network number and station number monitors the devices of the own station 0 FF 2 Depending on the PLC CPU device monitored the device number must be described in the number of digits as indicated below PLC CPU Used Davies Name Number of Digits Described Digits Representation Remarks Word specified Bit specified Example b 2303 Because of the channel relay format the relay part is described in 2 digits The file number is described in 3 digits the element number in 3 digits and the bit position
367. unction ladder monitor function special module monitor function network monitor function and list editor function screens is displayed on the GOT it does not change to the RGB window if the bit turns on It changes to the RGB screen after the corresponding function is terminated 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT 4 1 7 Wide display screen GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series The wide size GOT has a wide screen landscape monitor to provide a wide display When drawing refer to the following drawing method and precautions for the wide screen 1 Drawing method effective for wide screen A95 GOT screen A956WGOT screen Line1 109 Oooog lt gt om gppon lay ooooo Lat Ed Input object Input object Appears only when necessary Always appears Though A95 GOT screen data can be used unchanged on the A956WGOT note that the data in the 6 dots at the bottom of the A95 GOT screen are not displayed A956WGOT screen size A95 GOT screen size 2 Precautions for drawing method on wide display 1 Because of the difference between the vertical and horizontal dot intervals on a wide display the actual screen display provided is 1 15 times greater vertically than the drawing screen of GT D
368. ure data A called screen figure appears at the front Base screen Called screen Called screen display e Object data Out of the objects on a base window screen and on a called screen the object whose value changed appears at the front 12345 aE 000001 gt Base screen Called screen Called screen display Every time object value changes object whose value changed comes to front e Touch keys At first the touch key on the screen displayed later appears at the front After that the touch key whose display condition changed appears at the front a Base screen Called screen Screen display 5 115 5 115 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS 5 116 MELSOFT e If screens are called in the same place the touch keys set to the call screens 1 to 99 operate The other touch keys are all invalid The touch keys set to the call screens 100 and later do not operate However if the touch keys have been set one over another the touch keys of up to the sixth screen counted from the basic or call source screen operate Called screen 100 Touch Touch Touch Touch Touch Called screen 99 Called screen 98 gt x Called screen 9 Called screen 8 Called screen 7
369. uring quantity with buttons Button A Button B Button C olw gt Display the window screen of screen number 1 Display the window screen of screen number 5 Display the window screen of screen number 10 Numerical displa 1 Current production quantity Aline 135Unit B line 89Unit C line 106Unit Superimpose window display position Current production quantity A line B line C line Graph displa 5 Current production quantity Statistical displa 10 Current production quantity 135Unit 89Unit 106Unit OW gt Current production quantity Aline 135Unit Bline 89Unit Cline 106Unit 2 Touch button B to display window screen 5 O m gt Current production quantity Om gt Ll Current production quantity Current production quantity A BC Current production quantity 4 SPECIFICATION MELSOFT Ex 3 Switch the display non display of buttons for additional product option parts Button A Display the window screen of screen number 3 Operation of each button Button B Display the window screen of screen number 7 Button C Display the window screen of scre
370. urrence number e Multiple or single comments can be displayed in the order of priority A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area If single comment is selected for display e The GOT can count the bit devices turned ON and store the count in the word device e Details and actions for the comment turned ON can be displayed on the base screen window screen or comment window e The ladder monitor function screen can be activated while the device corresponding to the bit device turned ON is being searched 2 When using the GOT F900 series A comment can be displayed on multiple lines in the display area If single comment is selected for display e The number of bit devices which are now ON can be stored 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 3 Animation Display Functions 5 3 1 Part display function shows a part screen corresponding to a device GOT A900 series Oo GOT F900 series Row This function shows a registered part screen corresponding to a device Screen display is provided only when the GOT A900 series is used 1 Function outline a Shows a part corresponding to ON OFF of a bit device X0 Setting Portion Settings Device X0 lt Case Bit gt tab ON Part No 1 OFF Part No 2 b Shows a part corresponding to ON OFF of a word device D100 p o 5 D100 1 10 gt 100 gt p GOT l Se
371. us Random Fixed Comment No Continuous Random Display No Continuous Random OEdit Cee History H OTe Bit Bit of Word Signed BIN16 g Unsigned BIN16 Signed BIN32 Unsigned BIN32 BCD16 BCD32 Real Device ODevice dialog box Setting of Device No m ORange Setting of Defined case t Comment No Designation of Comment No t O Display No Designation of Detailed display No t O Device reset Unchecked checked OSend mail Occurred Restored Occurred Restored Copy Dori Story Set the history copy destination copy source copy count copied data etc O Print Condition OTitle Unchecked checked O Date Set the text printed in date field OTime Set the text printed in time field QMessage Set the text printed in message field Cumulative time Set the text printed in cumulative time field t OOccur frequency Unchecked checked Set the text printed in occurrence count field OState Set text displayed in status field OState Occurred Unchecked checked print out __ Set the text printed at occurrence O Restored Unchecked checked Set the text printed at restoration OChecks Unchecked checked ______ Set the text printed at checking 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS e Alarm History Form dialog box
372. utes can be changed when the monitor device value reaches the specified value 5 7 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 1 3 ASCII display function shows data stored consecutively within devices as a character string GOT A900 series Eom GOT F900 series Rom This function regards the data stored consecutively in word devices as text data ASCII code and shows them as a character string 1 Function outline a Recognizes the data stored consecutively within the corresponding word devices D10 to D14 as text data and shows them as a character string on the GOT D10 5841H D11 342DH Oo o O D12 0031H Device D10 b Updates the characters according to the condition with the monitor device value changed from a peripheral device sequence program or the like D10 504FH PO D10 5453H D11 5245H RE D11 504FH D12 5441H TA D12 2020H Te D13 2045H E D13 2020H e Operating condition Operating condition Line 1 OPERATE gt Line 1 STOP Setting Portion Settings Setting Portion Settings lt Basic gt tab Device D10 lt Fom gt tab Digis 8 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The ASCII display function consists of the following setting items e ASCII display dialog box a When using the GOT A900 serie
373. utline Using the script function enables the following display controls a Touch keys with interlock functions The lamp is lit when the and Run Siop switches turn ON Running Running Running Running Ready Run Stop Ready Run Stop Ready Run Stop Ready Run Stop Touch Ready button Touch Run Stop button Running lamp is lit b Lamp which changes in display text under multiple conditions Operation controls of lines are exercised with corresponding touch keys and the control states of the three lines are represented by one lamp a H All lines stop Line 1 running Lines 1 3 running All lines stop Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Li e 1 Line 2 Line 3 Line 1 Line 2 Lipe 3 gt Line 1 Line 2 Line 3 Stop all li
374. uweg 2 B NL 1043 AJ Amsterdam Phone 31 0 20 587 67 00 Fax 31 0 20 587 68 39 e mail info gia getronics com NORWAY Beijer Electronics AS Teglverksveien 1 N 3002 Drammen Phone 47 0 32 24 30 00 Fax 47 0 32 84 85 77 e mail info beijer no MPL Technology Sp z o o POLAND ul Sliczna 36 PL 31 444 Krak w Phone 48 0 12 632 28 85 Fax 48 0 12 632 47 82 e mail krakow mpl pl Sirius Trading amp Services srl ROMANIA Bd Lacul Tei nr 1 B RO 72301 Bucuresti 2 Phone 40 0 21 201 7147 Fax 40 0 21 201 7148 e mail sirius_t_s fx ro ACP Autocomp a s SLOVAKIA Chalupkova 7 SK 81109 Bratislava Phone 421 02 5292 22 54 55 Fax 421 02 5292 22 48 e mail info acp autocomp sk PROVENDOR OY FINLAND NEA d o o SLOVENIA Telj nkatu 8 A 3 Stegne 11 FIN 28130 Pori SI 1000 Ljubljana Phone 358 0 2 522 3300 Phone 386 0 1 513 8100 Fax 358 0 2 522 3322 Fax 386 0 1 513 8170 e mail e mail inea inea si UTECO A B E E GREECE Beijer Electronics AB SWEDEN 5 Mavrogenous Str Box 426 GR 18542 Piraeus S 20124 Malm Phone 302 0 10 42 10 050 Phone 46 0 40 35 86 00 Fax 302 0 10 42 12 033 Fax 46 0 40 35 86 02 e mail uteco uteco gr e mail info beijer se Meltrade Automatika Kft HUNGARY ECONOTEC AG SWITZERLAND 55 Harmat St Postfach 282 H 1105 Budapest Phone 36 0 1 2605 602 Fax 36 0 1 2605
375. value display OSize O Value No O Upper OLower OColor Extended tab OOffset Checked unchecked Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No OStore memory Checked unchecked OClear trigger Checked Clear on trigger rise Clear on trigger fall unchecked Device ODevice dialog box OValue not X Unchecked checked Hidden value setting Set the Device No displayed Y Unchecked checked Hidden value setting OOperation at frequency y Interrupt over time Initialize and continue Checked unchecked OAccumulate Average 7 Writing interval Device ODevice dialog box O Set the Device No OTrigger Type Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Rise Fall ON Sampling OFF Sampling Device ODevice dialog box o Olnitial display Set the Device No Mask None AND OR XOR Pattern Set the mask value OShift None Left Right CONo of shift Set the shift count Expression Olnput Expression dialog box PAA Set the calculation expression 3 Setting method Refer to the following items of the help for details of the settings and operation method 1 Choose Help Object 2 Choose Setting up graph display gt Setting up scattered chart display from Contents of Help e Security offset and expression can be set e The scattered chart displ
376. value of the monitor device For display method case word only e The displayed parts display colors and attributes can be changed according to ON OFF of the bit devices e By setting the part screen number to 0 the displayed part screen can be deleted e When switching between parts screens of different sizes large to small unnecessary display is automatically deleted 2 When using the GOT F900 series e Parts registered by the user can be displayed e Part display color and attributes can be changed according to the ON OFF of the bit device For display method case bit only e The displayed parts can be erased by setting their numbers to unregistered numbers e When switching between parts screens of different sizes large to small unnecessary display is automatically deleted 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 5 3 2 Part movement display function shows the movement of a part corresponding to a device GOT A900 series Eom GOT F900 series This function shows the movement or locus of a part figure which corresponds to ON OFF of a bit device or the value of a word device in the specified moving method 1 Function outline a Specifies movement display coordinates with the values of two word devices D100 D101 Regarding the values of the two word devices D100 D101 as the X and Y coordinates this function changes the values of the two word devices D100 D101 to display the movement of a part figure
377. vice Continuous Random o OBase Upper Lower OFixed Numerical setting ODevice O Device dialog box Set the Device No Extended tab O Scale display Unchecked checked Scale points Designation of Scale points 0 2 to 11 Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 O Scale value Unchecked checked display Size Designation of Size V x H m Value no Designation of number of numerical values to be displayed 0 2 to 11 Upper Lower Designation of displayed upper limit value displayed lower limit value O Color Designation of Color 0 to 255 OSecurity Designation of Security 0 to 15 OOffset Unchecked checked Device ODevice dialog box Set the Device No Q Sort Unchecked checked oO L Ascending Descending Specify the order of bar graph sorting t QO Trigger Type Ordinary ON OFF Rise Fall Range Sampling Setting of Sampling Interval Bit trigger Device Device dialog box Set the Device No H 16bit 32bit Signed BIN Unsigned BIN Real t ORange OEdit Range dialog box Set the conditional expression for word device range Olnitial display Unchecked checked QHold display Unchecked checked OBit trigger T OBit Bit count setting Expression Set O Multiple Bit Trigger dialog box Set the bit
378. vice turns on Mode Cumulation lt Monitor Device gt tab Delete No Continuous Comment No Continuous Device X10 Display style Occurences Restorations Checks Cumulative Occur frequency b Error detail display only when the GOT A900 series is used Details and action for the comment turned on when an error occurred can be displayed on the base window window screen or comment window OCCURRED MESSAGE RESTORED CHECKS 98 06 01 10 25 Line 1 error 11 25 f SES Move Detailed Delete upward display display Detailed display screen appears by one touch touch key entry x When detail display is provided by one touch the above message selection cursors do not appear amp Window screen of the designated number is Setting Portion Alarm History Common dialog box Alarm History Form dialog box lt Form gt tab 98 06 01 12 05 Line 2 error 98 06 01 12 35 Line 3 error Base screen of the The specified comment is designated number is displayed on the special window screen for alarm displayed displayed history display 7 ia f Line 1 CHECK S Line t CHECK Line 1 CHECK Alarm history display Alarm history display Register as comments the detailed contents and corrective actions for when the specified devices turn to Display on the specified window sc
379. w of the GT Designer Select New in the selection dialog box of the project displayed when the drawing software is started and set the GOT PLC type Select the Common Switching Screen menu to set the switching device for the base screen and the window screen Base screen switching device default value DO Select Common Switching Station No menu to designate the device for switching the station number Select the Common Password menu to set password for each security level to show hide objects Default value of the security level 0 lowest Select the Project Option menu to set the operation environment Toolbar status shown hidden Display method of grid etc of the GT Designer Select the View Color Setting menu and designate display colors for each object and figure by using the color list box Available only for 256 color TFT display If station number is not switched setting is not required If the security function is not used setting is not required 6 OPERATION FOR DISPLAY OF MONITORING SCREEN ON GOT MELSOFT 6 2 Operations for Drawing Figures GOT A900 series oO GOT F900 series o l Operations for drawing figures are described in the help window For further details refer to the help window of the GT Designer 6 3 Operations for Object Setting GOT A900 series o GOT F900 series O The following describes the outline of the operation procedures for drawing o
380. with an external speaker Only when the GOT A900 series is used b When the value of the specified word device D100 falls within the the specified range 100 or more condition turns OFF X10 write Only when the GOT A900 series is used When D100 value rises to or above 100 condition set to When condition is enabled D100 value rises to or above 100 GOT is enabled bit device X10 of PLC CPU is turned OFF Current temperature R g Current temperature 26 100 Operating status pra Operating status Operating Standby Setting Portion Settings lt Trigger gt tab Trigger 1 Word Range Device D100 Range D100 gt 100 A Action Reset lt Action gt tab Device X10 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS Project _ 2 Setting items MELSOFT The observe status function consists of the following setting items e Observe Status dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series O Trigger Action dialog box O Screen OAdd OEdit O Storing device OObserve cycle Ordinary Screen type Base screen Window screen CONo Browse Screen Image dialog box O Trigger Action dialog box Of Trigger Of Action O Delete OObserve cycle Ordinary Sampling Setting of Sampling
381. ws an error code or error message at error occurrence You need not create error messages and numbers as they are registered in the GOT Occurrence time is also displayed at occurrence of a GOT error Use this function to detect PLC CPU MELSECNET communication errors Voltage dropped below 4 rated value Setting Portion Settings Type System b Shows comments corresponding to multiple bit devices which are ON in the specified priority order order of ascending ON bit device numbers for the GOT F900 series a a Occurrence Occurrence order Qo order To m Message 4 m Message 2 X1 Eg X3 Check products gt 2 x1 x3 Check products x2 J z 3 X2 ses fault 1 X3 I 1 X3 I CLI lt NE Setting Portion Settings lt Basiontab Type User lt Form gt tab Device points 4 Device X1 Continuous checked 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT 2 Setting items The alarm list display function consists of the following setting items e Alarm List dialog box a When using the GOT A900 series Q OType System 2 a a O Shape Unchecked checked Shape Image List dialog box Cho
382. x Set the Device No Range O Edit range dialog box Set the device value range m Data length 16bit 32bit Data type Signed BIN Unsigned BIN BCD Real O Shape EA Basic figure Free figure O Switch area reverse Unchecked checked Buzzer Always set Set only fill requirements Always not set L One shot During Push o m O ON OFF O Shape i figure Image List dialog box Choose the Shape Free figure O Panelkit dialog box Choose the Shape O Frame Designation of Frame 0 to 255 O Switch _ Designation of Switch 0 to 255 Pattern _ Designation of Pattern O Background Designation of Background 0 to 255 O Style Regular Bold Solid Raised Color _ Designation of Color 0 to 255 O Solid Designation of Solid of characters OVxH W Designation of Size V xH High quality font _OText O Diea T OOT OText dialog box Set the touch key text O Copy from ON Copy ON time text setting to OFF time text setting O Indirect 7 O Device 5 O Device dialog box Setting of Device No O Fixed ON Off Numerical setting O Preview No ______ Setting of Comment No A a AN a To the following page 5 OBJECT FUNCTIONS MELSOFT From the previous page
383. x x x xIx x x x x x the GOT side programs scripts Addition of the function which automatically updates the path of the script file in the project A e bP A PS OS OEE T AS ETS LAS 28 x3 data folder if the folder moves Addition of the function which can use GOT internal devices GD GB for substitution x x xi x xi xixixixi xx x x processing without substitution delay Addition of the function that updates the script data read to GT Designer to the latest Scrat Gail faa Nac ated a a ea a a Vac data xixixixi xixixixixixixixixixIixiIOIOIoOlIolIolIolIo x Addition of the function which displays video image on the GOT by connection of the video E PE beds dca SA BEE S dl ck input interface unit Addition of the function which sends various data e g alarm history data recipe file and xixixixi xixixixi x xix xx screen image as electronic mail GT SoftGOT only Addition of the function which displays personal computer screen on the GOT by XIX EX XFX XIX VXXX I XIX X connection of the RGB input interface unit App 28 APPENDICES MELSOFT peserpien einen As ate Jole Aa u fa eaea ato te alk Te au bec Addition of the function that can specify the station number switching destination for the station number change device x x x gt x xrx gt xp xixyxpxt x x x gt xpx px px x Station according to the screen type number base overlap window 1 switching i Addition of the touch key

GT Works Version5/GT Designer Version5 Reference Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents